Home

YearbookFusion User`s Manual

1. Rotates the gradient Center X and Center Y When the Rectangular Circular and Diamond gradients are selection you can define the location of the highlight by altering the two center point axes with these controls Creative applications Gradients can be applied to frames containing images textures or to empty tinted frames for a variety of creative effects It can be used to soften images or apply texture or colour effects Example 1 Gradients applied to images Frame containing a photo with gradient applied on top of a tinted canvas background frame To recreate this effect tint the canvas background with a solid color Apply a single image and expand it to fill the background then apply a gradient to image Images by Kent Smith 2009 138 YearbookFusion User s Manual Example 2 Gradients applied to texture Frame with a dotScrap paper and a gradient applied on top of canvas containing another dotScrap paper To recreate this effect drop a paper on the background canvas frame Add a second paper on the canvas then add a gradient Adjust the size of the frame and type of gradient to change the effect The bride photo example has the gradient frame on top of the central image the senior portrait shows the gradient frame underneath the central image Image by David Ziser Image by Kent Smith Example 3 Gradients applied to tinted empty frame Two empty frames with background opaci
2. Frame Border IBonder Width 0 R25 G 255 B 25 Opacity 755 Ft image Shadow Inside insat Width 0 06 satte _ Matte rowers hg mea hina limet jlo C rop Lradbent Gradient Linear i SO Mnees 4 MiPoint 0 Angle 0 Ceniet OF8 Cenie Y 0S5 Position amp Size x 2573 Y 1 833 Widhi 45 Heght 36 Angir Note that you can also drag the Width and Height controls directly to set the width and height interactively from the Frame Editor Sizing frames to match the images they contain There will be occasions when an image has been cropped by the frame edge but you wish to display the entire image To accomplish this quickly right mouse select the image and choose Snap Frame To Image from the list of options or press Ctrl F Sizing images to match the frames containing them This action does not resize the frame but will resets the image position to fill the Surrounding frame as completely as possible To accomplish this right mouse down on the image and choose Snap Image to Frame from the list of options or press Ctrl I Setting the frame to display the entire image This setting will automatically snap the frame to expose the entire image and remove the border Select the frame and right mouse down on it then select Frame to Show Entire Image An image does not need to be assigned to frame to set this option making it very useful for setting up templates such as contact
3. The Image Editor contains controls for Opacity Angle Brightness Contrast Gamma Blur Black amp White and Sepiatone e RGB It also contains Background Fill options which overlays color and texture on your frame Learn more about this feature in the background color and pattern section of this manual Click here to learn about the Use Canvas as frame background option If you change the attributes assigned to an image within a frame the image will carry the attributes This means if you swap an image toa 143 Photo by David Ziser 2009 different frame it will keep the attributes 144 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 3 2 Opacity Alpha is the correct term for transparency an image is completely opaque when it has an alpha of one and completely transparent when it has an alpha of zero In practical terms reducing the alpha of an image will reveal the background color for a frame and if that background color is itself transparent the frames and canvas behind that Angle Images can be rotated inside their frames for example to correct for a tilted camera or reorienting an image within a gradient matte Drag this control left and right to adjust the image you may need to crop the image when you are done This effect can also be accomplished directly on the frame by spinning the image via the frame rotation handles while simultaneo
4. o Appending a project no longer changes the name of the current project o Problem with missing DLL fixed o Leading spaces in text no longer ignored o Dragging out a new frame while the dropper is active works again o Web links for images in exported collages work again o Closing FotoFusion after AutoCollage wizard doesn t prompt for save o Editors do not open off screen o Forward back refresh stop buttons in community tab once again consistent with other browsers Previous version updates For your interest this section describes the evolution of FotoFusion through the versions Version 3 3 The following new features are available in FotoFusion PRINT v3 3 e Support for multiple pages o An entire multi page album can now be created as a single project o Autocollage can now create a multi page album automatically o Batch Processing of all pages in a multi page album to JPEG files is now supported e Custom EXIF tags o Custom EXIF tags can be used for complex frame label The following new features are available in FotoFusion PRO and PRINT v3 3 e Midpoint Guide o Panoramic canvases include a center guide line for avoiding album seams The following new features are available in all versions of FotoFusion v3 3 e AutoPopulate o An entire template can now be filled with images in a single click e Rotation Snapping o Holding down the alt key while rotating now snaps to increments of 45 degrees e Image Flipping o Images can be now b
5. 2009 56 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Release the mouse button when you are finished drawing the new frame Result you will create a new frame atop the existing collage and the picture next in line in the dropper will be placed into your newly created frame automatically Picking Up Images You can also pick up images to place back into the dropper to move them to other frames or save them for later e Select a frame Either o Click P on your keyboard o or click on the image number o or right mouse down on an image and select Pick up selected Any of these techniques will pick up the selected image holding it in the dropper for use elsewhere You can then add the image back to the canvas as you would any other image in the dropper Default Image Sizes You may find that images when dragged into a free form canvas appear too large or too Small The reason for this is that the default canvas DPI typically 300 DPI is being used to calculate the size of the image you are dragging in Suppose that you are creating a canvas with an aspect ratio of 10x10 Perhaps you intend to print it at 10 x10 ona printer which can handle 300 DPI You can always change your mind later and change the resolution up or down by changing the settings located in the Canvas Settings dialogue box For example to print the image as a poster at 10x10 feet you can choose 10 x10 canvas by default Take the above situation
6. Image PAHAR In this case clicking this button will make all images properties match the current values of the selected frame Tip for Extreme users if you have a multi page project and would like to change editor properties across the entire project simultaneously hold the Ctrl key on your keyboard while clicking the button This is useful in the following circumstances e changing your canvas background fill across an entire album e changing the frame border color or width across all pages Note if you have a mix of papers and background fills on your canvas do not use this feature eg if you change the tint on one paper and apply to all any pages with canvas background fill will become transparent as the paper will have O on the background Opacity Working with Presets Clicking on the gt gt button exposes tools for working with presets A preset is a set of saved values for the parameters in the current editor Using presets allows you to save a series of settings you like and call them up to quickly set values To save a preset 1 create settings on an object image border text or shadow 2 click the gt gt button 3 choose Save As Preset 4 enter a name for the preset To apply a preset 1 Select an object and open an editor for it image border text or shadow 2 Click the gt gt button 3 Choose the preset from the list of presets that drops down 2009 62 Yearb
7. r h Be Poles Please note that you will need Ta muia check mark each subdirectory you a Suede mkh wish to include Check marking an CAD iga upper level directory will NOT oe aai display the images contained within K atins the subdirectories contained within it Hold the Control key while Sa checkmarking an upper level AC Cheers category to include all bee subdirectories beneath it TT Once your images have displayed you can e add keywords one at a time select an individual image then apply the keywords under the properties tab e add keywords to groups of images multiple select images Ctrl click on each image to add to the group then apply the keywords e add keywords to pre sorted groups of images drag and drop images into the buckets then add keywords to the entire bucket Adding keywords 2009 194 YearbookFusion User s Manual 8 1 The Keyword editor allows you to assign e any words or groups of works you want This includes proper names adjectives or ew Keyword labeling information the choice is Existing Kaywenhi yours the TYPE of item you are classifying For instance add background textures to Embellishment gt gt Papers to make these items appear under the Papers search hover on the Create screen e the Theme predefined themes which correspond to common photo subjects e Ratings 1 5 stars Type Sakti w hermes Gelart n You can
8. 40 te of canvas width To make them drop larger then increase the size Soup eels Detected in Abun eg 60 a Ack Liver y h doi f ou can also set the target dpi for your images in C Always Corner i ae 5 miit this editor though it is recommended to leave it Ci Never Convert at 300 dpi to ensure a high quality interface Preferences Rerverce Mousewheal Zoom show Advanced Search DPT Wy Antares e Vais aet by Pusher New aani Fip Layouts Wien Pages change Sades image Eding Copy aia r aain Aaa Prompt lal Defaut dite Abaays Prompt C Change Lipdate Chard Dropping multiple copies of the same image You can drop more than one copy of an image onto the canvas Simply hold the Ctrl key down as you release your mouse button A copy of the image will be placed on the canvas but not be removed from the dropper thereby allowing you to place additional copies on the canvas Adding a frame while dropping A true FotoFusion power tool is the ability to add a frame while dropping images It allows you to determine the shape and size of the frame into which the image will be dropped If you want to add a new frame to the collage as you are currently dropping images e Press and hold down the F key then move the mouse to the top left corner of where you would like the new frame to be e Press the left mouse button and hold it down e Drag the mouse down and to the right defining a new frame as you go
9. CANVAS then A Show OVERLAY IMAGE rsa Sibrarueth INFO or right mouse down outside of the canvas area on the Create screen and select OVERLAY IMAGE INFO Select the tags you would like to include such as the file name the page number and or the frame number Change the attributes of the overlay text text opacity background opacity and alignment options e Turn on the SHOW checkbox to display the file information on the Create screen 2009 File amp Project Management 237 NOTE the Export to file Export to Email and Export to Web screens all contain an Overlay Image Info checkbox To apply these settings to your output turn the check box on The Used Image List The Used Image List is available to Extreme users This feature generates a text file list of the file names and locations of every image used in a project To generate a list click on FILE on the menu then select PROJECT MANAGEMENT gt gt Export List of Used Images You will then be prompted to give a name to the text file and to select a location where to save the file Once saved you can open the file by double clicking on it The text can be cut and paste into any other application of your choice Multi page projects will be displayed by page for added convenience Maintaining the Project Database FotoFusion maintains a database on your system This database saved thumbnails of dotScrap graphics
10. Cont d or change it to your choice of text NF X tet PIP 1s w1 2009 332 YearbookFusion User s Manual eg or part 2 peated Hak WV EL et iwy Ies Stalwick Cont d hmo Dar hace jy See Mimie The second section of the Header area is the Font editor which allows you to apply attributes such as a font color etc to your header text Learn more about the Font editor in the main section of this manual Do not change the information in the text portion of this editor It will not accept changes as it is programmed to display the information used to group the panel E ij a A HI LETTE sar EF alu 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 333 18 2 1 3 Populating amp sorting your panel Populating your panel with images Populating your panel refers to the process of adding the images to the empty panel grid Before the panel can be populated your PSPA database must be imported into the current project and an empty panel must be on an album side page Note If you want a common background on all of your panels be sure to add the background before the panel is populated To access the Panel Population options click on the first icon in the Panel Editor mie el ae AS F Ea _ z The first section is the Panel Population editor which allows you to specify who will appear in the panel everyone on
11. Rendering Multiple Pages Multi page albums can be batch processed into separate image files in a single action allowing you to render an entire album with a few mouse clicks Click here for more detail on rendering Emailing Multiple Pages Multi page albums can be emailed simultaneously Click here for more detail on emailing Printing Multiple Pages Multi page albums can be emailed simultaneously Click here for more detail on emailing Publishing Multiple Pages Multi page albums can be published to your web gallery simultaneously Click here for more detail on publishing 6 5 2 Flipping Layouts The Pages hover enables you to flip layouts automatically or per page This feature is useful to create mirror image pages or repurpose template pages in different arrangements To access flipping options right mouse select any page thumbnail You will see a list of menu items including flipping options Turn on AUTOFLIP LAYOUT to automatically flip your composition left right when the page is duplicated 2009 The Create Tab 183 ee ee ee ee ee Ahum Tei Page Spel Sheel Lover 3haat wf Ah Sade 11 y L5 eet Left Side w Flight Sde Paothade fram autre Exchuck from page Severe PEJE MENS Save Page as Template Auto Dupicate Page Delale Pay enane Page Move Page Ti Gao Ta Page Chh RHN v Auto Fip Layout Fip Layout Liat iaighet d Fip Layout Topibiotteen H To
12. The template will be filled with your selected images automatically 2009 AutoTools 75 5 3 You can swap images from one frame to another or reposition and crop them if you wish to fine tune your arrangement To SORT your images before AutoPopulating Hover on the AutoPopulate button and select the sort criteria you would like to use from the drop box list Aun Pigi Fi the eigi hames n pe Care wah tha mages in the Hagin aces Sort by a Tl Reverse Ben Fe When you click on AutoPopulate the sorting criteria will be applied to assign the images into frames Generating multiple copies of a single template Extreme users will enjoy using AutoPopulate in conjunction with the AutoDuplicate feature This will allow a single empty template to be repeatedly populated from a series of images eg contact sheet sports card etc Learn more in the AutoDuplicate section of this manual AutoDistribute The AutoDistribute option produces an even grid of all the images on your canvas 2009 YearbookFusion User s Manual 5 4 Add your images to the canvas via Autocollage or by dropping them individually through the Images hover Choose AutoDistribute from the Tools menu to create a grid Paras paapa Fme ETR ae l ie isis fale Foki Locate Pima MEEF Am H Ms Aas tlle aa Scere Gabor a re Akiri Fahy eerie fea Sr at FuhoPogubate b
13. To select all images in the directory click on the first picture then shift click on the last one To select images one by one and Add To List then To multi select images click on each while holding the Control Add To List key then To select all images in the current view select Next click the CREATIVE OPTIONS tab when you are done On the CREATIVE OPTIONS tab you can make several choices Extreme users can select Multi Page options Select the number of pages in the project to add an equal number 2009 of images to each page or select the number of images per page or add one image per page for a 72 YearbookFusion User s Manual AutoCollage from within an existing project The AutoCollage button creates a new arrangement for the frames currently in use on the canvas or in the dropper or in the buckets Click this button to rearrange your collage as many times as you like until you find an arrangement that is close to what you want If you hover over the AutoCollage button meaning let your cursor float above the icon without clicking you will open the AutoCollage options hover Select any of the options to change the look of your collage Aung A i fc lee te Ht IFA clan lam imi cf aT gee Lr re arrange LHE E Ai baige 4 ogen ey Lisame L facii Scat fe Sachs Sat bye Ponders Dioni Scat y C Jurie C Mantan
14. cme Seer 2009 188 YearbookFusion User s Manual 7 2 It contains more options than the Search hover including categories to help you quickly find and sort your images and projects Using the Search feature in the Organizer can help you manage your projects more effectively The first box allows you to type in keywords to refine your search These include the file name or keywords that have been assigned to the item The Source combo box allows you to specify where you are looking either your own database projects or graphics stored keyworded on your own system the LumaPix Store the dotScrap Marketplace or a kit you have loaded in FotoFusion The default is everything to allow you to see your own content and server content as well The Type combo box allows you to specify if you are looking for saved work or a particular style of graphic For instance you can search for TYPE gt gt Embellishments gt gt Papers to see all available background textures or you can look for Saved Work gt gt Pages to access individual pages saved within multi page projects and then append them into a master project right mouse select the thumbnail The Publisher combo box allows you to specify who is the creator of the graphic content Advanced search features allow you to further refine your search to include assigned categories By default these options are turned off To turn on the Advanced Search op
15. e By setting the font size directly the Font Editor includes a Size control measured in point size Simply drag or click this control to set a size for the text in the currently selected frame Note that doing so will check the lock size option for that text box this becomes important if you later want to resize the text by the second method namely manually resizing with the text frame handles You will need to UNLOCK it before the text will resize when you pull on the handles e By resizing the text frame interactively If the text is unlocked pulling on the frame handles will resize the text Changing the drop box options beside the font size will cause the font size to relate to the size of your text frame in different ways e Resize to Fit Your text will grow or shrink to fit the frame Point size is ignore e Lock and Clip Your text will stay exactly at the point size selected If your text frame is shrunk too small the text will be cut off This is the option to choose if you need an exact point size 2009 The Create Tab 171 6 4 3 e Do Not Exceed Your text will grow but only to the maximum font size This feature is particularly useful for creating templates where the text content may change based on exif tag data Other Attributes Other font attributes include bold italic strikeout and underline The width of the strikeout and underline can be changed via the adjacent line size option
16. 2009 98 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 1 4 2 and EA zoom in and out of the canvas at a set interval allows you to mouse down on the canvas to reposition it resets the view to the default magnification opens the Canvas Settings editor allowing you to change the canvas size add bleeds and safes etc The Scale slider allows you to dynamically zoom in and out of the canvas Selection tools There are several Selection tools available e Adding to and removing from selections e Marquee Selection You can also use bulk tools to work with multiple frames at once e Select All e Select by Type You should also be aware of e Layer filtering Adding to and removing from selections To select a frame click on it with the left mouse button To add another frame to the selection forming a multi selection hold down the Ctrl key and click on another frame Multiple frames can be selected at once by holding down the Shift key and clicking on another frame If a frame is already selected clicking on it while holding down the Ctrl key will remove it from the list of selected frames To deselect all frames click on the canvas the area outside the ruler is generally the easiest place to do this Marquee selection To select all the frames within a region move the mouse to where there are no frames just exposed canvas moving outside the canvas area is often the easiest way to get to
17. 206 YearbookFusion User s Manual Focal Length z Last Name Student s Last Name The Output Tab There are many options for using your original layouts to preserve and share them with friends family and clients You can e Export your collages into flattened graphic file format eg jpg tiff to send to your favourite photo developer pro printing lab or copy shop e Upload your work to your own web gallery e Print your work on your local printer You cannot transfer a FotoFusion file Saved as scrap from one computer to another to a printing facility or to another person s computer FotoFusion needs to maintain the links between your images and the project file in order to work Using the output tab to render your files to universally acceptable file formats will allow you to transfer your finished products to others in an non editable format To transfer your projects in an editable format you will need to archive the projects These archives can be opened by other FotoFusion users with license types equivalent or greater than your own Frequently Asked Questions about Printing Services Can LumaPIx print my work LumaPix Inc is strictly a software development company As such we do not provide printing services You can however send your projects to any printing service of your choice that will serve your area Which labs or photo development services will accept my FotoFusion projects Any lab o
18. Adding watermarks 194 adding watermarks to email 199 adding watermarks to web output 199 Adding words 164 167 Adobe RGB 17 Advanced search 184 album 14 250 251 Album production workflow 251 Album Side 79 Album theme 201 Album Two Page Spread 79 Align 111 align bottom 120 align left 120 align right 120 align top 120 aligning frames 120 Alignment 111 120 172 Alignment options 120 Alignment Tools 120 164 167 164 167 Alpha 272 Amount 162 Angle 141 162 another computer 13 Append a page 177 append pages 226 appending template pages 102 appending templates 66 Apply changes 305 apply changes across a multipage project 59 archive 233 archive a single project 233 archive multiple projects 233 Archiving 233 Archiving and Transfering Project Files 233 Arrange 120 arranging frames 122 arranging images 43 Aspect ratio 47 113 272 2009 342 YearbookFusion User s Manual Aspect ratio lock 113 attribute set 306 316 auto duplicate 76 auto tools 69 auto align 120 autocollage 64 69 180 autocollage wizard 69 autodistribute 69 75 autodistriobute with sort 75 autoduplicate 76 180 auto duplicate 76 autoduplicate template 66 autojumble 69 automatic conversion 79 automatically close hovers 38 autopopulate 69 autopopulate with sort 74 autoPpopulate 74 autorotate canvas 182 autorotate entire page 182 autorotate page 182 autoupdate presets 62 B backdrop 69 Bac
19. LETETTE T l Here is an example of a Panel set grouping Notice how all a oe associated labels appears below the grouping SO ise ee ae options Group by Teacher kd Sort by Grade Click on one of the names in this list or hold the Ctrl key on your keyboard and select more than one Darrah A ee f You will now be able to Sareea Le e user the up and down arrow keys to move one or more Sued groups to a different position in the panel set For Taage instance maybe the graduating classes need to appear at Levels the front of the book select their groups and use the up arrow to advance them past all the undergrad groups e turn off a group Maybe your graduating class shouldn t appear in this panel set In this example select these groups by their teacher s name and turn off the ENABLE button They will disappear from the panel set turn off Page Breaks between panels To save space maybe you would like all the Grade 4s to run one after the other Select their teachers say Darroch Germain and Stalwick in this case and turn off the Page Break button Now the Germain class will start on the same page as the last line of the Darroch class and the Stalwick class will start right following the Germain class 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 335 18 3 Sorting options Sorting allows you to organize the panels internal to the grouping This is useful to first alphabetize your images and second
20. Layout flipping enabled in the Pages hover 2009 18 YearbookFusion User s Manual Panel user interface completely revamped to support new features Version 4 6 builds 60648 60649 60736 61290 Beta Release for Yearbook Publishers only Features Remote Storage e Remote storage allows designated users as enabled by their yearbook publishers to Save and load projects to a LumaPix server This feature enables file sharing within FotoFusion on a local network It will enable multiple users to share common project files regardless of their physical location PSPA Extensions e Support added for extensions to PSPA standard title department streamlining staff student page creation 20182 e Images with missing data at import triaged into named buckets 15827 e PSPA data fields display in organizer in column view can be selected ordered and persisted 15324 Update Channels e Update preferences can be chosen in User Preferences e Update channels allow publishers and users to set their software update preferences or target to a specific build number Most users will choose to run a mainstream build others may choose to target beta or alpha builds to benefit from new features or fixes on under tested builds Editing e Frame currently targeted by dropper highlighted in red not blue cast e Default external editor preference can be set 20108 20104 e Safe and bleed guidelines drawn as d
21. Loops when the layout is emoded Gr pubish d too wb Ht E 6 3 9 The Shadow Editor Image and text frames can both cast Drop Shadows Shadows can be adjusted directly in the Image Toolbox or in the Shadow Editor Adjusting the Shadow through the Image Toolbox The Shadows control in the Image Toolbox can be dragged to edit the shadow e Drag left right Shadow Offset e Drag up down Shadow Blur a Click here for more information on how to drag the controls Adjusting the Shadow through the Shadow Editor Click the shadow control on the Toolbox to open the Editor for more detailed control 2009 The Create Tab 163 The Editor contains controls for e Offset e Blur Angle Amount Shadow Inside Shadow Color which can create a variety of different effects for your images Image by Kent Smith Offset The shadow offset determines how far from the frame the shadow is displayed If you increase the value the shadow will appear farther away from the image Blur Changing the blur makes the shadow harder or softer Angle The angle determines the apparent position of the light source producing the shadow of the frame Amount 2009 164 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 4 The Amount determines the opacity of the shadow effect Shadow Inside If the shadow is inside the border does not cast a shadow but the image itself does
22. Page Move to the previous page multi page project Up Page Move to the next page multi page project Down D Add a blank frame Close currently selected editor toolbox or dropper elet Remove selected item s e i plus left mouse click multiple selection And the rest In the Organizer assigns selected image s to corresponding bucket Align group of selected images to bottom of page 267 2009 268 YearbookFusion User s Manual Align selected to each other gt bottom Align group of selected images to left edge of page Align selected to each other gt left Align group of selected images to center of page Align selected to each other gt center Align group of selected images to right edge of page Align selected to each other gt right Align group of selected images to top of page Align selected to each other gt top Ctrl in matte cutting tool zoom out minus in matte cutting tool zoom in Select all items in a search hover or organizer preview i er Update the description and hotlink for the current frame ae Snap Frame to Image Ungroup 2009 Reference cet fee a new frame Make grouped frames editable individually ee Snap Image to Frame Alem Merge selected frames eae Open saved project Add a new printer page segment a boa Sparse Autocollage ar aono Draw printer page segment a Split sele
23. Pome beebe Pegs CP fers bowel Page Lapout unje 3 tees foc rm Peruri ne fa tT Hema Ps uand ia Epi bre iren boar Brda in En petri i raaa th Faridin y laari et pirina apiet y The Search groups can be expanded and contracted by clicking on the title bar To launch the content from the Search hover e Individual graphics drag the thumbnails directly onto your canvas e Kits double click to launch the KIT PREVIEW then drag the thumbnails onto the canvas e Projects Templates Ready Made Pages and Page Layout Guides Double click on the thumbnail to launch the project onto the Canvas Saving your own Search presets To Save a search as a permanent search hover click on the gt gt icon at the top of the hover and select Create New Give the search hover a name it will become available to show in any of the three hover docks by clicking on the button in the dock 6 3 Image Frame Tools A frame is a window placed on the canvas A frame is actually a layered object It consists of 2009 106 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 1 6 3 1 1 e a matte the hole where images colors or textures can be displayed e a border which can be edited or removed e a shadow which can be edited or removed These layers can be turned on and off in FotoFusion so you can have a frame that does not cast a shadow or contains no image content or has no border Extreme users who export t
24. Prothe fradi utt Exclude from page sequence ae SORES Save Page as Template Auto Dupicate Page Delale Paye Hamim Fap Move Page To Go Ta Page EEr SFN Ta AUG LIOR gt Fap Layout Leftiiight Flip Layat Tep Matte r If you duplicate or move the album side and the gutter changes side the page contents will swap sides Pop ii Faj 2 See the section on Layout Flipping to learn how to change the orientation of your page content outside of the AutoFlipping option The Create Tab tab sets FotoFusion into editing mode Once selected the canvas will be displayed and all design features of FotoFusion available for use 2009 The Create Tab 79 6 1 6 1 1 In CREATE you can e add and arrange images and text within frames e use the Auto tools e edit the canvas including the canvas background frames images and text Canvas Tools The canvas is the main workspace the background onto which all other elements will be placed You can think of it as a blank sheet of paper The canvas itself is nothing more than a normal image frame locked to the dimensions of the canvas size Like any other image frame it can be tinted a solid color be given attributes from the Image editor or accept an image or a texture If you want to use an image already dropped onto the canvas right mouse select the image and Set as Canvas Background or pick the image up by th
25. e Adding page number to your project To include EXIF information open the attributes editor for a text frame and click on the Tags button imaga Layout Number L avert Cart Layout Type Paje Pree F L iNo pad Sheet 1 Mo pad Project Anal 1 U rr Tt es T Sire Pts 69 Resize bo Fil E LJLIGI EEJ GGJ Sheet 003 or 002003 l y o R Sheet O03 or 00 003 it heal De Dgz 000 Sheet 002 or 002000 ARANA Man Sheet 0007 of 00070005 DOE aS Sheet UOI Thebes l E Allow Line Breaks Standard Ligahures pel This will display a list of supported EXIF tags Click on the tags to see a full list of tags available Click an entry in this list to add that tag to the current text contents The tag will appear as TAG in the editor and be replaced with the actual EXIF information in the collage itself You can enter tags manually for example as Day in the text contents if you like Page number is not encoded within image exif data When this tag is applied to text on canvas it will display the corresponding page number in a multi page project Extreme only Learn how to add page numbering to all pages in a multipage project simultaneously in the Multipage Project Management section of this user s manual 2009 The Create Tab 169 6 4 2 Custom EXIF Tags FotoFusion EXTREME allows you to edit a configuration file that defines the EXIF tags available within FotoFusion If you c
26. Collages should you need to edit the list It can be opened with Windows Notepad for easy editing Editing the email message Enter a subject line and a message text This will appear on the subject line of your email and as the text body of your message 2009 The Share Tab 197 Mencage cee Tree This i oaar uart Including Original Images Your email can contain just the collage or it can contain the collage and scaled down versions of all the original images that make up the collage The latter allows the recipient of your mail to click on images in the collage and see the original images on their own To enable the inclusion of original images turn on the Include Scaled Down Original Images option Hinchee Scaled Lown Original Images To include information about the image files you are using turn on the Overlay Image Info option Overlay Image Info These options can be configured under the TOOLS menu item in the Canvas gt gt Overlay Image info area or by selecting right mouse down outside of your canvas in the Create screen 2009 198 YearbookFusion User s Manual For Extreme users you can specify if you want to send a multi page email All Pages or a single page Selected Page l i T J Inchude Scated Lcewn Orgpreal Ti Jada rrii r 3 Peren Sena CiiteasieScueadownCvgnatbmagee Eikas oee a9 Page Specifying compression image sizes a
27. Combined with other image and frame editor effects you can create a very interesting composition Do the following to see the interesting effects it can add to your projects 1 Add one or more images as you normally would to your canvas 2 Draw an empty frame on your canvas 3 Open the image editor s General tab and turn on User canvas as frame background and turn off Show drop photo here when empty 4 At this point you can play around with Image and Frame editor preferences Here is an example how this feature can be used in different ways 2009 The Create Tab 149 overlay frame with RGB overlay frame with a shadow Image editor Original Image with basic overlay frame three overlay frames one with three overlay frames stac b w turned on two with sepia no with shadows and a tinted bi borders shadows 2009 150 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 4 Gallery of effects using frames Below is a mini gallery to show how you can use the tools available in the Frame Editor the Image Editor and Shadow Editor combined with textures from the Marketplace to create a variety of design options for your projects Example 1 FotoFusion s default frame Example 1 Example 2 A translucent border effect Frame Editor border width increased border opacity decreased shadow inside on Shadow Editor frame shadow
28. Ligature controls Certain Open type fonts will have higher level features to specify how particular character sets will be displayed Most fonts will not have the ability to use this feature Text Alignment amp Spacing Text frames can be arranged on the canvas just like Image frames using the Arrange tool on the toolbox Consult the section on Arranging amp Distributing frames to learn how alignment features work Within the text frame text can be positioned by setting the alignment in the text editor Using the Text Editor Alignment and Spacing Options The following options appear in the text editor to adjust the position of your text relative to the text frame and to change the spacing between parts of the text 1 i 1 Flush Right Center Flush Left Click on the buttons to 2 3 select your option a m aE OJ AAE 2 Justification with all characters Justification with spaces i EE G a El only Click on the buttons to select your option i mm 3 Align to top of frame Align to center of frame Align to A K bottom of frame Click on the buttons to select your option 4 Inter character spacing changes the space between letters R restores to default Click drag on the value to change Click on R to restore to the default value 2009 172 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 4 4 5 Inter line spacing increases the spacing between lines of text R restores to default Click drag on th
29. Ph Fn eae OS as FE F e ee e e e B r ie E ik al 1 l ii i oe in se 2009 The Organize Tab 185 To view your images checkmark the directory or directories of yur ee a choice from the Source tab You Source fowt ioe can view the contents of more than fie one directory simultaneously by SS mr Ptr placing a checkmark next to the TAD metas a Po ml directories The images will appear raped imik in the Preview area you can use C riga a i ae ae the Sort and View options to primeri customize the appearance of the A ih taian Preview area Note Check marking an upper level othe directory will not display the images oe contained within the subdirectories 3 contained within it To select all subdirectories within a root directory hold the Control key on your keyboard while clicking on the check box Repeat to uncheck all Hold Ctrl A on your keyboard while clicking a root directory to select all subfolders AND select all images within the subfolders You can also click on the Search tab to find images and projects with pre existing keywords or categories After a directory has been selected thumbnails of your images will appear in the Organizer This includes graphic content from the Marketplace 2009 186 YearbookFusion User s Manual l i a D mite Terb k mE hP o Eel ljg By Ea Prec kk Tiai
30. and other details These special categories can be added and the data associated with the images imported from the PSPA CD To add custom attributes or attribute sets click on the button at the time of import tab and click If your images have already been imported then open the on the Custom Attributes button In both cases the following window will appear Manige Attributes les Selci an etree Sel Add of remove custom below Of cresie a new one Bibite by choking nee ot by clicking the new button cheelert es itech Chach Teacha Home Room Lact Hans Fost Name Witdiaere HAE Per Track Enchade aig To add a new attribute set eg Church for a church directory click on New Attribute set then add the name of the new category 2009 318 YearbookFusion User s Manual 18 2 1 2 New Category Ru Ste cresting a new Cey Church This will add Church to the list of available attribute sets To add fields to a set in this case for a school select the attribute set The list of fields associated with the item will appear to the right Manige Attributes Select an Abibude Sel Add a removes custom below OF create a new one Altributes by checking new r by clicking the iew button elele School Chau che Dizde Teacha Home Aioom Last Hate Ped Aare Tea Yoluma Nama Image F cher ljaga a Hai Perad Track Evchade k A
31. eg student name NOTE Do not add the data before clicking Add Student the images need to be added to the database set first This will enable drop downs eg teacher s name grade from existing database entry Hevahdate school button at the The data will now be associated with the images Click on top of the Organizer to ensure that the images have been properly associated with the database and will be included in the panel pages Adding students can occur at any time during the panel creation process either before or after the panels have been set up and populated Removing images in the imported pspa set Occasionally you may need to exclude an image from the imported PSPA set eg duplicates retakes or students who have left the school Open the Organize tab and click on the School tab Locate the image s that you do not 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 315 wish to include in the yearbook panels use their last name or grade or teacher to search for the image When you find the image s in the preview area select the thumbnail s The image and associated data will appear in the Custom attributes area Turn the Exclude option to Yes The image will not appear in any panel Teacher Bka tiere Aian Lact Name Br oeni mest Mam ay Images can also be excluded directly from a populated panel as well Right mouse select any image within a panel to exclude it
32. if the content contains no downloaded dotScrap content as layers in a PSD file for further work in Photoshop and other editing tools Red Eye Removal Easily remove Red Eye from pictures without relying on external tools Default handling Changes to frame borders text attributes etc can automatically update the default settings which are applied when new frames and text are created Improved Autocollage AutoCollages can be ordered by file name file date exif date or randomized Images can be made to fit a grid or preserve their original aspect ratios even if this leaves gaps between images Organizer Find your images faster with a completely rewritten Image Organizer with support for sorting keywords and direct folder access Rate your images attach keywords put them into categories and search by any criteria Grouping Select several objects and group them to be manipulated as a unit with or without direct access to the group members Tree View Your project can be viewed as a tree structure allowing you to access partially occluded objects and edit grouped objects with ease Page Size Improvements Project pages can now be identified as cameo images two page spreads or sides within an album Sides have asymmetrical gutter edge top bottom control over bleed and safe areas Album page counts take page types into account 2009 292 YearbookFusion User s Manual Color Space Tagging If
33. jpg or other file types are kept in C My Documents My Pictures My Exported Collages This will avoid confusion with the FotoFusion scrap project files so you don t accidentally try to send a scrap file to a friend or a printing service OR Use Project based folders You can create folders in Windows Explorer to organize your images and project file Click on the Windows Explorer FILE menu item and choose NEW or right mouse click on the main file area and choose NEW then pick Folder You can name the folder anything you want Some users will create a separate folder for each project they are working on For instance a photographer will create a folder called Smith Jones Wedding Into this folder she will place e all the source images jpgs e the FotoFusion project files scrap e the exported project pages Ideally these should not have the same name as the FotoFusion scrap file to avoid confusion If the photographer needs to work on that client s project or images then all materials related to their event will be stored in one central location Finding lost projects If you cannot remember where you saved a file you can use FotoFusion or Windows Explorer to find it Generally all projects made on your computer will appear in the FotoFusion File gt Open window If you are trying to find and open a file made on another computer you will need to navigate to the subdirectory where the file is stored
34. you may notice that some images appear with 8 handles and other appear with 4 handles An Element will appear as a 4 handled frame and is usually graphical object with transparency saved as a png file type An example would be an image of a rusty key or a clip art flower which is meant to be arranged within a collage without being cropped It can be resized but not stretched or widened Another way of describing this is to say that their aspect ratio is locked Smart Frames however do not follow this rule They can be dynamically resized An Image is usually a jpg such as a photograph or a background texture which is meant to be cropped and tilted within a frame Frames are in one of these two modes at all times and the mode determines which handles appear on the frame Resize Resize Rotate Rotate Pan Crop Swap Any frame can be converted from one mode to the other Click on TOOLS on the menu bar and select Frame Type to switch from one type to the other Tapping the A key on your keyboard will produce a similar effect by locking the aspect ratio of all frames on the canvas Alternatively select an item and right mouse down on it select either Image Frame or Scrap Element Frame from the list Frame Numbers amp Status Each frame that contains an image has a number This serves two purposes e The Selection State If the frame is unselected the number looks like this If the frame is selected the number looks
35. 19717 16992 e Rep name appears under Help gt gt About FotoFusion 20799 Licensing e FotoFusion trial launches as Extreme by default 19116 e Local saving disabled when running as YearbookFusion Trial 19509 Bug Fixes Editing e Image with autorotate tag ran through Photoshop no longer produces distorted image in FotoFusion 7955 14056 14249 20058 e Hovers moved outside of FotoFusion main window will reopen as expected 19327 Mouse wheel should set focus to the window directly below it 20525 Frames with O width will still display as handles 4631 Locked frames cannot be overidden by using snaps 21055 Turning off mosaic option in splitter functions correctly 17186 2009 20 YearbookFusion User s Manual EMF graphics excluded from low resolution warnings 20071 Toolbox should no longer disappear 17524 Coversheet not affected by flipping adjacent album side 20160 Group selection extends to items off the canvas 20116 Tiffs now work in the matte cutter 11612 Text e OpenType Layout fonts don not crop when resized 20047 e Text will not split break when intercharacter spacing increased 18523 Multipage Projects e Appended projects are conformed to current project s page numbering settings 13961 14435 20826 20963 21011 e Page numbering excluded from cover sheets 19185 19246 21020 Output e Missing dll error when rendering to PDF resolved 20624 Dat
36. 2 1 1 Panel pages can be changed in most respects at any point of the design process You can reconfigure the look of the panel after it has been populated resort the panel after the images have been added and even change data and add students after the panel has been made Importing and editing your PSPA data What is a PSPA CD The PSPA CD is the standardized format to provide a set of portraits and important information associated with these images to schools or other organizations A PSPA CD contains the image files of the portraits taken by the photographer s assigned to your school or group and associates these to a text format data file The data file links the portrait images to important information such the name of the person in the photo their grade or affiliation and other details YearbookFusion will import the data file and portrait photos directly into the software It will allow you to correct or add data linked to the images and create panel pages with the images Panel pages will display the portrait images and usually include the name of the person in the photo and are often sorted according grade teacher or other group affiliation If more than one PSPA CD is provided YearbookFusion will allow the two data sets and images to be merged into a common database Importing the PSPA CD In order to use the images and data on the CD you must import the information into YearbookFusion This action is only required
37. 2 frame test Soap Private sharing Cle A will allow any Ext FotoPusion 4 specified user to open the file You will need to know the user id of the intended recipient of the file Ask the recipient for this information which they can find by clicking on HELP on the menu and selecting About FotoFusion Public Sharing allows any Version 4 user to open the file so long as they are online while opening the file e If your project has not been saved you will be prompted to do so This will create a scrap file e The default location to save archived files is C My Documents My Collages My 2009 File amp Project Management 235 Archived Collages though you do not need to Save it in this location Specify any directory you would like to use to save the project e A ScrapPackage file will be created This file contains the FotoFusion recipe plus the source images in the project To archive multiple projects e Click on the ligt Organize tab e Click on the att sow z Search tab Nee et r By Esra mar w e Set the Source Pennie et s to My Pian Sor ur Database and Fimi z the Type to na y Saved Work Weding gt gt Projects ost e Multiple select a pamer the projects you SS ma wish to archive aan r hold the Ctrl nibi man i key while clicking on individual projects or group select with your mouse e Right mouse d
38. 5 Version 3 5 marked the renaming of our top end product from PRINT to STUDIO reflecting this version s focus on Professional photographers studios producing albums and large format output who can benefit from direct connectivity to professional printing labs providing managed color pipelines e Features o Direct uploading to participating Pro Photo Labs STUDIO only o Preview window in the organizer can be resized o Canvas width is no longer rounded to two decimal places o Added option to remove LZW compression from TIF output o Printer color profile support added to STANDARD and PRO e Performance o Many speed and memory usage improvements e Fixed Bugs o Color editing now behaves correctly with multi selected text o Multi page render can now be stopped o Page name now refreshes properly after renaming o Page segments now removed when user changes printer settings o Spikes in fonts no longer appear when increasing the thickness of text outlines Version 3 4 Version 3 4 is a maintenance update that includes the following e Features o Double width layouts now count for 2 pages o Rulers support metric and pixel dimensions o Frame number on canvas tile shown if source image is not found e Performance o Accelerated feedback when using EXIF information on remote hard drive Fixed Bugs o Several crashes fixed o Loading an old project with flipped images no long causes issues at render time 2009 Reference 295
39. Apaci _ Spare Reverse Backdrop e Inchade images in Bucka 1 Preserve frame seething Faia CAAM Ud The options on this hover mirror the options available in the wizard with two exceptions e Preserve frame settings will override resizing and preserve any changes you have made to particular images on the canvas e Include images in Bucket 1 will add any images added to the first bucket from the Organizer e If turned on the Respect Center Line option will prevent images from auto collaging across the gutter in an album two page spread layout Extreme YearbookFusion users only NOTE The options selected in the AutoCollage hover will also apply to any other Auto Tools AutoPopulate and AutoDistribute AutoCollage is also directly available from within the Images hover Sparse AutoCollage provides an option to leave gaps in the automatically produced arrangement of images a Sparse collage 2009 AutoTools 73 Aicootagel AA Cenente a new colege frome met of mage of Meee Se Cures coftage A poan ready ile Effects Sorting F Shadows Satb Enders Donii St w H Mairan Aspect C Ravara j Ben Fit inchaite maga in Bucket 1 This tool is really most useful in combination with the BACKDROP option as a way of quickly setting up a canvas for editing Awiccoiege Aiti Dinti a hia oofege frome ial mati of Meee i cen Coes Apes BPeedy AutoJumbler
40. Ciuri piii Pogai Parti DE l Uds l Cra 2009 210 YearbookFusion User s Manual To add a new program such as Photoshop 1 Click Add 2 Navigate through the folders of your hard drive until you find the program you want to run such as C Program Files Adobe Photoshop 7 0 Photoshop exe 3 Click OK Now when you click the Render button you will be given the choice of routing your image through Photoshop for further editing R Preyiaw Canced Esc inal Viewer intial Edi Adotee Proton Pherae 2 Entire Canvas versus Double Page Separate versus Respect Page Segments FotoFusion Extreme amp YearbookFusion supports double page spreads and page segments When creating a professional album layout you may wish to compose a double page spread meaning the canvas size represents two pages joined together during the binding process This is useful if for instance you wish to place a large panoramic image across two pages or a decorative background FotoFusion allows you to specify this type of layout ain the Canvas Settings editor and will draw a center guideline if the page dimensions reach a particular aspect ratio 4 3 When it is time to render your double page spread you will have the option to render double pages separate If this option is selected two separate files will be created for each half of the spread If this option is not selected then one large file will be cre
41. DOWNLOAD NOW button at the top of the page click on run or open to download and install FotoFusion To reactivate FotoFusion launch FotoFusion while connected to the Internet click on HELP on the menu bar select ACTIVATE FOTOFUSION type in your User ID either your email at the time of purchase for an internet purchase or the code inside the retail packaging for boxed copies type in the password you created at the time of your first installation submit this information to relaunch the software at the level of your license If you have purchased dotScrap graphics these materials will still be unlocked to you if you have moved to another machine as they are connected to your user id 2009 14 YearbookFusion User s Manual 2 3 2 Multiple installations FotoFusion s End User License Agreement EULA allows FotoFusion to be run on one machine by one user If you purchase LumaPix and install it on multiple machines even offline we will notice that your user ID has been used multiple times and per the EULA have the right to deactivate your account Having said that LumaPix understands that individual users often have a PC and a laptop and might appreciate having the software available on both A second activation allowing users the convenience of a second machine for personal use may be ignored by LumaPix so long as the user does not abuse the situation say by having two u
42. FotoFusion has an active internet connection necessary to access dotScrap marketplace materials When you first launch FotoFusion you will be presented with a Welcome Screen The contents of this Welcome screen will change depending on your license type Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced Extreme Yearbook and if your software was bundled with additional content eg a digital paper scrapbooking album YearbookFusion 26 YearbookFusion User s Manual You can turn off the Welcome screen by unchecking the box next to Show this when starting FotoFusion The content on this page is available through the Bundled Content area in the Start Zone Learn more about the tabs and features in the Start Zone section of this manual The Start Zone Launch the Start Zone at any time from the Create screen by clicking on the icon in the top left corner It will display automatically at launch if you have disabled the Welcome Screen The Start Zone is a porthole to starting new projects accessing saved work information about FotoFusion and accessing graphics NEW PROJECT Click on NEW PROJECT to start a project from scratch You will see a selection of available page and album sizes Only the items that conform to your license type will be displayed e Essentials users will see single sheet pages up to 12 x12 e Enhanced users will see single sheet pages up to 13 x19 e Extreme users will see all availabl
43. G DoF a oar Dee Sec tod reer e me RA n You can now double click on an image to preview it or double click on a template or project to launch it select a group of images and then Autocobsge them on your canvas assign an image or multiple images to buckets to sort your project add an image or multiple images to categories not available in Essentials add keywords to an image or multiple images not available in Essentials If you would like to increase the size of the thumbnail views then click inside the preview area and while holding the Ctrl key on your keyboard use your mouse wheel or the up down arrows on your keyboard to change the size of the thumbnails To change the way your mouse wheel scrolls functions click on the EDIT menu item and choose USER PREFERENCES Advanced Search Options 2009 The Organize Tab 187 As of Version 4 5 the advanced search options have been turned off as a default setting To re enable them click on the EDIT menu item and choose USER PREFERENCES e 0 to of carves radh a Ask Leer Reverse Fouserheal Zoom yu i Wy Values sat by Publisher Her Pages Fip Layouts Wien Pages Defaut editor Abwnys Prompt E 7 1 Searching in the Organizer The Organizer contains a Search editor which works in a manner similar to the Search hover on the canvas kae Teg f Typa Everythng Pilsan peth E
44. If you need to edit the text you will need to UNDO Ctrl Z the matte application Creative tips e Heavier bolder fonts will be more effective to display images than thin fonts e If you are trying to display portraits of individual faces within text it may be preferable to use individual letters rather than entire words Watermarking with text There are many ways to add a watermark to a canvas including the following 1 Using the Overlay Layer 2 Manually creating text and making it semi transparent 3 Adding a watermark when the collage is exported published or shared Using the Overlay Layer 1 Create a text frame with your watermark text OR import a jpg or png image of your logo and size as desired 2 Right click on the frame and choose Move to Layer 3 Send it to the Overlay layer 2009 The Create Tab 177 6 5 Note the overlay layer may not be visible by default Click on TOOLS on the Menu bar to launch the LAYERS editor Layers GHEE Layer See Through Protect Fovea _ _ Termplote L LI w Text C k catsga C Micanvas a cc _ Remember that you can make the overlay layer semi transparent and thus a usable watermark by clicking See Through in the layer editor Semi transparent Textcan also be created by adding a text frame and from the Text Editor to adjust the opacity of the text and the text outline Similarly for image files you c
45. LARGE Consider a printer working at a standard 300 DPI to print out a 10 x10 image The number of printer dots that are required is 3000x3000 some quick math shows that this is 9 000 000 dots each of which is described with 3 bytes for a total of 27 megabytes this is a comparatively small image for FotoFusion which can handle huge poster sizes but it gets the point across If you wanted you could easily have FotoFusion render out that 27 megabyte image and then load that into some other graphics program such as PhotoShop and print it out The temptation to use file compression would be there for example to save the image using JPEG at 50 quality resulting in a much smaller and easier to manipulate file of course the quality of the printed results would suffer The advantage of using FotoFusion to print is that the entire 27 megabyte 10 x10 image is produced in memory and never gets compressed on the way out to the printer You get pristine output direct from your original images with high quality resizing of the Source images and no compression 2009 The Output Tab 217 9 3 1 For information on outsourcing your printing to a pro photo lab consult the FAQ entry on the Output Options topic page Configuring print options To print a page click on FILE on the menu and then select PRINT gt gt Current Page Please note that FotoFusion will print multiple pages for Extreme license users and for E
46. Parra Carita AAE Soup Sheasby Broun Stalwick Group Sy d Lanne Verna Caritas hl eer oup wetirek ber 2009 324 YearbookFusion User s Manual then change the panel configuration The rest of the groups will remain in their original configuration while the selected group will appear differently Changing the size and spacing of the panel image frames The first section of the editor allows you to set the size and spacing of the panel frames You can do so by changing their width displayed in inches Increasing the width will make fewer larger frames and decreasing the width will add more smaller frames to the panel You can also mouse down and drag up and down on the panel section of the icon the size of the frames will change interactively CL CoO cic TCs Ji Default panel frame width PS Ss Ss Se ee ee ee eS StS 2S F i 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 325 tt Ll OOU EENEN E E LLL ee ae ee ODOC OOOO OES JOOU E OOOO Reduced panel frame width Alternatively you can define the maximum number of rows and columns in the panel and make the panel snap to that value There are three options when setting the columns and rows e Free will cause the frames width value to take precedent over the number columns and rows ie the columns and rows will change as the width of the frames chan
47. Pass throug profiles uncharged and iag with oetected oro Ge OPTION 1 Convert to SRGB and Tag with sRGB This option is recommended for most users if your images are sRGB untagged or if you are using a mix of photos with various color spaces FotoFusion will convert each of the color spaces and tag the rendered file with SRGB Most pro photo labs will print your images using the sRGB color space and will process your images as if they were embedded with this color space OPTION 2 Pass through profiles unchanged and tag with common profile This option will only work if all of the photos images are using the same color space You can use this option if you shoot everything using the same color space and want a rendered collage that has the same profile You may wish to convert your layout into sRGB if your are getting your collages printed by a lab Check to see if they will only accept sRGB files OPTION 3 Pass through profiles unchanged and tag with selected profile You can use this option if you shoot everything using the same color space and want to manually choose the color space for your collage 2009 The Output Tab 213 9 1 2 This option will work best if all of the photos images are using the same color space If you chose the third option click on the button to add the profile of your choice as viewed below When you export your collage your output will carry the color profile options you selec
48. Previous First and Last will Group G move the selection though the Gra turdik ree order of your dropped frames Unetiooup cided Remove will delete the selected Merve Up CTAL Curser Ue item from your project Mive Dean CTRL Cureor Diwar Duplicate will make a copy of it Ponce TO te cor Ripi View will open up a larger view Demote CTRL Curcor Laft of a selected image and show information about the file Edit in External Tool Group will create a single object from a group of multi selected items You can resize and move all selected items at once Group unlocked will make a single object from multi selected items but still leave these items 2009 YearbookFusion User s Manual selectable individually Ungroup breaks a group apart back into separate components Move Up Move Down will change the stacking order of your frames on the canvas Edit in External Tool will allow you to Manage the external tool to add an exe for a graphic editing tool and then launch your selected image in that software to edit it TOOLS AutoTools and actions that can be applied to particular types of Vike items on your canvas such as the Kits allows you to close a currently loaded kit Page allows you to change page Literate Fissi Ieas size and make changes to your futoSolsje AR Q page attributes Soret AuboCokage Aneel Layers allows you to control what Anta Ta aerials Al SAE HO layers are currently be
49. Smart frames behave as expected when canvas size changed e dotScrap purchasing issues resolved UK users anon logins e Issue with Download Accelerator Pro resolved Released January 26 2008 Version 4 1 build 43992 Features Easier faster and friendlier than ever without watering down the power e FotoFusion s completely redesigned user interface reflects months of user feedback and refinement e Zoom to open hovers bring tools and content to your work e Floating controls can be pinned up or docked neatly against the canvas e A new Start Zone gets you up and running fast New Tools e An all new matte cutting tool added Enhanced Extreme only e Frame alignment distribution and size matching tools per your requests Vastly more powerful text editing e Inter character tracking andInter line spacing now supported e Adjustable underlining and strikeout available e Support for Opentype and Postscript fonts is standard e Discretionary and Historical Ligature support Extreme only Continuing Refinement of Existing tools e Tools brought closer than ever Autocollage AutoPopulate on Images Hover greatly expanded toolbox e Rule of Thirds assist during cropping e Rotation control added to AutoJumble e Canvas size attributes can be applied across all project pages in one click Help and Expanded Language Support e Bite sized video tutorials at your fingertips e German French Spanish Korean and Japanese versio
50. Some publishers have turned these features off providing you a version YearbookFusion exclusively to upload your yearbook pages to their server If this is the case no Output or Share tabs will appear in your FotoFusion installation 2009 Index 341 Index scrap 229 scrapPackage 233 button 59 A Activate FotoFusion 9 Activating 9 Activation 6 9 Add buckets 188 add content to a category 191 add manufacturers 64 add pages to a multipage project 226 Adding amp Moving Frames 106 adding a category 191 Adding a frame while dropping 43 53 adding a student 314 adding a template 177 Adding an empty frame 106 adding an image to the panel 314 Adding banners 194 adding banners to email 199 adding banners to web output 199 Adding color to a frame 144 Adding frames 43 106 Adding frames while dropping 106 adding hotlinks to images 161 adding images 43 314 Adding images from the images hover to the pages hover 43 adding images into a bucket from the Images hover 188 adding images into a bucket from the Organizer 188 Adding images to multipage projects 43 Adding Images to the Canvas 53 adding images to the panel 333 Adding keywords 193 adding page numbers 167 180 Adding pages 177 Adding pages from existing projects 177 Adding pages from existing projects or templates 177 adding preset hovers 38 Adding Text to a Frame Adding Text to the Canvas adding to the data set 314
51. Tab To resize a frame or multiple frames at the same time Select the frame s then move your cursor over a resize handle Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse Corner handles will allow you to resize both length and width handles in the mid points of the frame will resize either the width or the length of the frame Note image frames eg jpg photos will display 8 handles Scrap element frames eg png embellishment graphics will only display 4 handles The reason for this is that embellishments will not resize outside of their original proportions so they will not be cut off inside the frame Fete eg UOP fime Set gt fr ELETE nd mimet 1 To learn about cropping the image click here Fine control If you press and hold the Shift key as you drag the resize handle the precision with which you can resize the image is increased You can press the shift and Ctrl keys simultaneously to get more precision and override snapping if you like Sizing frames using numeric values You can set a precise size for a selected frame or a set of frames by e Selecting the frame s 109 e Clicking on the frame part of the map in the toolbox This will open the Frame Editor e Clicking on the Width or Height controls This will pop up a small window that allows you to type a number directly 2009 110 YearbookFusion User s Manual
52. Te 81 by Bea Ml ma a i i z Pim Tepe oer Fis fete uh ef alk heal ay fio i Fikir ell arr at his Dee Abul Ay Paget Cokes ir Gest gy Faery large ae merie Caras ry Ga Waah Clipa mie Crop Ha be h reduced mages Convert bo SiG and tag sath Gd Fai Bearer erie e Inte Te erier i eee Edema idto O Ontre Cams ka Stlected Pege E i Dane opal ce fuel The Export options are as follows e File name type in any name you would like to give the file Click on the button to select a previously used file to over write or on the gt gt button to choose among predefined text tags eg exif data Extreme Yearbook only e File type see below for options e File naming scheme FotoFusion offers a number of predefined options to name your files Options include page numbering project and file names and album manufacturer s settings e Folder click on the arrow button to change the folder where your files will be saved on your system e Crop options drop box Select from Render Canvas Only crops to exact border edge of your canvas area Render Canvas Bleed crops to bleed edge Extreme version only or Render Canvas Bleed Overhang includes items outside your canvas including orphaned frames floating completely off your workspace e Show Crop Marks Checked on the rendered files will include crop marks on your project best used if a bleed zone has been included on your project e Sharpen re
53. To see this effect make the border very wide and 50 transparent When shadow inside is checked you will see that the image itself is casting a shadow but that the large translucent border does not In this example the photo is casting a small shadow which gives the impression the photo is inside a translucent frame Shadow Color Clicking on the color chip opens the color editor this allows you to pick a new color for the shadow In this example the shadows have been used to make the image and the text appear to glow Text Frame Tools Adding text to the canvas all users Click on any empty area on or outside the canvas An Image toolbox will appear select the Text option to add a text frame to the canvas and open the Text Editor 2009 The Create Tab 165 Bie Pia ry Resize ty Fi i e ee E m og AW gow 00 BO nH off o E e Allow Line Breaks anand Laahs OR Hold the T key on your keyboard while dragging a marquee shape roughly the same size as your finished text and double click on the resulting text frame to launch the Text Editor A new text frame will read Double Click to Change until you add your own text Adding Text to a Frame In the Enhanced and Extreme versions of FotoFusion you can add text attached to a specific frame on the canvas This means that if you move the frame the text moves with it Using text on frames also allows you
54. To use the matte cutter tool select an image frame which will expose the Image Toolbox Select the TOOL option then the af Matte Cutter Tool A new window will appear with your image contained within it You can resize the window by pulling on its edges and zoom in and out of the photo using your mouse wheel or by tapping Ctrl or Ctrl on your keyboard Resizing the window will allow you to expose more ore less of the image Image by David Ziser In this example we will be extracting the bouquet from the rest of the image To draw the matte simply click and draw around the edge of the area you wish to extract A red line will follow the cursor Do not worry if it is not perfect as you can go back and fix it afterwards Please note you are drawing freehand The line is not snapping to the image in any manner To restart hit the ESC key twice 2009 The Create Tab 159 Ja When you have finished outlining the whole area the image will look like this The matted portion is highlighted and the background to be hidden by the matte is greyed out To adjust the edges of the matte simply click and redraw near the matte e If you wish to extend the matte further than the current edge draw outside the matte to add to the highlighted area e If you wish to reduce the matte back into the image click inside the matte and redraw the contour erasing the area you do not wish to ha
55. WA Organize Hi Aue tab At the top left corner album click on the SEARCH tab Sauce twerything w Locate the material you Type Everything are looking for ac ani Publisher Everything w OR Click on the Feah Clear search hover and locate the material via keyword and or type Danaidd and Open Dedna Aan Appart Once you have located Demani ard Apply the material you are searching for right Download Store Contant mouse down on the Davee Stone Canker repack arateacdy coed cootent thumbnail From the list of options select Download Store Content The material will download to your local system This may take a while depending on your internet connection and the size project you have selected The next time you use FotoFusion online or offline the material you have downloaded will be available for immediate use in high resolution Note This material cannot be transferred from an online machine to an offline machine even if it is archived However if you change computers your dotScrap purchases will be recognized they are attached to your user id and you may redownload them at no cost Using other graphic resources Other graphic resources such as scrapbooking kits downloaded from the Internet or purchased on a cd or clip art collections can be used in FotoFusion However e Materials acquired from other sources will not appear in the Marketplace since th
56. a large file Pro printing labs will usually require a minimum of 200 250 dpi and usually 300 dpi to ensure good quality However very large format prints eg banners billboards are printed at a much lower resolution because larger dots are acceptable You don t look at a billboard up close to notice the dots and no printer would be able to handle the memory allocation required to print a 300 dpi wall sized print Rendering projects over 300 dpi won t give you better results First most printer can t handle display more than 300 dpi so the extra information will be wasted and to be honest you won t be able to see the difference Second the native resolution of your 2009 DPI amp Resolution Warnings 265 16 images will limit the amount of information available to make the rendered output Generally we recommend rendering to 200 300 dpi and not changing your image s native resolution from the size they were downloaded from your camera This guarantees the best possible results DPI Warnings FotoFusion contains a warning system for using images on your canvas with too low a resolution Using a low resolution image eg cell phone camera or zooming in too close on an image can produce either a mild or severe warning This is an example of warnings on the canvas red below acceptable and yellow potential problems 1 Resolution warnings will also appear when you attempt to output imag
57. a local dries or on the local network Remote Storage Look for projecte caved on a netveork Iecation providad by vour pubirher Cancel Ratri ha air tark After choosing the Remote Storage option you will be prompted to create a nickname This is used to identify the individual who made the project and who currently has it opened If a project is marked with a lock then another person in the group is editing it Two users cannot work on the same project at the same time The lock can be overridden by right mouse selecting the page thumbnail in case a user has kept the project open on their computer accidentally and has left for the day You will be able to see who has the project locked by trying to open it their nickname will appear Sharing Candid Images on Remote Storage If your publisher has provided you with remote storage candid images or other graphic resources can also be uploaded to the LumaPix server through the Gallery hover for everyone in the group to share Note subfolders are currently unavailable in the 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 305 18 2 1 Gallery Suatar 1 To add images to your Gallery click on the 2 eat abe smm down arrow icon to navigate to your school s folder and click on the ADD IMAGES button Browse for images on your local system then select one or more images hold the ctrl key to multi select Click on Open to start the upload As soon as th
58. aai L a a gt a p e T To add a grid to help you position your layout click on TOOLS on the menu then Editing and select GRID SETTINGS Grid Settings E Snap te Grid R di6 nE Bie Grid Litres _ Display sce ork Searcy H i if 1 Snap to Grid checkmark to turn on a magnetic effect when moving or resizing your frames The white snap lines will gravitate towards the grid s units of measure The Snap to Grid option is also available in the Tools gt gt Editing menu Display Grid Lines checkmark to make a grid appear on your canvas The RGB values allow you to change the color of the grid lines Change the Horizontal and Vertical values eg 0 5 to change the spacing of the grid 2009 92 YearbookFusion User s Manual Hit OK to apply To turn off the grid repeat the steps above and uncheck the SNAP TO GRID or DISPLAY GRID LINES checkbox es You can make any type of grid you would like such as setting up a page suitable for column or rows particularly to use with text If there is a particular grid setup that you will need to use repeatedly you can make a preset 2009 The Create Tab 93 Center Guide Extreme and YearbookFusion users can select album two page spread from Page Type section of the Canvas Settings window An album two page spread displays a gutter line will appear in the middle of the page and can be ren
59. about to be dropped e Press the Del key on your keyboard Note that your original picture on your hard disk is not affected FotoFusion never changes or deletes your source images Stopping restarting dropping You can suspend the dropping operation at any time by pressing ESC on your keyboard This will leave the images in the dropper but not visible To continue dropping them either e Press the D key or e Click the _ button and click on the Add Images To Canvas button even if there are no images present in the bucket Resizing images while dropping You can change the size of the an image that you are about to drop if you have a mouse with a wheel While the dropper is activated hold Ctrl and dial the mouse wheel up and down to change the size of the image When you are satisfied with the size of the image release the mouse button to drop the resized image An alternative method to drop images at a particular size is to draw a frame for them as you drop them If you would like to set a custom size for dropping images you can do so by accessing the User Preferences item listed under the Edit Menu 2009 The Basics 55 FotoFusion will by default drop images at a maximum of 40 of the canvas width User Preferences Sinn dohad images ot To make your images drop at a relatively smaller size decrease this amount eg 20 300 DPI To Screen
60. add a new sub category et O My Cahegerbes H ia Artt H C jpa Piihi hi bam Thema ewe Types lime Prope lis Places Er nk a J Adding Content to a Category To add content to a category simply select the thumbnail s one image a group of images or a project then drag and drop it into the category of your choice The next time you apply a check mark in the box next to a category your categorized items will be displayed in the Organizer Managing Categories To add a category simply right mouse down on the parent category and insert a sub category To remove a category you have created right mouse down on it and select remove 2009 The Organize Tab 193 7 4 Tagging with keywords FotoFusion Enhanced and Extreme users can apply keywords and other tags to their images These terms can then be used to search for images and projects more efficiently Items that have been keyworded or tagged will appear under the MINE tab of search hovers This is a particularly useful feature if you have a collection of decorative graphics you wish to make instantly available on the Create screen such as a collection of background papers l U Organize To add keywords to your images click on the jee Creare tab to open the Organizer This will open the Organizer From the Source tab select the im 8 directory or directories containing erie Fewth Soos the images you wish to catalogue
61. and Watermark tabs These options are identical between the Publish to Web and the Email areas and so we will cross reference these two actions e Including Original Images e Image Attributes e Watermarking e Banners When your options have been configured you can Preview or Send the results to your server If you already have an existing online web gallery you can easily produce a collage from it Reasons for doing this include 1 Sending emails to customers or friends with a collage of the contents of your web gallery inviting them to come to your gallery to browse 2 Producing collages and exporting them to HTML to integrate with your gallery as a more interesting table of contents 3 Printing out a collage of your recent work To bring an image from a web page into FotoFusion simply drag it from your web browser into FotoFusion Done Multi page Publishing Extreme users can publish multiple pages simultaneously When a multi page project is open the Publisher window will include add two options e Inchade Indes If this is option is selected a thumbnail preview of your work will be included in the generate files Al Pages can be selected to publish the entire project If you only want to publish one page at a time switch this to Selected Page 2009 216 YearbookFusion User s Manual 9 3 HTML Custom Themes You can define your own HTML themes for both Email and Web ou
62. as Image Eding such even if no single sheet option exists in Copy images Akvavs Prompt the project type selected Dafa adiar Always Prompt we Lipata Charal LumaPix welcomes the addition of new album manufacturer presets to this list Manufacturers of albums are invited to visit our website to learn how to submit specs for inclusion in FotoFusion s presets at no charge Please note users cannot submit specs on behalf of an album manufacturer but are invited to contact their preferred vendors to encourage them to contact us Inclusion of manufacturer presets does not constitute explicit endorsement or a stated preference on the part of LumaPix to its user base Defining a new canvas To begin a new blank project click on the Start Zone icon on the Create screen or select New Project from FILE menu item to launch the editor for a new project 2009 The Create Tab 83 The FEATURED tab will appear when your software is activated and show either commonly used generic sizes or your album manufacturers presets e g YearbookFusion users m line mE Ea i Ed E a E ee Bai Ta Depending on your license type more or fewer settings will be available related to your output limits An Essentials and Enhanced user will not see form factors that exceed their license limits eg no album 2 page spreads will appear a YearbookFusion user most likely only see their manufacturer s form factors whereas
63. banners to protect your work ENHANCED and EXTREME only e Add email addresses and send your collage OUTPUT OPTION 2 UPLOAD TO YOUR WEB GALLERY e Choose whether or not to include original images e Watermark and add banners to protect your work ENHANCED and EXTREME only e Publish to the web or a local file for additional editing OUTPUT OPTION 3 PRODUCE A FILE TO SEND TO A PHOTO LAB OR PRINTING COMPANY e Choose a resolution and compression quality e Render the collage to produce a file e Transfer the file to the lab via a cd memory device or by direct upload OUTPUT OPTION 4 PRINT ON YOUR LOCAL PRINTER e Check your Printer Settings to ensure you have the correct paper options e Layout print pages if necessary printing a large size on a home printer e Print The FotoFusion Interface FotoFusion s workspace is located under the CREATE tab 2009 24 YearbookFusion User s Manual a ee START WHEEL Click on this icon to launch the Start Zone to start new projects browse the Marketplace and learn more about FotoFusion CURRENT KIT Shows the items available in any opened kit eg template pages Scrapbook MENU BAR This area houses the selection items under File Edit View Selection Tools and Help TOOL BAR Lists commonly used tools such as file management items Main AutoTools Selection tools TABS Click on these LICENSE LEVEL tabs to flip to
64. base Canvas guidelines safe bleed gridlines There are four types of guidelines that can appear in FotoFusion e the Safe Area e the Bleed Area e all over Canvas Grid e and the Center Guideline The Safe and Bleed areas are regions used to lay printed material out with precision These features are available in the Enhanced Extreme and Yearbook versions of FotoFusion Safe amp Bleed Enhanced Extreme Yearbook only Safe and bleed areas can be added or edited from the Printing Zones area of the Canvas Settings window To launch the Canvas Settings window right mouse select outside of your canvas and choose this option from the drop down list You can specify safe and or bleed zones equal for all four sides of the canvas Type this values into the first column then click on the gt gt key to transfer these values to the gutter edge top and bottom fields Alternatively you can set up separate bleed and safe values separately For instance 2009 90 YearbookFusion User s Manual you may wish to give a larger safe or a bleed value in the gutter edge to allow more room for binding Close up of an autocollage respecting a 1 safe area Safe zones will create guidelines inside the canvas area essentially like a margin around the edge of your page Ponting ores cml fii ff ff wf Bec jf f ff po 1 1 j 3 m ae pe i geet l E e Some prin
65. be possible To set a preference click on EDIT on the menu and choose User Preferences Choose Change Channel Update at the bottom of the editor 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 17 Ssh dropped images at C 300 EPI Tos Screen i o gt of canvas width Senge Sheets Cetected in Album i Ask Liser cJ Shears umel _ Never Convert interface Preferences Reverse Moucenheal Zoom C show Advanced Search na Vaas aak by Puihksh r Hea Mages L Wie P Caden vert Pages image Eding Copy imagas Always Prompt D Defaut akin Always Prompt ar l Ohanje Lipcdates ChA Curek Channeh Manstrogm Uke Defaut Mainshream Updates onh offered once they have been proven to be produchon raady by many city adopters L_ cont Some users may be limited to only one channel eg YearbookFusion users users running special builds that have features that are not compatible with later releases What s New in Version 4 6 Click here for the complete of list of previous updates Version 4 6 builds 61414 61860 62075 62151 62269 Full release for Yearbook Publishers and Yearbook only Complete list of features and fixes to follow Remote Storage is in production ready release Subfolder creation and file and folder deletion is enabled Gallery button enabled allowing access to Yearbook clip art folders and upload of images by Yearbook Publishers and Remote Storage enabled users
66. box to select from the mattes stored on your local system or click on the CER to launch a SEARCH hover to display your options local Marketplace content hate l black honis gradient er Cihoe er o Cau 2009 The Create Tab Text without matte F T apes iI rt POV t Ppepere G i amp Lim amp La Lot oa oY pe 4 EENG B 3 ia E Ri DADA ii teil amp Text With black Nori Converting Text into a Matte Enhanced Extreme only 175 Enhanced and Extreme users can also convert text into a matte to hold an image inside the text First drop an image onto the canvas or apply text to the Canvas if you want your canvas to become a text matte From the Image Toolbox select the Text option Type in your text and select the font Some other font attributes can be applied e g bold blur while others will be ignored when the text is changed into a matte outline color 2009 176 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 4 6 When you are Satisfied with the font click the eee button at the bottom of the Text Editor The image will snap into the text FotoFusion has created a emf file that will appear among the list of mattes in the frame editor The text can be resized with the frame handles and the image can be repositioned within the text as well You may need to reduce the size of the frame to be able to move the image within the text more effectively
67. builds e Autocollage drop down not as fast to react to mouse over e Images tagged as ribbon or decoration now behave as expected e Auto duplicated page with one image dropped will not reproduce the image on Subsequent pages e Save Open dialog resizes to fit on low resolution monitor settings Trial use e Trial users have access to buckets e Run As Extreme will display all Extreme interface components e Trial users running as Extreme can now resize store templates e Run As Selection remembered between sessions Released April 28 2008 Version 4 2 build 46555 FEATURES Export Print Improvements 2009 Reference 285 e Export cropping options expanded to canvas only canvas bleed canvas bleed overhang e User defined image information overlay now available as output option Enhanced Extreme e Zoom to fit preview of exported images e Album preview theme added to Email and Web options Extreme multi page e Drag amp Drop images into page thumbnails to auto collage them e Drag amp Drop multiple images into page thumbnail with frames to auto populate them Data Management e Buckets can now be renamed e Bucket icon indicates number of contained images e Bucket icon indicates most recently dropped image e Images imported from USB devices offer copy or refer option e Go to page where image is used option on image thumbnails dotScrap Marketplace e List of Bundled content now
68. can be run on multiple computers they are enabled to be used for a classroom or for multiple members of a yearbook committee Can I reinstall the software In a nutshell yes We don t want to keep you from using what you ve paid for Version 4 can be reinstalled from our home page www LumaPix com Older versions can be found on the Downloads link at the top of our webpage Is there a discount to upgrade If you already own a license to use FotoFusion and would like to upgrade to a newer or more advanced license type you can do so ata discount Upgrade options include moving from a lower license type e g Essentials to Enhanced or to a newer version e g Version 3 to Version 4 Visit www LumaPix com and select the UPGRADE NOW link at the top of the page In general upgrading from one license type to another roughly costs the difference in the cost of the licenses and upgrading from one version to another at the equivalent license type is 1 2 the full license cost What does my license entitle me to use in the dotScrap Marketplace FotoFusion Version 4 includes the ability to use graphic content that is located on the dotScrap Marketplace All licenses include a collection of graphics that can be used at no additional charge Click on the Bundled Content button in the Start Zone to see what is included or check out the Bundled Content section on our website under each product type No license type includes all items in
69. class and Ms Crabtree s Grade 5 class she can be assigned to both groups After selecting the student teacher s image change the information on the Custom Attributes page Under Teacher type Smith Crabtree Under grade type 4 5 When the panels are created the individual will appear on both panel sets 18 2 1 1 1 8 Managing Custom Fields Manage Custom Fields allows you to add attributes or create a new attribute set Attributes are data fields or categories that can be linked to your image files These will appear as editable fields in the Organizer when you select one or more images The default attribute set is School You can create any number of custom attribute sets to reflect the type of information that you will need to organize your images in your project and can add to the project itself For instance school yearbooks typically organize panel pages by teacher and grade and will usually only show the student s name near the image However you may want to make a special panel for the graduating class that will contain more information about the student eg club affiliation honours and awards the college they will be attending next year 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 317 A church directory will not list teachers and grades but may contain contact information business name committee participation and other related activities A team sports directory will list teams coaches tournaments
70. development effort on LumaPix behalf and will include many new major features The upgrade is of course optional and if you do not choose to upgrade you can continue using your existing software We maintain the last build of every version of the software on our website under the DOWNLOADS section Can I get a CD ora hard copy of the User s Manual We do not provide a cd or a hard copy of the User s Manual as we believe that this does not serve you well as a FotoFusion user A cd copy of software is an archive meaning it reflects the software only at the time it is burned FotoFusion is updated frequently so if you installed FotoFusion from a cd that was burned even two months ago you would be prompted immediately to update your build to the most recent available By offering the software directly from our website you will always have the best version of the software and not need to install twice CDs need to be stored as well so if you lose your cd or you are using the software in another location you would not have access to the software FotoFusion can be downloaded at any time from our website which is much more convenient The User s Manual is not available in print form for similar reasons it is updated every time we release a new build A printed copy would be out of date before it left the presses Indexing and keyword searches are also enabled in this version of the User s Manual A printed guide would have none of
71. device and restored later You may need to reconnect the canvas images Tools gt gt Locate Missing Images but the composition will remain in tact Loading To load an existing project meaning one you have already created and saved pick one 2009 228 YearbookFusion User s Manual of these options e Click on the Start Projects OR e Click on FILE on the menu bar and select OPEN OR e Press Ctrl O on your keyboard button to view the Start Zone where you can LOAD Existing These three options will launch the OPEN window Your computer s file system is located to the left you can navigate to any subdirectory on your system to locate scrap or collage files on your system The Sort and View options allow you to customize the preview display ee iil ie bo Fi You can also e Click on FILE on the menu to see a list of recently opened projects OR e Click on the tab then on the Search tab e For projects and pages change TYPE to Saved Work and select Projects or Pages For templates change SOURCE to My Database and then change TYPE to Templates e Thumbnails of your projects pages or templates will appear in the preview window Double click on your project to launch it Extreme users can multi select templates pages and projects and open append these one after another Right mouse down on the selected thumbnails to access this option 2009 File amp Project Man
72. e Show two pages at once if your license enables you to make a multi page project Zoom in out expand the preview to see more detail e Close close the print preview and return to what you were doing Changing and Configuring the Printer Clicking the Set button allows you to select a different printer as well as configure the print quality and other printer specific options Each printer driver is specific to the make and model of the printer so be very careful when selecting options as these will affect your FotoFusion output Be sure to check your printer setup to verify that your printer has the correct type of paper selected and that no options will interfere with your print job eg quality of print multiple copies etc Scaling There are two main printing options in FotoFusion e No Resizing even if it requires multiple pages to print This option will print your collage at exactly the dimensions that you selected when creating it o If your layout is 6x6 inches it will be printed at exactly 6x6 inches on an 8 5x11 sheet of paper o If you layout is 36x24 inches it will not fit on a single 8 5x11 sheet of paper FotoFusion Extreme is capable of splitting printed output across multiple pages FotoFusion Enhanced and FotoFusion Scrapbook Essentials can only print to exactly one sheet at a time Note that the options for Full Bleed and Crop are only available when printing at 1 1 because these options are only relevant wh
73. effect to add a color wash to an image or to fill an empty frames with color 2009 The Create Tab 145 To set the background color for a frame select one or more frames to reveal the Image Toolbox Click on the Image control to open the Image Editor The Background Fill tab will allow you to add an overlay of color If you drag the opacity slider completely to the right the frame background will be 100 tinted If you drag it anywhere in the middle it will be more or less translucent Use the R G B sliders or the color chip to select a tint of your choice Note This control will apply an overall cast to the entire image Use the RGB sliders on the General tab to color correct your image OR 25 Osfas H Oe ass Gh Cn 0 000 deg Os fo w v him Here is an example of applying different colors and opacities to a frame background will do to an image 2009 146 YearbookFusion User s Manual Next is an example of a basic collage that has used empty frames no images with Opaque background color to decorate the canvas Emnoty framaswiih Backer Pill Be sure to uncheck the Show Drop Image Here box at the bottom of the Image Editor Adding a Background Tile to a Frame You can use a tile within a frame background or blend it with an image in a frame 2009 The Create Tab 147 FotoFusion comes with a selection of preset tiles you can add your own
74. f directly below the Browse button to select i irrwert rit ie among the mattes available on your local system in C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion V4 Mattes Note the dotScrap marketplace offers a much larger selection of mattes so clicking on the Browse button will give you many more options You can use the generic _ hover to locate Type Parts gt Mattes and drop the mattes directly onto the images Alpha Only RBG This drop box option allows you to select how mattes will work based on the presence of transparency channels in the matte image file Mattes saved as jpg only hold RGB channels mattes saved as png will hold RGBA channels A transparency Alpha only will use the alpha channel in a png mat Average RGB will act on jpg format mattes where black transparent and white opaque or reversed Alpha plus RGB is refers to the way that FotoFusion used to handle mattes in Version 3 and has been retained to allow Version 3 mattes to continue to function as expected Soften The edges of the matte can be progressively softened inward with this control To soften the edges of a rectangular shaped frame in this manner select the Rectangle matte Invert This toggle allows you to invert the matte making positive space negative and vice 2009 The Create Tab 133 versa Fit Lock Crop Fit allows the matte to show the maximum amount of the images within the frame Lock aspect ratio cr
75. file now remembers last used folder 17309 17386 Data Management e Appending a project no longer clears current bucket contents 15662 15465 e Buckets no longer emptied on auto populate 15465 e Used check marks now correctly shown on images on remote drives 18823 e Images located on a removed external drive now give warning message on project load 17959 e Thumbnails in file open dialog now updated correctly when project has been saved over 17868 17869 e Browse for Images remembers last visited folder even if image is not opened 17388 e Illegal characters do not cause File gt Save to fail 17510 17850 e Occasional crashes when loading v3 x projects fixed 18568 e Inserting a project now appends instead of replacing current project 17238 17715 e Restoring projects scrap archives uses caches if available 17746 17951 18644 e Restored archive does not require resave if no changes made 17750 17752 17791 e Item removed from database are now also removed from bucket 17410 e Multiple sequential keyword search no longer crashes 16789 16850 e Page numbering attributes now correctly reconstructed on load 17454 General e Memory leaks fixed 17276 18764 e Crash on single core machines fixed 18886 e Loaded templates are unlocked during trial use 18854 e Essentials license no longer able to create unrenderable projects by appending kit templates 14953 e Run As now respects evaluation not pa
76. flip the currently selected layout choose from the following two options Flip Layout Left Right or Flip Layout Top Bottom with the following options Original Flip Layout Left Right gt Flip Layout Left Right gt Frames and Text and Images Frames and Text Flip Layout Top Bottom gt Flip Layout Top Bottom gt Frames and Text and Images Frames and Text 2009 184 YearbookFusion User s Manual ry The Organize Tab The tab allows all users to e View your catalogue of images and projects from numerous folders and drives simultaneously e Sort images into buckets for easy layout Scrapbook Essentials users will have one bucket Enhanced and Extreme users will have four buckets by default and the ability to create five additional buckets The tab allows Enhanced Extreme and YearbookFusion users to e Assign your images and projects to predefined and user created categories and search using these categories e Catalog your images and projects using these keywords and ratings Enhanced and Extreme versions only To access the Organizer and view your images click on the Organize tab Pee oo mm a Tee 7 ws Ve Y Ay A k L beie p b E ee e M y l o ee ee ee as F eS ES Ee ee a EE E a M e lM e m r 5 rE Ez Re Ea i i m RTEA i TTT ae ee ee T i ee E l os m ag I os lll m 1 For Sn te on im ee fo O
77. for laying out candid pages PSPA CD import Database manipulation Automated panel page creation All design tools are resolution independent real time all the time non destructive and pro calibre Publishers will find business enhancing features including e Shared branding e Custom templates available only to their schools e Locked templates reflecting their printed form factors e One click uploading of fully editable layouts e Batch PDF and PSD rendering YearbookFusion is uniquely complete a single package handles the complete yearbook process including panel pages candids teams and covers The software is powerful enough to handle thousand student schools yet simple enough for busy yearbook administrators to be productive on their first use School users will find seamless uploading locked page sizes and complete 2009 16 YearbookFusion User s Manual 2 3 4 non destructive editing reduce support issues and increase school retention year over year Integrated video demonstrations and step by step wizards complement an already Simple user interface Buying and reselling YearbookFusion is both simpler and more cost effective than competitive solutions Publishers buy blocks of licence activations and allocate them to schools each school can activate the software on up to 40 stations All of this is managed with a simple web interface that lets the publisher track their licenses and schools easil
78. frame used with a gradient Same as Example 4 with Frame Editor Linear gradient is applied Example 7 Example 8 Empty frame used as a flare Same as Example 7 with Image Editor RGB values altered Frame Editor Center X and Center Y offset to move gradient intensity point to top left corner Frame has been Moved to Front Example 8 2009 The Create Tab Example 9 Empty semi transparent frame Same as Example 6 with a canvas background applied to show the effect Image Editor Image opacity increased slightly 155 Example 9 Example 10 Frame with tinted shadow Default border with tint Shadow Editor Change color from black Offset changed to place Shadow directly behind the frame shadow blur increased Example 10 2009 156 YearbookFusion User s Manual Example 11 Frame with O opacity and strong shadow Shadow Editor Offset to O Shadow blur increased Frame Editor Border width increased Border opacity to 0 Inset is off Combining these effects can produce a wide variety of design options In these examples paper textures have been added to the composition fn 6 3 5 Red Eye removal tool The red eye removal tool is an add on application that will open your selected photo and allow you to correct red eye problems in your photos 2009 The Create Tab 157 6 3 6 To use the red
79. from downloadable coordinating elements to match with their perfectly sized photos and text Home digital enthusiasts are able to print elegant pages at home with perfect results every time These tasks are facilitated by FotoFusion s unique special features e AutoTools a few quick clicks to instantly generate attractive layouts from a set of images e Projects step by step guide to creating a project through the use of templates and preset printer regions Projects can be fully digital or combine paper materials with digital output e Page Layout Guides templates designed to help you print on a specialized format such as a die cut sheet an album page or a label to create the highest quality end results for your paper projects e Embellishments decorative embellishments for your digital and paper layouts many of which are customizable and dynamically resizable For example add a coordinating smart frame to your perfectly cropped photo or a multi layered tag with your own text e Ready made pages just add your photos and the pages are complete e Templates a perfect page of coordinating elements ready for your layout talents and images These include scrapbook style pages family history projects and pro templates such as wedding albums z cards class composites and senior portraits e Kits a diverse collection of coordinated elements which you can arrange from scratch suitable for creating an entire albu
80. graphic elements on your pages 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 337 Frames The Frames hover also located over the canvas area on the Create screen will display over 100 smart frames Drag and drop these onto your candid images to give them texture borders and effects Note smart frames cannot be added to panel images Daneped Canwes Danaeged Frama D dEr Tie chad O02 QaamaPtt i toner fua verical Lumah Lorne Sra fama en by ls a ssf ti see ini o neisi Clip art and decorations The first location to find clip art is by clicking on the LP Art hover next to the Papers amp Frames hover on the Create screen In addition to yearbook specific papers you will find a collection of 400 items that you can add to your pages Even more content can be found by clicking on the Gallery button on the left side of your canvas Choose the LumaPix Clipart folder to see subfolders of content Celebrations and Observances for holidays and special occasions Decorations for general non thematic embellishments Interests and Activities school subjects and clubs Objects such as animals food school supplies etc and People silhouettes cartoons etc Explore these folders to find clip art for your yearbook 2009 338 YearbookFusion User s Manual 18 4 a Beng 1h eeu LP Clipart Gallery button with LumaPix Clipart subfolder Your publisher ma
81. higher maximum message size we limit mails through LumaPix com to reasonable sizes to protect the account from overuse 2 You own the mail pipeline from start to end To send email through your own ISP check the Send Using My Own ISP E Mail Settings box Click on DETECT MY SETTINGS to automatically connect and if you wish click on TEST THIS SETTING to send an email to yourself FotoFusion also allows Enhanced amp Extreme users to watermark your images or add a banner to them to brand your emails You can also choose different appearances for your email by changing the theme Watermarks amp Banners Enhanced Extreme Watermarks and Banners can be added to your output The controls for watermarks are found in the Email and Web Publishing screens under the Watermark Banner theme tabs Watermarks protect your work from reproduction eg proofs and banners label your projects much like attaching a business card to your work Adding Watermarks Click on the Watermark Banners Theme tab to apply a watermark to your output 2009 200 YearbookFusion User s Manual ee Dm A fail F arem hT m pme ie GF beaj ite gel rana s j D Ome DOD osa OOO 000 o0 fs OOO LLL te z O Biers GOO Serter aaan U Diab lF Yik mag ii T eel Tii ad oe ran j a el pog bereree oe Sarees In the Enhanced and Extreme versions you can add custom watermarks Watermarks give you a way to label your work such that
82. hit Ctrl D on your keyboard This will also work with a selected group of frames Copying and Pasting a Frame To copy and paste one or more frames select the item s then press Ctrl C on your keyboard Press Ctrl V on your keyboard A copy of the selected item s will appear on the selected page If you are working on a multi page project Extreme and YearbookFusion users only and wish to copy the element to another page hit Page Down or use the Pages hover to create or go to a new page Deleting a Frame Select a frame or group of frames Press DELETE on your keyboard Moving and resizing frames Moving Frames You can move a frame or multiple frames using e the keyboard 2009 108 YearbookFusion User s Manual e the mouse e through the Toolbar Arrange options Using the Keyboard to move a frame using the keyboard select a frame or several frames then tap the arrow keys the up down right and left arrow keys will nudge the image by a few pixels in the direction you select Press shift while tapping the arrow keys to move the selection more slowly and Ctrl to move it faster Using the Mouse To move a frame place the cursor over the frame you want to move Make sure that you position the cursor over the image in a place where no handles are visible so that you don t crop pan or rotate the image by accident on the Frame number or you will accidentally pick the image up Pre
83. image caches and information related to your projects Your FotoFusion projects will reload without assistance from this database This means that you can move scrap project files to another machine and they will reopen However they would most likely give error messages about missing original images so if you do need to move your projects it is best to archive them to a scrappackage format as this will transport the original images with the project file Occasionally you might need to clean and rebuild the project database This may occur if e you have deleted projects or other components in FotoFusion directly in Windows Explorer e after installing a new build e if your database is very large and has not been cleaned up in a while e if you have done general maintenance on your computer You will know you need to perform maintenance on the database if e your projects are no longer visible in the OPEN screen e you are receiving a DRM error e your activation is continually lost e FotoFusion prompts you to rebuild the project database To run a general maintenance on the database do the following gt gt Click on FILE gt gt Select Project Management gt gt from the list of options first PURGE STORE CONTENT This will clean out all downloaded content thumbnails and high resolution content from your system This will 2009 238 YearbookFusion User s Manual NOT affect your ownership of d
84. image in the photo viewer Released March 3 2007 Version 4 0 Build 37954 addressed many issues including PDF export is wrong dpi Copy v3 templates to v4 folder V3 projects on external drive not seen by V4 Trial expired error appearing Slow startup when too many fonts in fonts folder Don t ping server when rendering items without dotScrap content Album Manufacturers templates are not visible in V4 Continuous LP5 and DRM errors FF couldn t load one or more images after saving a project Render Issue empty pixel at the bottom and right of a rendered collage Norton firewall offline reconnection problems Buckets disappear when window resized Bring back the browse for pictures button Yname FF transforms capital letter into lower case multi page PSD render causes crash memory problem red x s in template browser v3 X presets don t work in v4 Long hang when opening certain projects scraps Customer has to reactivate on each startup Multiple page Render doesn t work Mattes not showing up in matte list Single pages are split in half when rendering double pages separate Released March 1 2007 for a complete list see http www lumapix com forum forum asp FORUM_ ID 11 Version 4 0 Version 4 0 represented a profound re architecting of FotoFusion with a completely new database oriented approach to content which unlocked ecommerce template publishing and consumption and partnering opportunities
85. infotips 3 Inset 129 install 9 Integrated online content library 17 Interactive resizing 107 interface 23 interface map 23 Interoperability with graphic editing software 262 Introduction 5 ISP 194 J JASC 134 jitter control 69 2009 Index 347 jog 93 206 207 JPG compression ratio 272 jumble 69 K Keyboard shortcuts 266 keyword 102 keywords 184 193 241 Kit 247 Kit Preview 247 kits 248 knockouts 322 L Label Height 305 Label the image 167 Label Width 305 labels 167 305 330 larger thumbnails 184 Last Row Alignment 305 Layer 100 layering frames 122 layers 97 100 122 learn 3 learning 3 Learning Materials 26 license level 12 Licenses 6 Licensing 6 Licensing info 26 lighthouse 14 line 150 Linear gradient 150 lineco 14 list images used in project 236 list of Images in project 236 Lite 14 Lite Edition 12 Loading 226 Loading collages 226 Loading projects 26 loading your projects 226 local file publish 214 Local printer 207 Local viewer 207 locate missing images 51 Lock 126 Lock size 172 locked page 79 locked template 79 locking 47 locking a panel 305 Locking Position 113 Locking Rotation 113 Locking Size 113 locking text 305 locks 322 losing activation 237 lost activation 237 lost file 229 lost files 229 lost project 229 lost projects 229 LumaPix support site 3 LumaPix web store 9 LumaPix website 3 magnetic 111 maintenance 13 237 mak
86. interactively doing so will change an important parameter related to the selected object To drag the control simply press the left mouse button while hovering over an icon in the toolbox and move the mouse In this example select an image frame and click on the Border portion of the graphic Press and hold the left mouse button then drag the mouse to the right The border thickness will increase interactively as you do so Release the mouse button when you are satisfied with the border width Some controls such as Drop Shadows can be dragged both left right shadow offset and up down shadow blur You can press esc before releasing the mouse button to cancel the changes if necessary 2009 The Basics 59 4 9 Opening Editors with the Toolbox Clicking on a control in the toolbox will open a floating editor which contains detailed editable parameters See the section on editors to learn how to adjust the parameters they contain The Image Toolbox The Image toolbox appears when you select an image frame versus a text frame which will display a different abbreviated Toolbox The Image toolbox contains a graphical representation of the various parts of the frame which you can click or drag directly 1 Image allows you to adjust the properties of the image Mouse down and drag to change brightness contrast and gamma click to open the Image Editor 2 Border allows you to adjust frame sha
87. leave any of these fields blank Rl AANT A You can delete keywords or change Type Theme Rating to any item at any time The information is added immediately to your items there is no ok or apply to click You may however need to relaunch to make the changes appear in the Create screen hovers Once tagged you can use the Search hovers to look for your materials under the Mine tab The Share Tab FotoFusion streamlines the process of sharing your images with others by email Collages are an elegant way to show multiple images at the same time they are beautiful efficient and unique You will never clog the inboxes of friends and families if you send collages to your friends and family rather than a series of high resolution single images If you are doing commercial work with FotoFusion your customers will appreciate emails of digital proof sheets and your work will be secure with FotoFusion s integrated watermarking feature You can also quickly produce alternatives black and white desaturated retinted versions to share with them i SPTE To send an email click on the Configuring email The first time you send an email add your email address and your name on the ISP SETTINGS tab in the Configuration area 2009 The Share Tab 195 free Pea eee eee ere ee EP barrage iawn ot i Spal Lae ee ae ee re ome me mca mpage earepe be hap ce a peered oer Pa ee pe nits deve ees dee os
88. like this If the image within the frame has become disconnected from the original image the number will look like this See below to learn how to fix this problem The assigned frame number This is used to Know which frame the next and previous frame selection buttons will 2009 52 YearbookFusion User s Manual move to The frame number is also useful as a reference when discussing collages with others for proofing commercial work or sharing images for reorder with friends and family Click here to learn how to add file information to your output Frame numbers can be reset Click on TOOLS on the menu then select FRAMES and finally select RENUMBER FRAMES to reorder your project Alternatively right mouse down outside of the canvas area and select RENUMBER FRAMES from the list of options The frame number is used to swap images between two frames Mouse down on the frame number and drag to swap an image from one frame to another Please note empty frames not containing an image will not have a number Hover over the empty frame to add an image To pick up an image and return it to the dropper click on the frame number as opposed to dragging it You will now be able to pick up other images or drop images into other frames by left clicking on them See Adding Images to the Canvas for more detail Reconnecting to your source images If you see that your frame number has turned red FotoFusion is w
89. of a 10 x 10 canvas at 300 DPI if you were to bring in an image from a web page say 100 pixels x 100 pixels it would appear quite small on the canvas you have created This is because 100 pixels takes up only 1 3rd of an inch at 300 DPI making it appear quite tiny on the larger canvas When creating a canvas it helps to know what sort of images you will be working with and what the target output type will be You can then set the default canvas DPI to a reasonable value 96 DPI for web pages 300 DPI for printed media and have useful default frame sizes when the canvas is populated with images If you need to change the default dpi click on the Edit menu item and choose User Preferences Change either the dpi value or change the of the total canvas size at which images will be dropped 2009 The Basics 57 2009 58 YearbookFusion User s Manual 4 4 What is a Tool Box FotoFusion makes use of patent pending floating toolboxes that dramatically accelerate your work flow Toolboxes become visible when you select frames in the collage They allow you to e Interactively edit the selected element e Open an editor for more precise controls e Access additional selections such as frame order rotation splitting adding text and other features Image Text Frame frame Toolbox toolbox Interactive editing Many of the controls in the the toolbox can be dragged
90. only eg change the border attributes of one image in _ Knockouts the panel make the label text bold in one entry in the list Unlocking the Panel Position will allow you to resize the Remove knockouts entire panel as one large image frame Unlocking the Image Effects will allow you to change the image attributes of one or more images in the panel such as making them black and white Locking the Knockouts will not allow for individual panel images to be turned off see below Here is an example where the labels and frames locks were removed One image in the panel was made b amp w with a blue border and one text label was made larger and bold Jackson Ella mg Fee Whar sg a y Peat aes Hena eal Note Be sure to turn the locks back on after attribute changes have been made to restore the panel to its normal state Otherwise you may accidentally select parts of the panel and not the panel as a whole Knockouts removing frames from the grid You can create spaces within the grid on a per page basis where other image or text frames can be inserted eg logos or to create a new pattern To change the grid s shape click on the individual frames on the panel to turn them off If the panel is not populated with images the frame will switch from grey bordered frames to translucent red frames If the panel is populated with images the image in the frame will be bumped to the next available frame and the r
91. page individually all frames will follow the instructed alignment command as if they were the only element selected e to each other to distribute a multi selection in relation to the total area occupied by the selected frames Alignment options include e dead center positioning selected frames will reposition in relation to the center point of the canvas e flush to the top bottom left and right edges e to the center horizontal line or vertical line Distribute options include e spacing all selected frames evenly across the horizontal axis e spacing all selected frames evenly across the vertical axis Ordering options include e moving selected items to the top or bottom of the frame order stack e moving selected items up or down one step in the frame order stack Note Reordering your frames can be done interactively directly through the Toolbox s Arrange icon Drag on the icon up and down to move your selected frame to the top or to the bottom of frame order stack Resizing options include e applying the size of the last selected frame to apply its attributes as specified to other selected frames e matching the reference frame s width e matching the reference frame s height 2009 122 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 1 8 e matching the reference frames total dimensions e resizing selected frame to the full width or height of the canvas or to the safe guidelines Please note
92. page types into account Extreme version only PSD and PDF In addition to JPG PNG TIF BMP and GIF FotoFusion can now Export export to multi page PDF and if the content contains no downloaded dotScrap content as layers in a PSD file for further work in Photoshop and other editing tools Extreme version only Color space If you shoot Adobe RGB FotoFusion can pass your images taggi through and tag the results as Adobe RGB The results will look correct when printed and rendered as Adobe RGB images Extreme version only Cease of support for direct source image composition uploading to color labs The free trial of FotoFusion v3included the ability to upload source images and compositions to pro color labs for output Support for this feature ended on March 1 2007 This change does not affect any FotoFusion users except those already making use of the feature users that print their own output render flat files for use in other programs or upload images to print bureaus using other tools are not affected by this change LumaPix regrets any inconvenience caused by this change Feedback sent to Support at LumaPix dot com will be carefully considered Version 3 7 build 35975 Final Version 3 build issued Color Correction Quality Color Correction is applied before conversions to B amp W Released December 9 2006 Version 3 7 build 29421 fixes a minor bug Blur Quality Highly blurred images now exhibit less aliasing Releas
93. profile and process the collage directly to the printer Paper Type This option will configure your printing options to rotate your page based on its designation as a left side or right side page and provide the appropriate diagram to orient your paper in your printer 2009 220 YearbookFusion User s Manual 9 3 2 9 3 3 Overlay Image Info This checkbox will turn on the options set in the Overlay Image Info settings option in under the Tools gt gt Canvas Menu list Your images will include labels to include file name frame number or other exif information This can serve the dual purpose of watermarking your proofs and providing a communication tool with your client Working with page layout guides Page layout guides are a special type of template useful to crafters and scrapbookers in particular Often these projects allow you to combine the ease of digital techniques with paper projects A paper guide consists of a multi page project with instructions Scrapbook Essential and Enhanced users are able to use the multi page features of these guides Typically the first pages contain areas to drop photos into the template add or edit text or include digital elements These pages are not printed but simply edited The last page s of the project are the pages that you print All printable areas from the edited pages are grouped together in a space saving manner allowing you to print on fewer she
94. restarting dropping 43 Restoring ScrapPackage 233 restoring default settings 62 restoring presets 62 RGB 141 144 Roll 272 root directory 184 Rotate a frame 115 rotate canvas contents 182 Rotate Handle 47 Rotating 115 Rotating an image in a frame 115 Rotating page contents 77 row spacing 322 rows and columns in a panel 322 Ruler 272 Run As 26 82 84 _S Safe 272 Safe area 89 save an entire album 1 77 save an individual page as a template 177 save as template 177 180 Saved projects 26 Saving 226 saving a hover 38 saving a search 38 saving an attribute set 62 Saving as a template from a multipage project 177 Saving collages 226 saving presets 62 saving projects 229 saving templates 66 saving to a file 206 207 saving your projects 226 School 316 School tao 310 SCRAP ELEMENT FRAME 47 scrapbook album 14 Scrapbook Essentials Edition 12 scrapbookers 20 Scrapbooking graphics 249 Search 17 search hover 102 241 Search hovers 241 SEARCH tab 184 Searching 102 187 241 searching for decorations 102 searching for dotScrap 248 searching for graphics 102 searching for templates 102 searching inthe organizer 187 searching downloading and purchasing dotScrap 248 segments 220 Selectaframe 98 Select all 98 selected page publish 214 selecting a frame from within a group 123 selecting files 184 selecting images 69 selecting images files 184 Selection 97 2009 3
95. resulting pop up menu or click Alt M on your keyboard Note e The collage produced by subdividing frames is no different from one created by AutoCollaging or by manually moving and sizing frames into alignment the frames are independent and can be rotated and resized as you like The splitting is merely a way to ensure that the images start off tiled neatly one against the other e The images within each frame can be inset to reveal the canvas background or Shadows cast by frames in the collage while remaining in a grid e You can save your layout as a template if you are pleased with the composition Arranging amp distributing frames The Image Toolbox provides access to a series of arrangement options to organize a single frame or a multiple selection of frames in relation to each other To quickly change the stack order of a selected frame or frames on your canvas click and drag on the Arrange icon on the tool box The selected frame s will move up or down the stack accordingly 2009 The Create Tab 121 To access more options select one or more frames then click on the Arrange icon Arrange elles which will launch the aon list of available options a to page as a group te page lnecdnvich arly ia each other qr wa Cerrute rer ears q fe First decide how you will be using the tool to Align your images e to a page as a group all selected frames will move as one item e to
96. s images The html code contained between these tags will be duplicated over and over for every photo in the project lt START PHOTO SECTION gt lt END PHOTO SECTION gt The footer section tags indicate which part of the html is to be used at the end of the email lt START FOOTER SECTION gt lt END FOOTER SECTION gt index htm This page is used strictly for web publishing and is independent of emailing It requires specific tags and tokens in order to render correctly Please reference the sample index htm to see this file s recommended structure 2009 204 YearbookFusion User s Manual The start end index thumbnail tags will be duplicated over and over for each page thumbnail lt START INDEX THUMBNAIL gt lt END INDEX THUMBNAIL gt page htm This is used strictly for web publishing and is independent of emailing It does not require any specific tags and only needs various tokens to render correctly Please reference the sample page htm to see this file s recommended structure photo htm This is used strictly for web publishing and is independent of emailing It does not require any specific tags and only needs various tokens to render correctly Please reference the sample photo htm to see this file s recommended structure Tokens The meanings of the various tokens which can be used in your designs are detailed below As always it is best to refer to the
97. screen you will see empty buckets Bucket 2 Bucket 3 Bucket 4 From the Source tab select the directory or directories containing the images you wish to sort or catalogue Once your images are displayed you can e drag and drop images one by one or as multiple selected groups into the buckets OR e hit the corresponding number key on your keyboard to add images into a bucket eg Hit 2 to place the images in bucket 2 You can add the same image into more than one bucket The last image you drop will be the thumbnail for the bucket The bucket will display the number of images contained inside it Right mouse down on any bucket to change its name re a a a aM e OE e r a Eg i g Ce Images 7 mages G imges Now that your images are sorted into buckets you can click on the S a h tton to move back to the canvas Note The contents of your buckets will be retained until they are cleared and will be saved with your projects This is useful for works in progress To access your images on the Create screen click on the hover This will open the full hover from which you can access your images 2009 190 YearbookFusion User s Manual Pree ee aa a Ss i If you want to e Remove an image click the image then click on the Remove button to remove it Buckets 2g BS Ga fe Continas DE re Brkt 3 Cie su rap Tings e Re
98. see only one option e Sheet refers to an individual separate sheet which will be printed as a stand alone such as a poster or a single photo print Essentials and Enhanced users are limited to this type of project for new projects e Album Side refers to a single page that is part of an album Album sides will display an indication of a gutter where the page will be bound into a book The gutter indication will not print it is simply displayed on the Canvas as a guideline Album sides will auto assign itself as a left or right side page but these can be changed on the Pages hover e Album Two Page Spread refers to two pages of an album that will be printed adjacent to each other Generally two page spread will be twice as wide as an album side but the same height A gutter guideline on the canvas to indicate the two sides of the page 2009 The Create Tab 81 Using two page spread allows you to use a single image color or texture across both pages However be careful when using an image across the gutter the binding technique on your completed album may obscure the image content in the gutter region eg a person s face may be squished in the binding Two page spreads can be rendered as separate pages and can have page numbering added on each half of the layout e Cover Sheet A cover sheet allows a dimension to be entered for a spine of your album and in the case of a dust cover interior flaps that wr
99. sheets or proofing documents 2009 The Create Tab 111 6 3 1 2 1 Adjusting the frame s position with snaps Whenever you move or resize a frame it will try to align itself with the edges of nearby frames this helps you produce neatly arranged collections of images This magnetic effect is felt anywhere a vertical or horizontal edge of a frame is shared with other frames When multiple images share an edge then FotoFusion allows you to affect both images at the same time by manipulating that shared edge a Snap a small draggable control is placed on ruler at the position of the shared edge F Dragging the snap will resize all frames that have an edge that aligns with that snap Dragging a snap is a quick way to resize many frames at once it converts tedious layout problems into a trivial action Moving snaps using the mouse To move a snap 1 Move the mouse over the snap 2 Press and hold the left mouse button 3 Drag the mouse All images that are affected by that snap will resize When you are done release the left mouse button You can press the esc key to abort the drag if necessary 2009 112 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 1 3 To turn this feature off click on TOOLS in the menu bar choose Editing and uncheck Magnetic Frames Cropping and panning images Cropping Cropping an image refers to repositioning an image within a frame To crop an im
100. size and shapes to create an interesting composition regardless of the size and shape of the images to be inserted into them However there will be occasions when it is important to preserve the original aspect ratio of the image or to lock the aspect ratio of a cropped image during resizing Toggling Aspect Ratio Lock To lock the aspect ratio lock of an image meaning the ratio of width to height cannot be changed select the frame and press the A key on your keyboard This action is specific to the selected frame s If you wish to select all frames then do not select any and hit Ctrl A on your keyboard When the aspect ratio is locked images can only be resized by their side resize handles corner handles no longer appear You can increase or decrease the size of the image but only proportionately The shape of the frame will no longer change If you wish to turn the aspect ratio lock off hit A again while the frame is selected Showing all of the image all the time If it is important to you that an image is not cropped 1 Select an image frame 2 Right mouse down and choose Snap Frame To Image This will resize the frame to make all of the original image visible 3 Turn the aspect ratio lock on by pressing A 2009 The Create Tab 115 6 3 1 4 Now you will be able to move resize and rotate images but not change their aspect ratio or crop pixels via resizing See also the definition
101. sizes will be listed dependent on your choices of Project type and Manufacturer Manage To create a new custom form factor click on Manage See below for more details Once you have made your selection click Apply If you are using a template or have begun to design your page you can choose to Fit Frames meaning the existing frames on the canvas will resize to the new page specifications automatically Managing Form Factors To edit existing form factors if unlocked or to create a new form factor a custom preset choose the Manage Form Factor option in the drop down list You can also click on the Manage button in either the Canvas Settings or Project Settings editors The Manage Form Factor editor enables you to edit existing form factors if allowed or to create new custom form factors Click on Create New Form Factor to enable all features If you can also choose to build a new form factor based on an existing one click on the Create New Form Factor from This One 2009 88 YearbookFusion User s Manual Piegeact Typer Album Manuactizec Generic Product Tiii Tieton Mace Desccnplni Page Type Album Side Width Heig lz ira a Unaeniahar iner kat i Piring 2 crus LA sas J Cawet hiai Sock Fig Spine Teng FT e First specify the project type album sheet specialty digital e Next give the form factor a name This will be displayed under the File gt gt New optio
102. the FOLDERS button at the top of Windows Explorer You will see a file tree a list of all the main folders Some will have a next to them Click on the to see subfolders under this main folder You can close them up by clicking on the button On your C drive you will most likely find a folder called My Documents and another called My Pictures Software like FotoFusion will often use these folders to store your files FotoFusion will save your scrap project files by default in C My Documents My Collages You can choose to save it in other places as well Every file on your system has a name followed by a file extension eg collage exe Vacation picture 1 jpg birthday card scrap The file extension tells Windows and the various programs installed on the computer what the file is supposed to do For example files ending in exe will launch software files ending in jpg are a type of image file which you can preview or bring into software like FotoFusion files ending in scrap are FotoFusion project files that only FotoFusion can use and open Never change the file extension if you rename a file Windows and other software will not know what the file is supposed to do Managing your files Window Explorer is essentially a very smart filing cabinet However like any filing cabinet you need to make sure to keep it organized well in order to make it easy to use and efficient One common mistake is to use the Windows d
103. the Displays your license Organizer screen to type Share email to the Output options to the Community area then back to the Create screen to edit your projects HOVER DOCKS Hovers docks hold hover buttons You can add buttons by clicking the button 2009 The Basics 25 elements EDITOR A pop up window displaying the options available for the currently selected item The editors are most easily opened via the Toolbox HOVERS These buttons launch editors on the work area allowing you to edit and search for materials You can move the buttons anywhere on the canvas or leave them in the dock Welcome Screen Canvas views Image options and Support Toolbox A pop up window which appears when you select any item s on the canvas Provides instant editing to select features and access to the Editors Credits A balance indicates available credits to spend if unpurchased graphic content is on the canvas the amount owed to unlock the content will be displayed FRAME Houses image and text elements on your canvas Active frames will display handles around them Inactive frames will only display a frame number TUTORIAL VIDEOS Click here for a list of available videos to learn how to use FotoFusion CANVAS The working area of your project Any item placed in this area will be part of your finished composition ONLINE Indicates if
104. the PSPA import or just one subsection l If you wish all the images in the database to be added select SHOW ALL You can refine who actually ends up Lincoln Elementary Heo al oor ae e appearing in the panel later but choose this option if you 2 Shove Al Show Only want almost everyone every group to be included Grid Dai l If you wish to specify a specific portion of the set eg only anorak one grade or one teacher s class then select SHOW ONLY bhorrt Rii bial Last Harc If you are using only a particular subset of the images Fest Haraki then specify at least one variable in the list of options Eg Seca tinea _ To make a panel that ONLY includes grade 5 students then meer select Grade 5 in the Grade dropdown To make a panel woken Marne that ONLY includes grade 5 students in Mrs Lavall e s Phere Class then select the Grade and the Teacher in the racks dropdown Note in this case Mrs Lavall e MUST teach ARA _ grade 5 or else there will be no images that meet this sd requirement and your panel will remain blank 1 the ka PDC y amp Not all fields will have drop box options such as Last and Ghi First names since nearly every image will have different oor information for these fields Reset Appy If you need to edit any of the information that appears in these fields eg a teacher s name is misspelled then use the Organize tab to do so When you have ch
105. the page If your page contains empty frames eg a blank template your images will AutoPopulate into the empty frames The Organizer Click here to learn how you can use FotoFusion s organizer to manage your image files and to sort them effectively for your projects This powerful tool will help you organize your projects quickly Drag and drop from Windows Explorer You can drag images directly from the Windows Explorer into FotoFusion s main interface To bring images in from Windows Explorer 1 Open Windows Explorer to browse all your available files There are several ways to do this including Holding the Windows key down and pressing e or Opening the Start menu and selecting My Computer or double clicking on My Computer on your desktop 2 Find the folder containing the images you want to use 3 Hold the Ctrl key down and click on as many image files as you like to select them and release the Ctrl key when you are done 4 Move the cursor over one of the files you have selected then press and hold the left mouse button This will pick up the set of files you selected in step 3 5 Drag them to FotoFusion If you can see the FotoFusion window below the Windows Explorer simply drag the files to the FotoFusion window then release the mouse button If you can t see the FotoFusion window you will need to switch tasks to bring the FotoFusion window to the top To do this you ca
106. the space between the images or reduce the space until the images are fused together 2009 The Create Tab 131 Top set of images increased inset value Bottom set of images O inset value the images are glued together 6 3 2 3 Matte options What is a Matte A matte is a hole which can display an image a color or a texture Note Version 4 allows you to use a matte and a border at the same time Mattes can also be applied to text The default matte for a new image frame is a straight edged rectangular shape The default matte can be replaced many different types of mattes Image by Stephen Eastwood 2009 132 YearbookFusion User s Manual Mattes are useful for giving your images a unique look and also to create decorative elements on your page when you apply background textures to them Adding a matte to your image Select one or more images on your canvas and open the Frame editor from the Toolbox Matte options are available in the second section of the Frame editor Click on the Enable checkbox to turn the gi Frame Lall matte on or off border Gripen Matia arg Click on the Browse option to launch a Enable F predefined Search hover displaying all Enans Brese available mattes including those on on your h local system and those on the LumaPix EHO y server Alpha Pius RGE amp You can also use the drop box option saften
107. themes Black with Grey Frames Minimalist and Standard provide simple aesthetic choices for the way your work will look 2009 202 YearbookFusion User s Manual The Album Preview theme is useful to Extreme users with multi page albums as it includes page thumbnails at the top of the email The Contact Sheet theme is useful to all users Instead of rendering a collage all images on your canvas will be arranged cleanly into thumbnails with file information Note you need to have Include Scaled down Original Images checked to produce contact sheet style info E gao aa sga J as e m Emm mm _ i a 7 zz kz B E I E F la a a ba OE i e oy E d Creating your own theme FotoFusion also allows you to create custom themes for your emails and for the pages you publish to your web site If you wish to design your own themes it is recommended that you examine the pre existing themes included with FotoFusion located in C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion V4 Themes to get an idea of their construction then attempt to customize your own The following instructions are written with the assumption that you are viewing the structure and design of the sample themes located under the Themes folder of your FotoFusion installation Each template must be located in a unique folder located under the Themes folder Every template must include the following files 20
108. to communicate with LumaPix Support team Learning Preferences allows you to turn on and off automated learning tools and effects Language allows you to choose a new language for the FotoFusion interface Help translate FotoFusion will direct you to a web page for more information Show Video list will activate the list of tutorial videos Purchase FotoFusion will redirect you to FotoFusion s store to buy a new license or upgrade Purchase Store Items will activate the shopping cart to buy all new items on your canvas Check for a New Version shows if you are running the best and last Lirn fis appart Learming Preferences LAMJJYJ i Hal hrania Fiara SPa Video List HUN Giaa Purchase FoloPuscrn Purchase Store keen Ga thhe Pobal uses Chack For a New Vardo At Pitof s 2009 38 YearbookFusion User s Manual build About FotoFusion shows your current licensing info and build information Tabs The tabs at the top of the FotoFusion interface represent five separate screens each of which allow you to perform particular types of actions qA Creole e Diganme M Share gs IRA ye a lg Ouiput TE Comimuisiy ie o n mea m es ST k CREATE The screen where all your editing work will be done ORGANIZE The screen where you can view sort categorize and keyword your images and projects SHARE FotoFusion s built in email ap
109. using the presets of one manufacturer on a template then resize the whole project automatically to meet another size album all pages at once For example a wedding album might be created as a 10x10 finished album size then rendered If the client wishes to also have a smaller album produced for family members a new form factor such as a 7x5 book can be selected and applied to the entire project then rendered again The entire project will be resized at the same time respectful of frame placement and page type 2009 82 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 1 1 1 Extreme amp YearbookFusion users can change the default way FotoFusion adds pages to an album project Click on the Edit menu item and open the User Preferences item Saupe Sheets Cetected in Absa 3 Ack Liker Under the Single Sheets Detected in Album e option you can choose how FotoFusion will or wA Aaye Cornett will not prompt you to deal with single sheets C Never Convert when added to an album project type Reversa Housewives Zoom For example if you append a template that is Shaw Advaneid earch a single sheet FotoFusion can OPT Worninga e Ask User prompt you to convert or not rei F VTE convert the page to an album side ijas sak boy Publish e Always Convert no prompt will appear The Single sheet will automatically become an Now Pages album side a Fp Layouts When Pages change Sades e Never Convert single sheets will remain
110. videos poe ees pel By costed Raines ssh Boot sepa d EETA a IEEE Epee ecien Auto Click on AUTO to launch the AutoCollage Wizard Full details of this feature are documented in the AutoTools section of this manual 2009 30 YearbookFusion User s Manual P OF leet pees F ees fie eee de LEST p a L a a a ee F a E PE ERE E MAp eS f NE Pe AA p ee Ce h ie oe n g E j FE 9 ae E T ee ee ee ae Pe ees F mbes Ae ib fe DE C Cro Connect to LumaPix Click on CONNECT TO LUMAPIX to view the latest news about FotoFusion and LumaPix access the user s forum check for new updates to the software send an email to Support or request a callback from support This feature may be disabled in some YearbookFusion installations 2009 The Basics 31 BRDA E rr Tr vE TTA Pn Pa m pmm E N korajia pe soc Toe par ge Pe Loo Paaren a pa ee Ergi erate eral a T aa betes A a hey pha ay oe teow ee ais Lb Segre dees fed pa ete ed ee Pe ee j pj sce Pe ee EH Re ee ERE ee ee ee eee ee ee Ei Ra MEEF ee ee ee ee he EE e E AEE E baii raka biiga Barmy a broad en Ja ial abla hr cormcelcarety Minal i Teda a Tiri TE Tha tiri eai ah tee kbA mia cee eee Ea eS ee mha ced by Lika Perea el Sere eed br eee Pee jen barp ee Fia ponh oe ee o peg PP een e few Ba aim eal a s bly mE g pgn eg Be a a a Bundled Content Click on BUNDLED CONTENT to see all graphic materials that
111. you do not want your image to be resizable select the Image frame and right mouse down to expose a list of options Select LOCK SIZE You will no longer be able to move the image but will be able to edit and resize it Reselect the right mouse option to uncheck this feature Note AutoCollage overrides Lock Position Rotating flipping tilting and spinning Rotating amp Spinning To rotate a frame first select it then move the cursor over the rotate handle for that frame Press and hold the left mouse button Drag the mouse The frame will rotate as you move the mouse When you are satisfied release the left mouse button You can press the esc key to abort the drag if necessary This control can also be accessed via the Frame Editor under the Position amp Size options To spin the image WITHIN the frame to correct for a crooked camera angle or for an effect hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard while moving your mouse on the rotate handle 2009 116 YearbookFusion User s Manual of the selected frame s This control is also accessible in the Image Editor under Angle Snap to 45 degree increments While rotating your frame hold down the Alt key to have the image snap to increments of 45 degrees 0 45 90 etc Snap to 90 degree increments Images can be rotated via the Image toolbox Click the Rotate option to open the Orient tool then click on either of the two rotation arrows items 1 2 to ro
112. you shoot Adobe RGB FotoFusion can pass your images through and tag the results as Adobe RGB The results will look correct when printed and rendered as Adobe RGB images Version 4 is launched Version 4 represents a major revolution not just for the FotoFusion story but for digital and paper scrapbooking Pro Photographers will not be disappointed by multiple new features designed to help improve productivity and output options Paper Digital The dotScrap Alliance is a new Scrapbooking industry Templates consortium based around FotoFusion including K amp Company Creative Imaginations Daisy D s Westrim KI Memories L il Davis Scrapbook com ScrapJazz com MyCliqueTV and more Paper kits found in retail stores that are marked with dotScrap Ready have easily downloaded FotoFusion templates to make the paper kits even easier to work with Smart content Work with intelligent graphical objects that act the way you expect envelopes that hold images paper clips and pins that hold paper frames that can be reshaped without stretching and multi layer elements that age and add realism to your photos Integrated Search and download from an ever growing database of online content elements templates and complete projects for everyone from library scrapbookers all the way up to professional photography studios Improved UI A system of pop up windows bring searches image folders and other image sources to you
113. your keywords and categories to find the series of images you need 6 Send your project to the lab Export your work at 300 dpi or as instructed by your printer of choice and send the files to them in their prescribed manner Note that you can produce alternative sizes of the album through the Project Settings 7 Relax the Job ts done or go shoot an extra job with all the time you ve saved 2009 Pro Project Tutorials 255 Note If you require outsourced color correction services be sure to ask your lab if they will do this for you You will need to ask if they can color correct your image set before you make the layout preferable or if they will accept layered psd files after you have exported Labs cannot color correct a flattened image eg jpg 13 2 Contact sheets Contact sheets can be as simple or customized as you like Option 1 Use dotScrap Marketplace templates In the Start Zone click on Marketplace then navigate to the Contact Sheets category OR on the Create Screen type contact in the Search hover Enhanced amp Extreme users have access to 5 contact sheets in the Bundled Content list Follow the instructions provided with the template to output your contact sheets Option 2 Create your own template from scratch e Create a new blank canvas to your choice of size e Add a large blank frame to your canvas 2009 256 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Us
114. 09 The Share Tab 203 email htm index htm page htm photo htm Note Any images used in the theme design must be located in a sub folder named images email htm The email htm is a special file which contains the entire design needed to send an email The various portions of the email which need to be repeated are wrapped in special tags There are also various tokens which are required to tell FotoFusion how to render your design A complete list of these tokens is available below Please refer to the sample html files to see how these tokens are best used in your designs The header section tags indicate which part of the html is to be used at the beginning of the email lt START HEADER SECTION gt lt END HEADER SECTION gt The index section tags indicate where the Index portion of the email should be and must contain the start end index thumbnail tags which will be duplicated over and over for each page thumbnail lt START INDEX SECTION gt lt START INDEX THUMBNAIL gt lt END INDEX THUMBNAIL gt lt END INDEX SECTION gt The page section tags indicate which part of email htm should be used for the pages The html code contained between these tags will be duplicated over and over for every page in the project lt START PAGE SECTION gt lt END PAGE SECTION gt The photo section tags indicate which part of email htm should be used for your project
115. 194 Web publishing 214 Web themes 201 wedding 251 wedding album templates 251 wedding albums 177 Welcome 2 25 westrim 14 What Everything Does 23 what is a candid page 299 what is a credit 241 what is a frame 41 What is a Kit 247 What is a Panel Page 299 What is a PSPA cd 306 What is dotScrap 239 What is FotoFusion 5 20 What is YearbookFusion 298 What the layers do 100 What s new in Version4 5 where did my project go 229 where doi print my work 206 Where to save files 229 which company uses fotofusion 206 which version 12 who can print my projects 206 width of panel 322 Windows 229 Windows 2000 6 Windows Explorer 43 Windows Vista 6 Windows XP 6 wizard 306 work flow 250 workflow 251 www FotoScraps com 224 225 www lumapix com forum 224 sV a yearbook 258 yearbook publishers 298 Yearbook templates 335 Yearbook Toolbar 298 Yellow interior handles 47 Your license type 79 Per ee zoomin 58 Zooming the Canvas 97 2009
116. 52 YearbookFusion User s Manual selection tools 98 semi transparent frame 150 Semi transparent text 176 Send backward 122 Send to back 122 Send using my own ISP E Mail settings 194 sending proofs 258 sending to a photo finisher 207 sending to a photo lab 207 sending to an external editor 262 Sending to your publisher 338 Sepiatone 141 Set as canvas background 93 Set your own defaults 17 Setting the text s content 164 167 Settings 93 Setup button 217 Shadow color 162 Shadow editor 162 Shadow inside 126 162 Shadows 162 Share 194 Share Tab 38 Sheet 79 shortcuts 266 Show Advanced Search 187 191 SHOW ALL 305 310 Show Drop Photo Here when Empty 144 SHOW ONLY 305 310 Showing all of the image all the time 113 shut your project 32 sides 17 Single Sheets Detected in Album 79 size 82 84 Size and position controls 126 size dropped images at 53 Size of canvas 79 Size of page 79 size of the canvas background 79 Sizing frames to match the images 107 Sizing frames using numeric values 107 Sizing images to match their frames 107 Sizing text 169 Skipping images 43 53 Smart content 17 Smart Elements 246 Smart Frames 41 246 Snap 111 272 Snap frame to image 107 113 Snap image to frame 107 Snap to 45 degree increments 115 Snap to Grid 89 Snap to vertical 115 Snaps 111 Snug Text 305 soft 136 sorting 74 75 315 333 sorting classes 333 sorting the panel 333 sorting your images 188 S
117. 9 328 YearbookFusion User s Manual of the page that runs on the outside of the book Gutters and edges change from side to side on a album sides because the binding edge of the page flips from page to page RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE LEFT SIDE PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE EE Tei Bn PF iu ige giller Pi 49 Qe ia Pe 19 hoe junie Layout The Frames drop box options allow you to define to which FEAA Sitis side your panel will be justified rcs _ The default is Gutter which will cause the frames to be snug hast owt Gutter Rd to the gutter binding side of the album page You can change this option to the edge of the page or always justify i to the left or the right sides or the centre of the page or Guner 015 Edge B15 the full width of the page Top 0 15 Botlom O35 The Last Row drop box options allow you to choose the justification of your last row of panels The last row of a panel will often not fill up all columns so you can choose how the panel will deal with the extra space either justifying it to the gutter or edge to the left of the right or centered Locking and unlocking panel attributes Locks allow you to choose if particular the panel can be changed 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 329 Locks Unlocking the Labels and the Frames will allow you to select Labels Panel Postion individual frames and text to apply attributes to that one fe Frame i Image Effects item
118. Cover Sheet 79 create a new attribute set 316 create a new form factor 82 84 create additional buckets 188 Create custom size preset 84 Create Tab 23 38 78 Creating a group 123 creating a hover 38 creating a new project 299 Creating a new template 201 creating an album 299 creating your own mattes 134 credits 241 298 Crop Handles 47 Crop marks 217 272 croping an image 41 Cropping 112 217 Ctrl G 123 CUSTOM 64 custom data 316 Custom EXIF tags 167 custom fields 316 custom page size 82 84 Custom size 64 82 84 custom size project 64 cutting out 157 2009 344 YearbookFusion User s Manual D data fields 316 database 237 dead center 120 decorations 248 335 default 62 default canvas DPI 43 default canvas size 82 84 default dpi 53 default dropper settings 53 default folders 229 default frame 150 Default handling 17 Default Image Sizes 43 53 default matte 131 default page size 82 84 default setting 62 delete buckets 188 Deleting 226 Deleting a frame 106 Deleting collages 226 deleting projects 226 deleting templates 66 Deleting your old work 226 Delimiter 306 demo 9 department 315 designer 250 designing a contact sheet 255 Designing Layouts 78 Detect my settings 194 digital photo enthusiasts 20 Dimensions 305 display file information 236 Distribute options 120 docked hover 38 docking editors 59 dotScrap 239 241 246 dotScrap Alliance 17 dotScrap Credits 241 dotScr
119. D and EXTREME only Safe The region within the canvas that is sure to be visible when the print is mounted A 5x7 print mounted in a photo album may be overlapped by 1 4 on each side by the album s frame this would produce a print with a safe area measuring Reference 273 Crop Marks Gamma Alpha Aspect Ratio DPI JPG compress ion ratio 4 5x6 5 The safe size can be set to any size you like This feature is available in FotoFusion ENHANCED only Lines drawn on final output to indicate where the print should be cut to produce the desired trim size An aspect of the color information for an image that can be controlled to produce more or less detail in the midrange of an image without affecting the black or white levels The opacity of an image Alpha 1 means the image is completely Opaque Alpha 0 means the image is completely transparent The overall shape of an object expressed as a ratio of the width to the height without taking units into account a Square has an aspect ratio of 1 1 whether it is a foot or an inch on a side Dots Per Inch a printing term describing the resolution of an image More accurately it should be called Pixels per inch It measures the number of pixels that fit within an inch for an output device for example a typical printer outputs at 300 DPI while a typical computer monitor displays at 96 DPI To FotoFusion DPI is really just a
120. Documents My Collages My Templates but you can save it anywhere on your system Page numbering and other multi page features There are many useful tools in FotoFusion which will allow you to streamline your multi page work flow Adding page numbers to your project Page numbers can be added automatically to all pages in your project To do so click on TOOLS on the menu then select CANVAS then PAGE NUMBERING or alternatively right mouse down on the area outside of the canvas and select PAGE NUMBERING The following dialogue will appear 2009 The Create Tab 181 Page Numbering Shc Page pages gt gt gt Style Preset defaut Pos on igmert Offset Edge w j2 J Rasat Batham s E J Reset l HPE Turn the SHOW checkbox on to apply page numbers to your project To change the font color and other text style options click on STYLE PRESETS This will launch the Text Editor Note the font size attribute cannot be applied from the font editor Change the position of your page number as desired and the size of the page To remove the PAGE text so that only a numeric value displays delete the Page portion of the Pages page tag in this editor Page numbering is smart double page spreads will be marked on both sides and adding removing pages will renumber your project accordingly It will also respect safe amp bleed guidelines You can also turn page numbering o
121. Fusion and to photo labs or printing service providers Extreme license holders can also create a multi page pdf document or export to a layered psd file useful for color correction or image editing in Photoshop Once you export your file the individual components of your project will no longer be editable Technically you can move the layers in the psd output but this is not recommended since the image s shadow and other elements are related to each other and are on separate layers If you still need to edit your collage you should save it as scrap file not render it into a flat file Typical reasons for rendering your work include e to give the work to a lab for printing e to send good quality files to clients family or friends who do not own FotoFusion e to use the files in another application such as a slide show maker e to burn the files to a dvd e to use the files in an album making application which will then upload your album for printing amp binding e to print it on a machine that does not have FotoFusion installed 2009 208 YearbookFusion User s Manual e to use it as a Windows desktop image e upload it to a public web gallery outside of FotoScraps 4 Ouipu To export your file click on the jg oma tab and select TO A FILE from the list of options This will switch FotoFusion to the Export view Pis hiir My Yi SS i eer ube m gt gt Doty Pea a joo
122. Fusion in another license type The Run As option is useful if you are using FotoFusion in trial mode to determine what license level is right for you or to try out a higher license type if you are considering upgrading your license 4 1 3 The Menu Bar The Menu bar contains every feature available in FotoFusion Almost all controls available in the Menu are available by directly selecting left and right mouse click items on your 2009 The Basics 33 Canvas JE Most actions can and should be performed through direct mouse clicks on the canvas and through the hovers toolboxes and editors or through keyboard shortcuts as this is the most efficient way to use FotoFusion FILE contains project management actions New project AutoCollage Wizard Open saved work templates and purchased items from the Marketplace Saving pages and projects Adding Images to the canvas Outputting your project to file email or the web Printer controls to set up your printer to preview your current page or to print Archiving Restoring projects to transfer to another computer Project Management for maintenance of the project database Color Management amp ICM Editing Extreme only Recently used file list to quick launch your last projects Closing your current page project to shut your project Exit FotoFusion to turn off the software Pw Pingo Ata clas WEA GE apen My P
123. If this doesn t work you can use one of the following methods to locate files on your computer To find images exported projects or FotoFusion project files in Windows Explorer 2009 232 YearbookFusion User s Manual 11 1 2 Hit Ctrl F on your keyboard this will launch the Search tool You can search My Computer or a specific drive for a file name or even a particular file extension type In FotoFusion you can use the Organizer to find FotoFusion scrap project files made on that same computer Click on the Organizer and choose the Search tab on the left side Change the TYPE box to Saved Work then click on the next to this option Choose Projects or Pages to find a page within a multipage project Thumbnails of your FotoFusion projects will appear in preview Right mouse select the one you wish to reopen Remote Storage YearbookFusion only Remote storage allows designated YearbookFusion users as enabled by their yearbook publishers to save and load projects to a LumaPix server This feature enables file sharing within FotoFusion without dependence a local network It will enable multiple users to share common project files regardless of their physical location For instance a yearbook committee can work from home in the school or at an internet cafe sharing project files from their space on the server Publishers can enable remote storage only or local amp remote storage If yo
124. Location of database installation can be specified manually e Database split into user metadata vs recreatable caches e New themes for emails and published pages available 2009 Reference 289 New noise mattes search for type matte Library can be filtered by keyword HTML themes can determine rendering resolution Graphical enhancement to UI Selected Fixed Bugs Offline rendering works again Email UI reworked Crop to trim not displaying images outside canvas Menus reworked to include data management and other changes Editors now always open completely on screen even on dual monitor system Videos display better in the Home zone Images in dropper now taken into account when performing an AutoCollage Frames can be deleted from School Composite when running Enhanced Tutorial is working again Released May 17 2007 Version 4 0 Build 39446 Project archive and restore Distressed text mattes can be applied to text Multi page projects can be sent by email Multi page projects can be published to the web Multi monitor support hovers react correctly outside primary display Canvas presets can specify default processing DPI Welcome page completely revamped Reference segment rendering now much faster Free Localization translation pipeline for people that want to translate FotoFusion Selected Fixed Bugs Various crashes have been resolved DRM errors after going offline now fixed Photo Databas
125. LumaPix YearbDookKFusion User s Manual This manual contains the full instruction set for FotoFusion and a separate section detailing the special features of YearbookFusion If you have downloaded this manual and have not been provided with a copy of YearbookFusion by a publishing company please visit www LumaPix com to learn more about this valuable time saving and creativity enhancing tool Copyright LumaPix 2009 YearbookFusion User s Manual YearbookFusion User s Manual Welcome to YearbookFusion This manual contains the full instruction set for FotoFusion and a separate section detailing the special features of YearbookFusion If you have downloaded this manual and have not been provided with a copy of YearbookFusion by a publishing company please visit www LumaPIx com YearbookFusion to learn more on how you can obtain this valuable time saving and creativity enhancing tool Introduction to FotoFusion LumaPix FotoFusion v4 Documentation The information in this User s Manual will teach you to use FotoFusion quickly Learn what has been improved in the What s New section If you have any comments questions or Suggestions about FotoFusion V4 please feel free to visit www LumaPix com 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 3 2 1 Support to consult our online resources and or to contact us Your feedback will help complete the process and guide the continued evolut
126. LumaPix com gt gt Download Now button 1 Ensure that you have a fresh copy of the software download a trial copy of FotoFusion Visit www LumaPix com and click Download Now to get the latest build Run the installation do not save it This will automatically download and install a free version of the software on your machine overwriting any existing copies you may have The unregistered version will place watermarks on output renders prints to distinguish it from a registered copy but is otherwise fully functional You can try out all the features available at all levels to see what level of FotoFusion is right for your needs A feature comparison chart is available on the LumaPix website to determine what license type is right for you also consult the Which Version section of this manual 2 If you have not already done so purchase a FotoFusion license from www LumaPIix com You can purchase FotoFusion in two ways e From within FotoFusion by choosing Purchase FotoFusion from the Help menu in FotoFusion or e By visiting www LumaPix com and clicking Buy Now Either method will send you to the LumaPix web store where you can select the version 2009 10 YearbookFusion User s Manual of FotoFusion which is right for you Simply enter your contact and credit card information and submit the order Our secure vendor site can accept orders from anywhere in the world 3 Receive con
127. Much of what made the original FotoFusion user interface so unique was preserved with the addition of features such as better default handling and a completely revamped organizer responding to user feedback Headline features included the following availability dependent upon license type Paper Digital Templates 2009 Reference 291 The dotScrap Alliance is a new Scrapbooking industry consortium based around FotoFusion including K amp Company Creative Imaginations Daisy D s Westrim KI Memories L il Davis Scrapbook com ScrapJazz com MyCliqueTV and more Paper kits found in retail stores that are marked with dotScrap Ready have easily downloaded FotoFusion templates to make the paper kits even easier to work with Smart content Work with intelligent graphical objects that act the way you expect envelopes that hold images paperclips and pins that hold paper frames that can be reshaped without stretching and multi layer elements Integrated online content library Search and download from an ever growing database of elements templates and complete projects Improved User Interface A system of pop up windows bring searches image folders and other image sources to your fingertips Starting points make it easier to begin projects with a particular project type in mind PSD and PDF Export In addition to JPG PNG TIF BMP and GIF FotoFusion can now export to multi page PDF and
128. Options e Frame Position and Size Note All Frame Editor options are accessible via the Snos button on the Create screen If the Settings Button is pinned or docked all frame editing options will appear in this window when a frame is selected 6 3 2 1 Border options A Border is a rectangular region drawn around the outside of the frame the width color and transparency of the border can be adjusted 2009 128 YearbookFusion User s Manual Borders can be adjusted directly in the Image Toolbox or in the Frame Editor The border control in Toolbox can be dragged to edit the border interactively Mouse down and drag the mouse The border will resize The Frame Editor is opened by clicking on the border graphic in the toolbox displaying more detailed border options Ceram Ber Hihi linger Width 0 06 Border Width Dragging this control makes the border thicker or thinner Border Color Drag the R G B controls to adjust the Red Green and Blue channels of the image directly alternatively you can click the color chip to open the color editor Border Opacity Allows you to turn down the transparency of the border This can create an interesting effect of a see though border Fit Image The entire image to fit into the border when checked Unchecked a portion of the image will be obscured by the border 2009 The Create Tab 129 6 3 2 2 Shadow Inside This
129. Photo height FF_PHOTO_DESCRIPTION Photo description Adding Custom Tags to Emails FotoFusion Extreme allows you to use custom EXIF information in your source images to add to your email themes You will need to edit the following information in the Email theme substituting your custom tag for one of the existing ones Yname type Date date Photo Number FF_PHOTO_NO Focal Length focallength Shutter Speed shutter In this example we will replace Shutter Speed with Last Name information Go to the folder you created for the theme C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusionv4 Themes ExifEmail and open email htm in Windows Notepad and not a Word document as html coding will be included rendering the file unusable In this case search for Shutter You will see something like this lt td style border solid Opx CCCCCC background color F2F2F2 font family Arial Helvetica sans serif font size 10px font weight bold color 000000 gt Shutter Speed shutter lt td gt Most of this is a description of the table format the relevant information is at the end Shutter Speed Yshutter Replace that with the name and tag ID of choice for example Last Name studentLastName Save your work and ensure that FF has ExifEmail selected as a theme Preview the email again If all has been entered correctly you will see Filename jpg Date xx xx xx Photo Number y 2009
130. SHOW ALL button to see all images associated with the 2009 312 YearbookFusion User s Manual PSPA import or on the SHOW ONLY button to search for a particular set of images as defined in the drop box option below Use the drop box options to use the imported data to triage a particular image set For example look for all the students in a particular grade and or students associated to a particular homeroom teacher You can also type first and last names notice how the number of images in the previewer decreases the more letters you type 2 In the middle preview section the results of your search will be shown You can display the images in several ways e Sort by FILE NAME FILE DATE or PHOTO DATE Name is selected by default e View THUMBNAILS images amp file name TILES images file name amp size or DETAILS images amp all related data 3 At the top of the screen you will see four buckets Buckets can be used to triage image sets to bring them to the Create tab Up to nine buckets can be created See the general section on the Organize Tab for more information 4 The Properties section of the Organizer allows you to view and edit data associated with your images Select one or more images to see the data associated with the images and then edit it as required As in the example above when you first import your CD some buckets may contain images that are missing important data It
131. Smeg Rachie pt map Feil Lisy This will make your email appear as if it came directly from you not the LumaPix Server If your recipient replies back their message will return to your personal email account After this step you have the following options e Pick recipients e Create a message to go with the collage e Specify compression and image sizes e Configure ISPs if necessary e Add watermarks to protect your images e Add banners to bring recipients to your site e Set up a custom HTML theme for the mail Picking Recipients Click on the Nt tab to set up your email If you have never sent an email to the recipient you have in mind click on NEW to add them to the list i mee io bhh fee mm IF ire 2009 196 YearbookFusion User s Manual imail Address g Mame loptonall Lumar Suppa EM t separaned by a de Sepa ote bees tappoi uap con lt The recipient s name and email address will be saved in the recipients list to make it easy to send mails to those people again in the future you can simply click on the check box in the recipients list to have the email sent to them The Import button provides tools that attempt to import your contacts from the Microsoft Address Book into FotoFusion to avoid your having to retype known Email IDs To edit your list click on the Change button Your email list is saved as a text file in your MY COLLAGES folder C My Documents My
132. The FAQ which brings you to the LumaPix Support website e News where LumaPix lets you Know about developments for FotoFusion e Other providing links to preferred sites There is also an active Yahoo discussion group centered on the use of FotoFusion for scrapbooking Drop in If you have problems using FotoFusion feel free to visit www lumapix com support to view the Frequently Asked Question database and to leave a support ticket 2009 The Community Tab 225 10 1 FotoScraps online gallery www FotoScraps com is an online community maintained by LumaPix It includes a gallery a forum and a store The gallery is a fun free place to share your layouts with friends with a particular focus on scrapbooking Check it out FotoFusion provides a direct pipeline to upload your layouts right into the FotoScraps gallery just click upload This is a huge improvement over the normal pipeline from packages like Photoshop into online galleries which require you to save the file as a jpg image then go to the gallery and click upload then find the file you saved out of Photoshop FotoFusion provides a streamlined pipeline that keeps the busywork to a minimum Step 1 Register at FotoScraps If you aren t already registered at FotoScraps take a moment to do so it s free Click here to get set up Step 2 Create Something Step 3 Log into FotoScraps f Communit Click on the JH tab Clic
133. This will turn the Exclude attribute to yes in the Organize tab and the image will disappear from the panel 18 2 1 1 1 2 Enhanced grouping and sorting features Your YearbookFusion attribute set contains new fields that can be used to enhance your ability to sort the panels into groups and subgroups Your PSPA index will most likely not contain data under these fields but you can manually add data into these fields to make the process of panel creation much easier Additional fields include Department assign individuals to groups such as Administration Faculty Cafeteria Janitorial Support Student etc e Title add jobdescriptions such as Superintendent Teacher Custodian Crossing Guard Assistant Teacher Secretary or Vice Principal e Track add special streams or programs such as vocational special ed home school extention etc e Groups assign the area of the yearbook where the individual should appear such as StaffPages or StudentPages e Priority assigns ranks to individuals such 1 for the Principal 2 for the Vice Principal 3 for teachers 4 for assistant teachers 5 for students e Notes displays information relative to the individual which can be overlaid on the image eg retake missing image e Middle names can be added which is useful if there are duplicate names in a school Ranking individuals within a panel The following is an example of how one of these new field
134. Yearbook only The Tree Hover provides an alternative way to manage your composition Extreme version only To use the tree open the Tree option in one of the three hover docks then click on it to launch the hover The hierarchy of your project will be displayed Tree ajoaan tL UREN 2009 102 YearbookFusion User s Manual To use the tree ee a ES Project e click on up and down arrow buttons to move an item within the Page 1 stack Canvas e click on the sideways arrows to move items to and from a dae parent child relationship to each other meaning the child element is attached to the parent one and will move with the parent e click on G to group items together Right mouse down on any item in the list to see a list of options available to apply to that particular element 6 2 Search Hovers Locating graphics amp templates On the Create screen you will find several Search hovers which are nested in one of three Hover docks i T Fr g Thy m r This includes a generic _ hover and preset hovers such as Dames or Papers Launch FotoFusion while connected to a high speed internet connection this will enable search hovers to find graphic embellishments and templates available on the LumaPix server the dotScrap marketplace Each license type is packaged with a collection of embellishments and templates with the ability to add more content by purchasing it with dotScra
135. a clear space Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse As you drag a marquee selection will be drawn a rectangle that selects every frame that it touches When you have touched all the frames you want to select with the marquee release the mouse button All the items within the marquee have been selected Select All To select all like frames a page collage either e Press Ctrl A or e Click the select all button o the toolbar or e Choose Select All in the Selection menu 2009 The Create Tab 99 If no frames are selected then only image frames will be selected If a frame is preselected eg a text frame then all text frames on the page will be selected If all like items on a page are selected all remaining non selected items will be added to the selection Selection By Type It will frequently be useful to select all objects of a specific type For example if you are building a contact sheet it is handy to be able to select all text frames with a single click for example to resize all of them interactively To do this Click on the select by type button Choose a selection type from the resulting pop up list Canvas ext Drage Framas Temale Fries f Layer Filtering FotoFusion allows you to assign objects to layers By default images are dropped on the Collage layer and text is placed on the Text layer It is often useful to disable selection in s
136. a Management e Combo box fields in School and Properties tab are typable 16135 File Management e Images dragged from internet saved locally 20334 e Project thumbnails update if file is overwritten 18338 Form Factors e Custom form factor can be modified without copying it 20498 e Choosing new custom size will launch custom canvas size editor not previously selected form factor 20085 Framework e Marketplace content loads faster threading error repaired 20354 e Some repairs made to French and Spanish version ui text 20898 Customization e Logos appear in File gt New under Manufacturer s list 18612 e Yearbook clip art hover visible to all license YearbookFusion users 18453 19777 Yearbook Panels e Backgrounds amp design elements applied to empty panel will carry over to populated panel pages 20342 20343 e Line breaks in panel text set to off by default 20211 e Projects saved with panels labels using local font will preserve font when reopened on another system 19964 released October 1 2009 The Basics What ts FotoFusion and What Does It Do FotoFusion is a powerful easy to use tool for creating high quality photo compositions from digital images 2009 The Basics 21 Scrapbookers and digital photo enthusiasts use FotoFusion to create beautiful photo pages to preserve their memories create gifts and craft projects organize their digital photos Share ima
137. able 18 1 Creating your yearbook Yearbooks and directories are usually composed of two kinds of pages panel pages and candid pages A panel page is the standard presentation A candid page is more of a scrapbook or style for school portraits in yearbooks It newsletter style page which contains consists of a grid of student photos with custom text and informal portraits names next to or under the photos 2009 300 YearbookFusion User s Manual Example of a yearbook Example of a candid page panel page YearbookFusion allows you to automate the production of the panel pages You can customize the panel changing the border style the number of frames and the configuration of the grid Candid pages can be created from scratch or by using templates provided with YearbookFusion These templates can be customized as well Consult the general FotoFusion user s manual to learn about all the features you can use to create your custom candid pages Canvas size and settings Every yearbook and directory publishers has particular requirements about page sizes and guidelines such as safe and bleed zones to ensure that no important content gets cut off when the printed pages are trimmed YearbookFusion contains a special feature to automatically ensure that your pages are sized to your publisher s values locking off your canvases so they cannot be accidentally resized and will print as expected This feature is call
138. according to project type Click on one of the options to see the available sizes By Ceri fe acters ro ERT r If you wish to create a custom size project not available on these lists click the large CUSTOM option You will be able to Shinai choose your canvas dimensions from the Create screen when the page opens providing it is within your license limits CiN Lt bpacmiiy The Manufacturers tab will display a list of canvas sizes submitted to LumaPix by the companies themselves If your preferred album company is not on this list you can ask your manufacturer to submit their page sizes to us Please note we can ONLY add manufacturers to our list at their specific request by an authorized representative of the company Users can select and add custom presets to FotoFusion Choose the large CUSTOM button to start this process The Canvas Settings editor will automatically launch Learn more how the canvas size works in the user s manual section on Sizing amp Resizing the Canvas You can also resize your project at any time during the creation process Learn more in the user s manual section on Sizing amp Resizing the Canvas What to do next After making your canvas size selection an empty canvas will be generated on the Create tab If you have chosen a new custom size you will be able to enter your dimensions in to the Canvas Settings window at this point If you have chosen a preset size then a blank canvas will ap
139. age select the retire g OP frame r me i Press the left mouse button on a yellow crop handle inside the frame Drag your mouse the image will resize q 9P be cropped interactively frare When you are done release the left mouse button gt eee To learn about frame resizing click here See below to learn how to use the gridlines on the frame and the rule of thirds to help you better position your image Fine control Mouse down and drag a crop handle with holding the Ctrl key will increase the precision with which you can crop the image If the crop handles do not appear Frames can be placed into Image and Scrap Element modes Elements cannot be cropped and thus do not display crop handles This is so that embellishment type graphics do not get cropped inside the frame Panning TO pan an image meaning to move the image within the frame move the cursor over the pan handle in the center of the image Press and hold the left mouse button then drag the mouse around until the picture is positioned as you like it When you are satisfied with the new position for the image release the left mouse button You can press the esc key to abort the drag if necessary 2009 The Create Tab 113 Note you cannot move the image more than its maximum width or height Learn more about aspect ratio for more details From Wikipedia The rule of thirds is a compositional rule of
140. age you can distribute the images to get exactly the effect you are trying to achieve by using the Auto Tools or by manually arranging the images Moving and Resizing Frames When you select an image frame or text frame in FotoFusion a set of handles appear inside and outside the frame A selected frame will have a red When a frame is selected you can mouse down on any non handled part of the frame and drag the entire frame to any location on or outside the canvas area Mouse down on the handles to interactively control various aspects of the frame e Blue exterior handles control the outer appearance of the frame e Yellow interior handles control the image position and size within the frame Grid lines will appear on your image when you select it and resize it These non adjustable lines divide your frame into thirds to assist you with image placement within the frame Click here to read why we ve included this feature Resize Handles Dragging a resize handle resizes the outside shape of the frame 2009 48 YearbookFusion User s Manual a RESIZE I Identical images resized Image by Kent Smith mportant Notes If you only see the side handles and not the corner resize handles then the frame has been locked to a particular aspect ratio meaning the width to length ratio cannot be changed You can turn this feature on and off by pressing the A key on your keyboard which will lock the aspec
141. age project You can save your templates to any location on your computer However there is a default folder available C My Documents My Collages My Templates Once you have opened the template by clicking on the preview image you can then add your own images either by dropping them one at a time or using the AutoPopulate feature Deleting and Renaming Templates You can delete templates PERMANENTLY searching for them in the Organizer Click on the Source tab to choose the subdirectory where your templates are located or click on the Search tab and change the any type drop box to Saved Work Templates 2009 The Basics 69 5 1 Right mouse select the template thumbnail you wish to eliminate and then send it to the windows recycle bin Using a Template with AutoDuplicate Extreme only Extreme users can create a single template and set it to AutoDuplicate to create a multi page project spanning a series of images This is particularly useful for creating contact sheets Click here to learn more Auto Tools FotoFusion can create layouts for you with a few simple clicks AutoCollage quickly generates a random layout from your selected images to fill an entire page AutoPopulate assigns your selected images into any empty frames on the canvas AutoDistribute creates an even grid like arrangement from the images on your canvas AutoDuplicate Extreme users can automatically generate multiple pa
142. age to reveal the canvas behind Matte this frame Gradient An effect added to gradually fade the image from a center point Enhanced amp Extreme only A dotScrap element which allows you to resize the shape and Smart Frame width of a decorative border and hold an image Available only by download from within FotoFusion A repeating graphic that fills the frame only visible if the image ae Opacity is lowered A background color for the image only visible if the image Color Opacity is lowered Adding Images to the Canvas After starting a new project you will need to bring your images onto the canvas You can add images into a collage several ways images e from the hover to quickly select and drop photos directly on the canvas e from the Browse for Images s Toolbar icon within the Organizer via the Buckets hover the most precise way to organize your images and bring them to your canvas e dragging them directly from Windows Explorer e from the File menu s Add Images option the web from Windows Internet Explorer Enhanced and Extreme versions only An image can be also be assigned to the background frame by dropping your image onto the grey area around the canvas If the image is already in a normal frame on the canvas right mouse select it and Set as Canvas Background or pick it up by the frame number and drop it outside the canvas The image or texture will snap to fill the entire frame T
143. agement 229 11 1 1 Keep in mind that you cannot reopen a rendered project in FotoFusion If you have exported your work ie it is now a jpg tif or other format other than scrap or collage without saving it as a scrap file you will not be able to reopen it to edit it as the project has been fused into one single image Deleting To delete Version 4 projects it Organize Click on the button then open the SEARCH TAB ara E ga yew dh Source Mv Database te Type Patir i Pubbitwer Ewerytherny ua chew Search Wa Organize Click on the hiom tab then on the Search tab e For projects and pages change TYPE to Saved Work and select Projects or Pages For templates change SOURCE to My Database and then change TYPE to Templates e Right mouse down on the Version 4 project you would like to delete and select SEND TO RECYCLE BIN This will place your projects into the Windows Recycle Bin If you made a mistake and need to restore them you can do so from the Windows Recycling bin itself To delete Version 3 projects which have been imported from previous installations open Windows Explorer and navigate to the file folder where the collage file resides most likely in C My Documents My Collages or C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion Templates Delete the files from this location Understanding basic Windows file management If you are using FotoFusion you will have Wind
144. ages Render all pages in the album to a file at a low resolution then open a new FotoFusion project 8 1 2 x 11 for example Create a contact sheet style template page and use AutoDuplicate to quickly layout the entire album onto a few sheets Advantage easy to email secure and unprintable in any useful manner OR upload to your web gallery click on Publish to send your pages with or without attached images and change the theme to the Album Preview theme OR send the client a multi page email Click on EMAIL to send your pages with or without attached images Add a watermark and change the image quality to assure your work is protected You can also use the Album Preview theme Overlay Image Info Use this feature to add file name frame number page number references and other information about the images used in your project Not only will the information provide good communication with your client giving you a common reference point to speak about the images but also serves to watermark the project Watermarks amp Banners Identify and protect your work at output email web rendering with these checkbox items Group Composites FotoFusion makes creating a composite image for school yearbooks or group portraits a Simple process Note YearbookFusion users will have a special set of automated tools to generate panel 2009 Pro Project Tutorials 259 pages composites using their PSPA cd Here are
145. ail to select a page to 2009 180 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 5 1 append to your current project Cloning Duplicating pages ges To produce a duplicate of the current page including images click the Clone pa button LE This is useful for producing alternative versions of a particular layout 0 ux You can also use the shortcut keys Ctrl Alt Shift to duplicate AND flip your currently selected layout Removing pages Pages Click the delete page button to remove the currently selected page page Reordering pages Pages To move the currently selected page up or down in the current list of pages click the page up and page down buttons J i x Alternatively use the Page Up and Page Down keys on your keyboard Or right mouse select your page of choice to MOVE PAGE TO eg select page 8 and move it to page 2 Renaming pages In the Pages hover right mouse down on any page thumbnail to select rename This is useful if you wish to apply a text tag containing the page name eg add a text frame to your page and select the page name tag from the list It is also useful to search for individual pages in the Organizer Search gt gt Type gt gt Saved Work gt gt Pages Saving pages as a Template If you particularly like a page within a multi page project right mouse select the page s thumbnail and Save As Template The template will by default saved to C My
146. an Extreme user will see all options This guarantees that you will not be able to select a canvas size that you will not be able to output or that will be rejected by your album manufacturer The GENERIC tab display commonly used page sizes categorized under the type of output Album Digital Sheet or Specialty The MANUFACTURERS tab will display available sizes for album or printing companies who have provided information on their product lists to LumaPix If you need a custom size that is not available select the CUSTOM button which will open the Canvas Settings editor You can also create your own Form Factor which can be accessed from the User Preset tab which will appear next to the Manufacturer s tab A new blank page will open with your chosen page size You can change the page size guidelines and page type at any time during the creation process 2009 84 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 1 1 2 Resizing your current page or project Resizing your current project Page size and guidelines can be changed at any time providing that the page size has not been locked e g yearbook form factor Extreme and Yearbook users can change the sizes of multipage projects in one step To make changes to your page size and other related settings right mouse select on the grey area outside of the canvas A list of options will appear Choose Canvas Settings to change the page you are currently working o
147. an change the image s opacity by selecting the image frame opening the image editor and reducing the image s opacity Watermarking at Export Watermarking is supported during publishing exporting and sharing Click here for more details Multi page Project Management Extreme Yearbook only FotoFusion Extreme allows you to compose print email and render multi page projects Your work flow becomes considerably simpler when producing multipage album projects as it eliminates the need to load and save individual pages for each page in the album Multi page layouts allow you to achieve excellent narrative flow minimize your computer s memory use and easily edit your projects e FotoFusion Extreme is bundled with six multipage wedding album templates with additional albums available for purchase in the Marketplace You can use multipage templates and resize and edit them to your tastes with your Extreme license e YearbookFusion users can have access to a gallery of layouts to start their yearbook projects available in the Quick Start list Please note ONLY YearbookFusion users have access to these templates New multi page project can be made e from scratch 2009 178 YearbookFusion User s Manual e by using the AutoCollage Wizard e using the AutoDuplicate feature e or by loading a multi page template To navigate through a multi page project use the PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN keys on your keyb
148. andomly rotates the frames in the canvas to produce a jumbled look with no effort nga Click AutoJumble You could accomplish the same effect manually by selecting and rotating each frame in turn AutoJumble does the same thing much more quickly Hover over the AutoJumble button to access a jitter control where you can select how angled the images will appear 2009 74 YearbookFusion User s Manual 5 2 Ausiodurniblea ASSIA Random miii he og me Gumeni cole a AutoPopulate The AutoPopulate option on the Toolbar fills all empty frames in a collage with images that are currently in the dropper or selected in the Images hover This is a fast way to fill a template with images such as a contact sheet or a seniors portrait Load a template or create a page with empty frames Select the images you want to apply to the image Either 7 i ae e Click on the _ button find the image you are looking for and multiple select them Click on the first image Ctrl click to add more images to your selection one by one Ctrl Shift Click to select a series from first to last image Click on the AutoPopulate icon BE in the Images hover OR drag your selection onto the canvas so they appear in the dropper e or use the ORGANIZER to add images into a Bucket Select and drag the images onto your canvas so they appear in the dropper then click on BE on the toolbar over the canvas
149. ap ID 17 248 dotScrap items 102 dotScrap Marketplace 241 dotscrap templates 66 Double spread 89 Double click 272 Double page spreads 89 Download 9 Download and Append 102 Download and Apply 102 Download and Open 102 Download Store Content 102 downloadable graphics 102 downloadable templates 66 downloading dotScrap 248 Downloading dotScrap for offline use 248 downloading graphics 248 downloading templates 66 DPI 43 272 DPI and resolution 207 Drag 272 draw frame numbers email 194 draw frame numbers export 207 Drawing a frame 53 drm error 237 Dropper 43 53 dropping 53 Dropping images 43 53 dropping images into a bucket from the Images hover 188 dropping images into a bucket from the Organizer 188 dropping multiple copies 43 Dropping multiple copies of the same image 53 duotone 141 Duplicates 306 Duplicating a frame 106 E edge 305 edge blur 136 editall 58 edit all elements 59 editing an image 41 editing images 262 editing in photoshop 262 Editing Options 78 editing parameters interactively 58 editing photos 262 Editing Text 164 Editing the Border 127 editing the defaults 62 editing within a group 123 2009 Index 345 editor 59 editor settings 62 editors 38 58 59 element 248 element image 58 Elements vs Images 47 Email 194 Emailthemes 201 emailing 194 embellishments 241 EMF 134 empty buckets 188 Empty frame 106 Empty frame used as line 150 Enhan
150. ap around the inside of the book Form factors Form factors introduced in Version 4 5 allow canvas settings to be applied to an entire project according to presets Form factors can be defined by an album manufacturer or you can also create your own custom page sizes and types If you create a project using a predefined form factor all pages of the album will conform to that form factor s preset sizes and guidelines For multipage projects Extreme amp YearbookFusion users different page types within a Single project will be assigned the appropriate dimensions Album sides single pages two page spreads and cover pages will auto size to match the manufacturer s default dimension and guidelines for each page type Form factors guarantee that your album project will meet the album company s specifications every time New pages and appended pages or projects will conform immediately to the project s selected form factor within a multipage project and you will not be able to insert new pages that are outside of the form factor s presets or accidentally resize pages For instance Extreme users can open a wedding album template from the Marketplace then specify which manufacturer they will be using to produce the album The entire album album sides double pages will immediately conform to the manufacturer s specifications There is no need to define each page separately Users can resize projects to a new form factor for instance
151. apping correctly on left right album sides 16849 e Dropper order now respected when images added to canvas 17434 e Snapping to grid line now works with all units of measure 16493 e Smart frame dropped on top of regular frame now consistently displays as expected 16528 17227 e Z order of selected frames now preserved after grouping 16575 e Mattes now auto detect alpha rgb settings 17040 17056 e Cover sheet now draws gutter line even when spine width zero 17114 e Mattes now correctly applied to existing frames when dropped on them instead of creating new frame 17387 e Background canvas frame now cannot be split 13444 e Mattes can now be applied to canvas correctly 17010 2009 Reference 279 e Jpg file can now be dropped as canvas background if png graphic already on same layer 17370 Output e Several PSD export issues resolved 14861 14915 16413 16971 17058 17866 18058 e Occasional mismatch between render size reported on output tab and actual file now resolved 17705 e Tag with sRGB now works as expected 18501 e Several issues with Page numbering at render time now resolved 17311 16884 e Artifacts in PNG files at higher resolution renders have now been removed 17366 e Render options no longer default to rendering overhang 17657 18002 e Output to the web now creates appropriate thumbnails info extensions etc 18560 18561 18563 18147 18148 18149 e Output to a
152. arbookFusion User s Manual 6 1 3 controls directly below the swatches To have a color and a background tile active at the same time reduce the opacity of the color to see the tile This will allow you to retint the background tile to better match your composition Canvas Matte and Border You can add the same effects to the background as you would any other frame Click on or outside the canvas and open the Frame Editor Add a border of any color size or width or apply a matte Using an Image as the Canvas Background To set an image as the background on the canvas e right click on any image on the canvas and choose Set as canvas background from the pop up menu or e select an image from the Images hover or the Buckets hover and drop it in the grey area around the canvas This will move the selected image to the canvas layer and resize it to completely cover the canvas If you would like to use a decorative textured background use the Papers Search hover to locate different options from the dotScrap Marketplace Positioning the Canvas Image Occasionally when you set an image as the canvas background you will not like how it is positioned This may be due to the aspect ratio of your image which does not match the aspect ratio of your canvas meaning that there is a different ratio between the length and the height of the image and the canvas For instance if you place an image with a portrait aspect ratio
153. are included with your license and other info The Bundled content associated with your license will display by default Note This list will grow over time and is only accessible when FotoFusion is launched with an active internet connection The content displayed is located on the LumaPix server Clicking on any thumbnail will launch the item onto your canvas 2009 32 YearbookFusion User s Manual Y A im aki es cian li Mags Legg ed age a Pees jj PH o r a lo I i oe 8 O B SG Gear a ip en eres oof eee ees A ya Rete B D p oe io bm a e e Ep a aas H Ee SS ea r 2 a a ae oe SS y E EF bye jn e j i SS Users who have installed FotoFusion from the live web build will see a bundled content window as show above Users who have installed FotoFusion from a printable album bundle will see the additional tab options with content originating from several sources Click on each tab to see the additional content that is available to you These items will also display under the free tabs of the search hovers on the Create screen Cin on ii content ws fhe ie A at E haini Baia EPE Pee Fe Eo TF piia fi banaa 1 JLA mahian i71 jj p J N Add i ET elig TTY si x Tre Eb a Trade Also accessible under the Bundled Content list is a Featured tab to show items that may be of interest to you that are included with your license type and a Run As tab to allow you to try out Foto
154. are not hovered over it The icon indicates that the hover will remain opened on your canvas A pinned hover does not affect the position of your canvas and can overlap onto the canvas workspace Atamnatkia here Dock raframa caeai A docked hover will reposition the canvas alongside the open hover Puptonmeatic aty Cipt Pan varlay Caria it Dari reira a You can dock hovers around the edges of the workspace be cautioned that the more docked hovers you add the smaller the canvas will appear Switch the hover back to automatically close to return it to a single button or click E to close To remove the hover entirely from the canvas return to its dock and click on the sign in the dock to uncheck it from the list of available hovers Resizing and moving hovers You can resize the viewing area of the hover by placing your cursor over the edge of any hover Mouse down on the edge to resize the hover making it wider or narrower longer or shorter 2009 40 YearbookFusion User s Manual Resizing thumbnails within a hover Hovers display graphic content in thumbnail view The Images amp Buckets hover will show your images the Search Papers and Frames hover will show dotScrap graphics the Pages hover Extreme only will show previews of your multi page projects The thumbnails within the hover can be made larger or smaller Click on the interior portion of an opened hover hold Ctrl on you
155. arning you that it cannot link the canvas thumbnail versions of your images back to the original image files If this has occurred you will also receive an error message when attempting to output your files that tells you that FotoFusion cannot find your original images In order to create high quality output FotoFusion needs to gather additional information from your original images The link between the thumbnail version of your image on your canvas and the original image must be maintained in order for the output to be rendered The link between the thumbnail version of the image and the original file can be severed in several ways most of which can be restored e If your original images have been moved from their original directory click on TOOLS gt gt Locate Missing Images and point FotoFusion back to the files in their new location e If your original images reside on an external memory device eg cd thumb drive external hard drive that has been removed from your system reattach the device and click on F5 on your keyboard If this doesn t work shut FotoFusion down and relaunch the software then your project e If your original images reside on a non networked drive that has been reassigned a new drive letter eg Windows assigned it to G on one session and reassigned it as F on the subsequent session click on TOOLS gt gt Locate Missing Images and point FotoFusion back to the files in the newly assigned drive FotoFus
156. artists other material is offered by major scrapbooking and album manufacturers or top level graphic or photographic Studios The collection is an ever growing on demand resource for graphic embellishments and templates all located on the LumaPix server What can you do with dotScrap You can add decorative elements to your pages such as textured backgrounds embellishments tags and frames around your images You can use pre assembled kits of coordinating thematic graphic elements to create original compositions You can use pre made editable templates elements can be moved removed or use ready made pages items are static with your own images and text You can use paper digital layout guides to complete a paper album or craft kit with your own printable images Users who purchase paper albums bundled with a Lite version of FotoFusion will be able to print perfect fit pre made templates at no cost You will find digital accessories such as templates for pro and hobby applications including full wedding albums contact sheets z cards seniors portraits and novelty projects like magazine covers resizable decorative frames to hold your digital images You can frame your image crop rotate pan etc and add creative embellishments to it b amp w sepia fix brightness and contrast tint add text etc and then print it at any size you want decorative multi layered tags envelopes pins hardware or and other reali
157. ashes e One pixel highlight can be turned on or off in Frame editor 983 1063 e Use Canvas as Frame Background in Image hover converts empty frame into mirror of whatever content is under it with adjustable properties eg add velum overlay or inset content 21176 e Overlay image info specifies Show on Canvas versus Overlay Image Info on output 20076 Text e Text box in text editor supports line breaks 19722 e Size of text box larger in text editor 16924 Multipage Projects e Layouts can be flipped and rotated in the Pages hover Yearbook Extreme only 1688 19818 19619 19532 19815 19920 e Page hover displays album sides as abutting e Page numbering position set by safe bleed guidelines 20675 e Holding Ctrl while using mouse wheel moves to next or previous page 5634 e New shortcuts in page hover ctrl sh n go to page ctrl insert add page ctrl sh duplicate ctrl alt sh duplicate amp flip 19814 14931 e Holding Ctrl while using mouse wheel moves to next or previous page 5634 Output 2009 What s New in Version 4 6 19 e Vector text enabled when rendering to PDF 16301 13247 18602 e Cover split preferences added between spine front between spine back 19955 e Page name set in Pages hover can be used as file name on output 17385 Data Management e Organizer user interface updated 20170 20181 File Management e Multiple images can be open
158. ated Safe and bleed zones will be applied to both segments of the page To process the entire collage out into separate flattened images choose Entire Canvas in the combo box in the options area If you have specified Printer Page Segments in the project you can render your files to follow the predefined segments All of the pages in your composition will be exported with the page number appended to the project name 3 All Pages versus Selected Page FotoFusion Extreme licenses supports multi page rendering Select All Pages to render your entire album at the same time into the same directory Multi page projects will be named with the same file name sequentially eg Sanchez Wedding 001 jpg Sanchez Wedding 002 jpg To render one page from a multi page project choose Selected Page If you have also chosen to render Double Page Separate or Respect Page Segments you will notice that the Preview and Render Buttons will prompt you to choose which part of the project you would like to render Click on the thumbnail of the section you would like to export If you have chosen Respect Page Segments you must use the Selected Page option 4 Cover options FotoFusion Extreme and YearbookFusion licenses support the use of cover pages as a 2009 The Output Tab 211 9 1 1 page type When rendering you can choose to leave the cover as one file or to split it on either side of the spine front spine back or front
159. ately to match the resizing 2009 The Marketplace 247 Multi layered elements Layered elements will contain several parts some of which are editable and some which are not The envelope below illustrates this type of element An image can be dropped into the empty frame and repositioned within the envelope t he text on the front of the envelope will be editable but not moved and the entire envelope can be resized but not dismantled into its components 12 3 Whatisa Kit A kit is a preselected arrangement of graphic elements bundled into a unique downloadable format in FotoFusion Kits can be accessed from the Start Zone via the Marketplace icon Browse the Scrapbooking category to view the available collections Click PREVIEW to launch the kit on the Create screen Kits can also be found by clicking on the c button in the Create screen Type ina keyword eg green wedding masculine flower and set the Type to KIT Double click on the thumbnail to launch the kit in the Create screen When Kits are launched in the Create Screen then will appear as in a Kit Preview format a The icon will be replaced with a miniature kit icon such as this Click on this button to reveal the kit s contents 2009 248 YearbookFusion User s Manual 12 4 ates The Kit Preview consists of several small pages of thumbnail images of the kit materials Click on the page up d
160. atically Current editor settings are over ridden and replaced with the current selection If the editor values change when this option is selected then the new settings will be used as the default RESTORING DEFAULTS e Restore to factory settings Restores the editor to the out of the box settings for the current project and all subsequent projects e Restore all frames on this page to factory settings Only applies the out of the box settings to the current page e Restore all Frames on all pages to factory settings Only applies the out of the box settings to the entire project APPLY CURRENT SETTINGS e Copy settings to all frames on this page Applies the current editor settings to all like items on the current page only If you are working in the Shadow editor for text only this will only apply to text shadows not image shadows Performs the same function as the button on the editor e Copy settings to all frames on all pages Applies the current editor settings to all like items in the project Again if you are working in the Shadow editor for text only this will only apply to text shadows not image shadows Performs the same function as holding Ctrl on your keyboard then selecting the button on the editor 2009 64 YearbookFusion User s Manual 4 6 4 6 1 New Projects When FotoFusion is launched you will see the Start Zone There are four options for starting a new project from
161. available in large clickable list Other Improvements e User defined canvas size presets e Control click on color chip sets it to black white e Single page layouts cameos excluded from page numbering e Snap image upright added to right mouse list e Exif tag list sorted by name with frequently used at top e Frame number not drawn over empty frames FIXED BUGS e Selection handles on multi selected images function properly again e Mac installations using Parallels work again e Reconnecting lost images finds all duplicates within a project e Ctrl S with hover open will save project as expected e Compositing error on ripped smart frames fixed e Crash when rendering at very high res PSD output fixed e Cached images located on photo database will reconnect after database is moved e Uninstalled fonts can be dragged from bucket to text frame e Thumbnails in buckets drawn correctly e DotScrap memory usage reduced e Tiles dropped onto images appear in image editor tile control e multi page email index renders correctly without needing to visit all pages first e User watermarks not drawn on Email published index thumbnails e Page Segments not lost after cancelling render Released February 23 2008 Version 4 2 build 45888 FEATURES Gradients e Gradients are now supported as a matte type Enhanced Extreme Updated UI e Search hovers now categorize store items into premium free purchased mine e Metric measuremen
162. ay removed from Group display e Existing frames cannot be nudged accidentally while dropping new images e Last dropped added frame is selected automatically Text e Third party font managers now supported e Right to left text Hebrew Arabic etc now supported e New do not exceed text bounding option prevents text from clipping e Font licensing info displays font name e Canvas text can convert to matte Enhanced Extreme only Identification e Page Numbering now supported Extreme only e Pages can be renamed in page hover Extreme only e Page Name option added to text tags list e Overlay Image Info added to Printing options e Opacity added to Watermark output options e Automatic cleanup of frame numbers enabled FIXED BUGS Project Management e Tree view properly reflects all canvas elements including grouped items e Tree options cleaned up e New keywords recognized by organizer immediately e Sort by date works in Organizer works for Marketplace content e Autocollage wizard will not include avi files e Multiple bucket renaming in Organizer correctly reflected in Create screen bucket hover Data Management 2009 284 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Saving template over itself as new project now works as expected e Memory fragmentation issue resolved Editing e Accidental tiny frame creation prevented e Tinted png mattes behave as expected e V3 mattes supported correctly e Removing canvas
163. build 49690 FEATURES e License specific Welcome Page e Batch printing of multi page albums e Page thumbnails added to print dialog e Improved print preview performance e Many improvements to general stability FIXED BUGS e Fixed crash entering a space in search field e Fixed out of memory error when rendering large project Released July 2 2008 2009 Reference 283 Version 4 3 build 48400 FEATURES e Email application migrated to new Share tab e Email address list can now be edited e Email address list stored in text file in C My Documents My Collages e Image overlay text is now DPI independent FIXED BUGS e Cancelling high resolution download no longer results in blurry output e Resolved crash when inserting v3 projects through page hover Released May 9 2008 Version 4 3 build 48137 FEATURES Data Management e Archive for public use now available e Most Recently Used Files displayed under File menu option e Multi selected pages in Organizer can now be appended to current project Extreme only e Locate Missing Images now includes mattes e Immediate indication if project is trial or contains unpurchased marketplace items e Number of results shown in search hovers Image Frames e Frame position rotation and size can be locked e Lock aspect ratio is now selection specific not global to all frames e Moving frames within a group does not break grouping e Blue overl
164. ced Edition 12 Enhanced limitations 251 erasing the background 157 Essentials limitations 251 excluding images from the panel set 314 Excluding images from the set 305 exif 167 236 Exit FotoFusion 32 export 206 export friendly 216 External Editor 262 External viewer 207 extracting 15 7 Extreme Edition 12 F F5 96 fade 136 fading 136 Featured content 25 26 Featured tab 64 FILE gt gt New 64 File management 229 fle name 167 filename 167 files 238 Fill 93 Final render 207 find missing images 51 finding decorations 102 finding graphics 102 finding templates 66 102 Fine control 107 Fit Image 126 Fixing a panel 318 Fixing your Images 141 flare 150 Flat file 207 flattened file 206 Flip layouts 182 flip pages 77 182 Flipping 115 Flipping layouts 182 flipping pages 77 182 Floating editors 59 flush 120 flush bottom 120 flush left 120 flush right 120 flush top 120 folders 238 Font 169 172 Font size 169 form factors 79 82 84 forum 224 FotoFusion Lite 6 14 FotoFusion Extreme 69 FotoScraps 3 224 225 FotoScraps forum 3 FotoScraps gallery 3 Frame 41 272 Frame angle 115 139 Frame editor 107 126 129 Frame inset 129 frame number 167 Frame Numbers 51 frame numbers email 194 frame numbers export 207 frame order 120 Frame Position 139 frame stack 120 Frame Status 51 Frame text 164 Frame Tools 105 Frame Type 47 frame width and height 139 frameX amp Y 139 f
165. ch as Adobe Photoshop for editing the updated files appear automatically in the collage when done Version 2 1 Version 2 1 was a maintenance version mostly consisting of bug fixes but with the following visible enhancements e Sharpen on export o A pro trick to bring out crisp detail in your images e Handles always on top o Easy access to manipulation controls no matter how complex your collage is e Improved Shadows o FotoFusion s shadows look even better e Support for SMTP Servers requiring authentication o FotoFusion can now communicate with mail servers using higher levels of security Version 2 0 Version 2 0 was another huge step forwards from version 1 1 e One click AutoCollage o Produce amazing results effortlessly e Drop Shadows and Frame borders o Set the thickness color and transparency for borders e Interactive Color Correction o Fix gamma brightness and contrast problems smoothly and intuitively e Final Resolution Preview o Preview of the final results at full resolution at any time e Fast Photo Swapping o Switch pairs of images fast e Improved Printing o Margins can be set directly 2009 298 YearbookFusion User s Manual 17 18 e Completely Revamped UI o Gorgeous new look e Previewing tool o Zoom in on pictures in the image palette image organizer AutoCollage wizard and the collage itself e Pixel dimension collages supported o Web Designers can work natively at the final resolut
166. ck here to view The Extreme Edition is ideal for professional photographers and studios who specialize in albums and large format output All features are unlocked The multi page composition features are enabled and there is no resolution or size limits for rendering and printing other than your computer s memory limits Extreme edition users are able to render to a layered psd format and to a multi page pdf format use printer page segments and apply their own color profiles to output The growing list of free graphic content available to Essentials users is available on the LumaPix website click here to view You can try out FotoFusion s higher license level features at any time regardless if you are using a trial version Scrapbook Essentials or Enhanced Click on HELP on the menu bar and select RUN AS Select the version you wish to try out and all the features of that level will be available to be selected However if you attempt to produce output printing exporting etc using features higher than your current license level including the trial your output will be 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 13 2 3 1 2 watermarked A complete feature list is available on www LumaPix com check out the Compare chart and the product pages for each license type Note to existing Version 3 users V3 edition equivalencies are as follows Standard Scrapbook Essentials Pro Enhanced Studio Extreme Edit
167. create a new collage Contains graphics and htm files that serve as templates for Themes collages exported to the Web or Email stored in subfolders under Web and Email respectively Contains the set of default background tiles that ship with FotoFusion Tues You can add your own tiling images in this folder and then set them as background tiles the next time you run FotoFusion Contains PNG format watermark images to overlay over emailed Watermarks and published collages 2009 The Marketplace 239 12 The Marketplace What is dotScrap dotScrap is a revolutionary new technology which allows FotoFusion users to find and download graphic content safely These graphics include high quality embellishments templates kits project guides and pre made pages designed for both hobbyists and pro photographers These materials are instantly accessible with a high speed Internet condition available by searching in the Marketplace or through the Search editor by keyword or type iy ii e A collection of materials is included with your license as listed in the Bundled Content section of the Start Zone other material is available for purchase 2009 240 YearbookFusion User s Manual What is the dotScrap Marketplace The Marketplace is where you can find dotScrap graphics preview them and launch them into FotoFusion Some content is created by LumaPix skilled graphic
168. cted frame Add a text frame to the canvas or to selected image on selected frame pan image Bring the selected frame up one in the stack of frames Bring the selected frame to the front Send the selected frame one back in the stack of frames 269 2009 270 YearbookFusion User s Manual Send the selected frame to the back Zoom the canvas Hold the Z key down and drag the mouse while pressing the left mouse button T Select the first frame Ctrl Reset the rotation of the selected PageUp frame to be completely vertical Select the last frame Add a new blank page A Make a clone of a page ab Snit celect the Previous frame Tab Spin rotate the selected frame left Spin rotate the selected frame right plus frame rotation handle 45 degree rotation increments Space plus left mouse down move Bar canvas view Shift Select the next frame 2009 Reference plus frame rotation handle slower rotation plus arrow keys on selected frame frame moves smaller plus frame resize handles finer control plus left mouse click in dropper more options plus Ctrl plus frame resizing handles override snapping Ctrl plus frame rotation handle rotate image in frame plus left mouse click in dropper drop copy plus toolbox border control change frame inset plus arrow keys on selected frame larger move
169. d editor to stay affixed to hum Grid the canvas until it is unpinned i Shori Page Segments Pan Zoom Zoom In Out Zoom Reheth Photos PS to Selection Reset Zoom and Center View all affect the current Canvas view First page Previous Page and Next page are enabled when working with a Multipage project Show Grid will add grid lines to your canvas to help positioning your frames Show Page Segment will display 2009 The Basics 35 existing page segments that have been added to your canvas Refresh Photos will force FotoFusion to redraw the current page reflecting any changes made to the images made in an external editor INSERT allows you to quickly add pE items to your project Prati Chri ae Craw few Frans FeHOrag Manse Add a new page Add Text to Frame Chrl Shwts7 Add a new frame Draw a new frame to a particular size Add text to a frame Enhanced Extreme YearbookFusion only Add text to canvas Add a Printing Segment Add a Reference Region ndd Text bo canyes Chrl fut T Anning Seger Li Sta Raae RApons SELECTION Actions pertaining to the selection of items on your canvas Galart AH Objects af Type r and the order they are stacked on the canvas heen Tab Previous Shiti Tab Select All will select all items on First bears your canvas La Eru Select All Objects of Type will allow you to pick all image manava Delte frames all text frames etc Maili aes Chh Next
170. ded images onto the Image tab they will be checkmarked in the Image hover Msticnttuilts If you use the same image more g t Vinai than once within the project the yo al Tharina al Be PE number of usages will also be R indicated i In this example three images have been used one of which has been dropped on the Canvas twice times Right mouse down on the image thumbnails to display additional options Rotate Left Rotate Rigit Taeke TE ict ig Go to Page where maga it wed Apply bo seisad Pramas Sete bo wires Reichs Bim e Preview Images launches an Image previewer within FotoFusion displaying the image location and other options e Rotate left right corrects the alignment of images e Go to Page is available for multi page projects Extreme only Your page view will change to display the page on which the image is used e Apply to selected frames will drop images selected in the hover to frames selected on the canvas This is particularly useful if you are using a template to set up a sheet with multiple versions of the same image eg wallet size 2009 46 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Send to Windows Recycling Bin deletes your images from their source location Note to Extreme Users Images can also be dragged from the Images Hover directly onto thumbnails in the Pages Hover If your page is empty your images will AutoCollage onto
171. demand changes to your work with minimal effort Other routine jobs such as creating contact sheets or sending proofs to clients can be 2009 Pro Project Tutorials 251 13 1 facilitated through the use of FotoFusion Group layouts such as class composites can be done with ease In general FotoFusion provides a unique set of tools to help you work more efficiently on your pro projects Album Presets Find page size presets including covers double page spreads and single pages for leading album manufactures in the Canvas Settings editor Two quick clicks and your page is ready for composition complete with bleed and safe zones specified to the manufacturer s recommendations If your album company isn t listed feel free to refer them to the LumaPix website http www lumapix com corporate corp_albumcompanies_ submitspecs shtml where they can fill out a form to submit their product specs Composition tools From the Canvas Settings editor set bleed and safe zones to ensure a perfect print every time FotoFusion helps you with your page orientation by allowing you to select from among several page type album singe single sheet double spreads options Use the splitter tool to easy create grids and mosaics Page numbering Use Text tags to create smart page numbering Extreme version only Add a text frame to the canvas and select the PAGE NUMBER tag from the text editor The page number will app
172. dered as doubles separate meaning a separate side will be generated for each side of the page Two page spreads will apply bleed and safe zones to each side of the page and have separate page numbering for each side of the page Coming soon center guideline orientation options to create a layout where the gutter opens from top to bottom Canvas background options The canvas background is a large frame which fills the canvas It can be filled with e a solid color 2009 94 YearbookFusion User s Manual e a texture e an image or e nothing completely transparent You can select more than one of these options simultaneously and blend these effects by resetting transparency of each level For instance you can drop a paper onto the canvas then use the Image editor to change the tint opacity or other properties of the background If you would like to use a background paper or an image on the background drop it outside of the canvas area Your selected image or texture will drop into the canvas frame You can make further changed to it at this point If you would like a solid color then simply change the canvas properties with the Image editor To edit your canvas click ona ee blank area Rinses E EF of the Opacity 1 Angle Canvas or Brigit Conia the area Ganra 4 Blur outside the O Sepia Canvas 4 0 Ust canvis s frame F Bakrni This will my Ciau T
173. dge of the canvas You can also Render Canvas Bleed if one is specified Enhanced Extreme only or to display every part of every image on the Create screen canvas select Render Canvas Bleed Overhang Crop marks will be rendered on top of your collage if you enable show crop mark Crop marks will only display if you have set your canvas up with a bleedzone If you are emailing a proof to a customer turn on the Overlay Image Info option Learn more how to set which Exif tags you wish to display 2009 The Share Tab 199 8 2 Configuring an ISP Optional An ISP is an acronym for Internet Service Provider meaning the company which provides your internet access and often also provides you with an email address as well By default mails send from FotoFusion go through the LumaPix mail server the mails go from FotoFusion to www LumaPix com to the recipient instead of going via your regular email server This is done as a courtesy to our trial and paid customers to ensure that they have as Smooth a demo of FotoFusion as possible the alternative having trial users configure their ISP settings would result in far fewer successful mails sent by trial users as ISP setups can be confusing Once users have upgraded from the trial version to a paid version of FotoFusion they have the option of continuing to go via the LumaPix server or using their own ISP The advantages of using your own ISP are 1 Much
174. duced images It is recommended to leave this option on to ensure the best quality for your images e Watermark Collage Click here to learn more about creating your own custom watermark to protect your images from unauthorized reproduction e Add Banner Click here to learn more about creating your own custom banner to better advertise your work e Overlay Image Info If you are sending a proof to a customer turn on this option 2009 The Output Tab 209 Learn more about how to set the Exif tag options for this feature e Resolution and Quality You can set the resolution or DPI dots per inch of your exported collage to fit your requirements Setting the DPI will adjust the image resolution and setting the image resolution will adjust the DPI since both values are related to the canvas size Scrapbook Essentials and Enhanced users please note the resolution and dpi limits for your respective licenses If you are saving in the JPEG file format the quality slider will allow you to adjust the amount of compression used to save the image More compression produces smaller files at a lower quality less compression produces larger but higher quality images Once you have set these values you can PREVIEW your page This will allow you to examine your work at 100 detail Note you cannot zoom out but you can scroll the page to see it in detail Toggle between ACTUAL SIZE views 100 which can be panned o
175. e etc Other attribute set can be created for specialized use such as church directories or sports team directories For instance a church will not have a teacher or a home room but may include information such as committee participation business contact information and so on If custom attribute sets have been created additional options will be available in the attribute set drop down box To create additional attributes or an entirely new attribute set click on the Manage Custom Fields button to create the new set of attributes Manage Custom Fields Allows you to add attributes or create a new attribute set Attributes are data fields or categories that can be linked to your image files For example you may wish to add Clubs as a data field linked to your images or create an entirely new attribute set e g Church To learn more consult the Manage Custom Fields section of this manual Manage Custom Fiske 2009 310 YearbookFusion User s Manual Finishing the import If the data import appears to be correct then click on IMPORT YearbookFusion may offer a suggestion about your data import at this stage You can continue with the import and choose to ignore the warning or go back and make the Suggested changes Once the import starts you will be prompted to provide a folder location where the images will be imported It is preferable to do so on your local C drive to avoid problems with
176. e Archiving issues with yearbook projects resolved 19062 19069 e Incomplete FTP upload issues resolved 19188 19272 e DPI for projects uploaded to publisher is respected 19275 Released May 20 2009 Version 4 5 build 56280 FEATURES Form Factors e Introduction of Form Factors power tools that ensure that your layouts match specifications from album manufacturers e Revamped Canvas and Project settings editors 17265 17441 e Support for user defined Form Factors supercedes canvas size presets 17156 17984 Output e Completely revamped output file naming schemes provides sensible defaults useful presets and complete user customization e Crop marks drawn as thin black lines over white background for improved visibility 17517 e Improvements to Album themes in Output to the web 17697 17698 UI e Desktop now appears at root of all file trees organizer image hover autocollage etc 3511 16373 e Organizer now immediately reflects changes made to folders and files 3140 11594 17212 17922 e Menu system reformatted for improved usability 16851 17803 18752 17303 e Inline text based search controls added to search hover 18191 e Pages hover contextual menu now includes move to page option 18221 e Page Up Down in multipage project controlled by Ctri mousewheel 17913 e Grid visibility and grid snapping exposed as separate controls 17302 General e Set of available text tags greatly e
177. e Checkmark the directory where your matte resides e Drag and drop the matte individually or as a group into the following Category haw Kits A ke Tenplstes C i Ready Made Page ee Page Layout Guide H l ha Embelicchinints june Parts hoe Fonts le Freres Mattes la Shaa ET lew Saved Work Now FotoFusion knows that this image is a matte and you never need to do tell it again You will be able to find and use your matte either by e opening the Create tab e Clicking on the Search button and looking for mattes set the source as My Database OR e opening the Images button e navigate to the folder where you have stored your matte Drag the matte onto an existing frame to apply it 2009 136 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 2 4 Gradients Enhanced Extreme only What is a Gradient A gradient is a special type of matte which fades your image gradually to transparency Enhanced Extreme and Yearbook users will see six gradient options available in the Frame editor Essentials users can apply non adjustable matte type gradients from the mattes drop down list Trveart SOMES MindPoini f Angie Image by David Ziser You can select the type of gradient you would like to apply to your images then adjust it Softness The edges of the gradient are softened or sharpened Midpoint Increases or decreases the highlight zone of the image Angle 2009 The Create Tab 137
178. e Error on startup should appear infrequently if ever Frame handle hit testing fixed Unresponsive Zoom Slider fixed ctrl was not copying shadow setting correctly pages hover now appears as expected in export tab for multi page project AutoPopulate now sorting correctly on first page Background now renders correctly on large output Learning Guide is working again Alt tab list now shows FF during rendering Menus restructured for clarity Released May 2 2007 Version 4 0 Build 38041 addressed many issues including Mosaic Split is not working properly Undo for mattes doesn t work Matte function corrupt results in error when uninstalling V4 Dupe a frame after matte to border gives a frame with matte Feedback Ctrl changes lost after save reload Canvas texture does not work all the time Opening v4 clobbers v3 email None tile from tile list does nothing Font undo didn t work Released March 5 2007 Version 4 0 Build 38006 2009 290 YearbookFusion User s Manual The main focus of this build was stability many many bugs were fixed e Persist buckets with project save e Edit in Photoshop should work on original image not a copy e Add keyboard commands new frame ins new page Ctrl ins clone of new page Ctrl shift ins e 2xclick on image in organizer should preview it e Number keys should drop photos into buckets while previewing e Selection should follow currently viewed
179. e PRO version included all the following features the standard version includes a subset e Text o Amazing interactive text manipulation o All truetype fonts supported o Control over blur edge amp fill transparency rotation and more o EXIF tags for building contact sheets o Rendered at export time text is razor sharp at poster size e Frame Enhancements o Customizable vector based frame mattes for jagged edges o Sepiatone and black amp white image processing o Interactive per image blur o Within frame image rotation o Support for presets 2009 Reference 297 Canvas Enhancements o Tiled background textures with interactive control over scale amp blur o One click to make an image the canvas background o Support for lockable and semi transparent layers o Bleed and crop lines o Interactive canvas resizing Sharing o User templates for html export CSS styles new buttons frames etc o Customizable banners o Customizable watermarks User Interface o Completely new editing mechanism Direct manipulation of important parameters at top level o Slick new editor based workflow o Editing is interactive real time all the time o Selection by class for fast group selection o Keyboard based nudging Interop o Images on the web such as those in Kodak ProShots galleries can be included directly in FotoFusion collages without an import step o Images can be routed through other applications su
180. e compatibility issues with V4 resolved e multi page Save page as template restored Released November 8 2007 Version 4 0 build 40187 New Features e Text frames can now be converted to mattes e One click overlay frame ID mechanism to layout print email export for proofing added e Grid line canvas option added e Added presets for albums from Hahnemuhle Shared Ink Asukabook e Download smarter with higher priority on visible search results e Transition to Amazon S3 shared storage e Branding and run as button added to main toolbar Fixed Bugs e Canvas units cm inches preference now remembered after save reload e Checkmark indicators are now preserved with project save load e Frame IDs now remain the same after a save quit restart reload cycle enables proofing with frame IDs e Original file name used to attached images when published e Clear Search now clears fields in Keyword Search e Gaps no longer appear in font list e Text no longer becomes italic or bold if you scroll through the list of fonts with the up down arrows e Autocollage sort order now respected when populating from dropper e Crop to trim lines now working as expected e Scraps that appear blurry when rendered now sharp e Re AutoCollage performance dramatically improved e Crash on startup resolved Released June 2 2007 Version 4 0 Build 39809 New Features e User created content can be deleted from the organizer e
181. e flipped left right and top bottom Settings Area o You can now choose to work in floating toolboxes or a new docked Settings Area e Try It First o The various versions of FotoFusion STANDARD PRO and PRINT can now be tested prior to buying e Centralized Help o A single starting point for help now provides a one stop help desk Version 3 2 Version 3 2 added a few minor features e Reconnecting Images o If you move the source images for a composition to a new location on your hard drive you can now reconnect them to the layout e Greyscale Mattes o Greyscale jpeg bmp gif or tif files saved in the Mattes folder can be used as mattes black becomes transparent Of course PNG files with associated alpha transparency channels and EMF files for vector mattes continue to work as always e Filenames in Organizer o Images in the organizer now have a filename for identification Version 3 1 Version 3 1 was a maintenance release which included many small enhancements and fixes including the following 2009 296 YearbookFusion User s Manual e FotoScraps Integration o Layouts can be uploaded directly to the online gallery at www fotoscraps com e Printing o The printing options were completely revamped to be easier to understand o Scaling output to fit onto a single page is now an option e Color Picker o A color picker was the most frequently requested feature addition on the support forum at LumaPix com e Sparse Aut
182. e frame number and drop it outside the canvas The image or texture will snap to fill the entire frame To move the image to the canvas as a normal frame right mouse select an empty space on the background image and select Set as Regular Frame To reset the canvas back to the default right mouse select outside the canvas area and reset the canvas to white This section of the user s manual will teach you how to change the size and appearance of your canvas e Sizing and Resizing the Canvas e Canvas Guides e Canvas Background Options e Adjusting the frame s position with snaps e Refreshing the Canvas e Working with Multi page Extreme Edition only Canvas amp Project Settings The size of the canvas background is shown by the ruler bars on the top and left side of the canvas Your canvas size can be re defined at any time at the time of creation or during the editing process You can choose to make your canvas a predefined size or you can create a custom size of your choice 2009 80 YearbookFusion User s Manual Canvas Size Limitations The canvas size may be limited by four factors 1 Your license type Scrapbook Essentials users can make canvas up to 12x12 and render to a maximum of 2000x2000 pixels Enhanced users can make canvases up to 13x19 and render up to 3900x5700 pixels Extreme users have no official limit other than their computer s own memory limits YearbookFusion
183. e grid fit 322 makingabmp 207 making a jpg 207 Making a panel 318 making a pdf 207 making a png 207 making a psd 207 making a tif 207 making an album 299 making groups 333 Making layers semi transparent 100 making new mattes 134 Making the canvas transparent 93 Making the teacher first 315 Manage 82 84 manage attribute set 316 Manage Custom Fields 306 Manage 262 management 250 Managing 226 managing custom attribute sets 316 managing custom fields 316 2009 348 YearbookFusion User s Manual Managing Form Factors 82 84 managing projects 229 Manufacturer 82 84 Manufacturers tab 64 marketplace 26 66 marking your work 199 Marquee selection 98 mask 136 masks 136 matching the reference frame s height 120 matching the reference frames total dimensions 120 matching the reference frame s width 120 Matte 126 131 150 272 Matte Blur 126 131 Matte Crop 131 Matte Hole 131 Matte Lock 131 matte onaframe 131 Matte on an image 131 Matte selection 126 Matte to Text 174 mattes 41 102 126 134 174 241 max columns 322 max rows 322 memory resources 79 Menu bar 32 Menus 106 Merge 117 Merging frames 117 michaels 14 missing images 51 Missing Output options 339 monitor color 211 monitor management 211 monthly subscription 241 more buckets 188 mousewheel 184 Move frame to bottom 122 Move frame to top 122 moves the image within the frame 47 Moving and Resi
184. e image set and if AutoDuplicate is set create new template pages until no images remain ij EE a e ta pr ii yy 88 1 e Output the contact sheet s as desired Render to pdf or other format publish to web print or email Option 3 Create an email or web contact sheet using the contact sheet theme If you like to quickly email or publish sess aes Ts a contact sheet layout use the EB Ea Ri E Contact sheet theme ae This is useful if you have created an hy ig B album or would like to generate an a iat lag _ instant contact sheet from a set of images through an AutoCollage Consult the email themes section for more details 2009 258 YearbookFusion User s Manual 13 3 13 4 Proofing document Showing customers previews of their orders is always a good policy as it allows their feedback before sending the job to press FotoFusion provides tools to make this process easier and improve communication between you and your clients If you have created an album several versions of one layout or a contact sheet series Export the file to a multi page pdf Extreme users only Advantage a nice presentation you can email to the client allowing them to flip through the pages as if previewing an album Lower the dpi resolution of your output to protect your work from printing If you have created an album create a contact sheet style layout of the p
185. e progress bar disappears and the image s thumbnail appears it is ready for use by all team members Drag and drop the images onto the canvas as you would with any other image To delete an image hover over its thumbnail to show the deletion X button ke mmeg UP j ly Locking projects The yearbook project manager may wish to lock off sections of the project or the master project To do this open the project Under the File menu navigate to the PROJECT MANAGEMENT section and choose Password Protect Add a password and a reminder of your choice Save the project Any attempt to reopen this project will requite the password to be entered This is ideal for locking off completed pages so other users cannot continue to work on them Creating panel pages Panel pages can be created as a separate project or as part of a larger project including candid pages Panels are created in three steps e importing a pspa cd to associate an image database with your project e adding an empty panel grid to your page and customizing it to suit your design tastes and needs e populating the panel with images according to your grouping and sorting needs Panels can only be made on Album Side type pages not covers or double spreads If you need to change the page type click on the Pages hover right mouse select your page and ensure you have album side selected 2009 306 YearbookFusion User s Manual 18
186. e sizes e YearbookFusion users may only see their yearbook manufacturer s custom presets Learn more about setting your canvas size in the New Projects section of this manual 2009 The Basics 27 CH ee Ge ee ae N Ho al STN B ui l m s hie LOAD Click on LOAD to open saved projects and templates FotoFusion will display the default directory for FotoFusion projects C My Collages My Documents You can navigate to any sub folder on your system to display other saved projects including templates Consult the section of this manual entitled File amp Project Management to learn more about loading saving deleting and other features related to file management YearbookFusion users with remote storage enabled will also be able to choose to open project from the server providing they are not locked 2009 28 YearbookFusion User s Manual Marketplace Click on MARKETPLACE to view templates and kits you can use to start your composition Full details on the dotScrap marketplace are detailed in this user s manual in the section entitled The dotScrap Marketplace This feature may be disabled in some YearbookFusion installations 2009 The Basics 29 Learn Click on LEARN to view tutorial information You can access the online Frequently Asked Questions database or launch this user s manual or look at tutorial
187. e sure to turn the Text Shadow down or off to get a less muddy color To change the color of the text change the R G B values or click on the color picker box to open the color editor Drag the Soften control to interactively set the blur on the text Text Outline The outline for the text can have a unique color and transparency typically a black edge around a text body To make the outline more translucent click on the Opacity control and change the value to a lower number Drag the size control to make the outline wider or narrower A dashed outline is also available Click on Dash to set the size of the spacing Examples of Text Effects 2009 174 YearbookFusion User s Manual DAENS omino Sra Ne Outline color Outline opacity 6 4 5 Text Matte Options Adding Mattes to Text Applying a matte to your text can add texture and flares to the text Not all mattes are appropriate for text for instance a star shaped matte will only cut off part of your text However textured mattes like gradients will add a distressed look to your text Use the HOLE and the SOFTEN functions to change the use of the matte and soften it To add a matte to text from the Text Editor e Add text to the canvas all versions or to a frame Enhanced Extreme e Open the Text Editor change the attributes of your text as desired e Turn on the text matte check box and select your matte of choice Use the drop
188. e the splitter to slice the large Add a background image or color if you wish Add a title text on canvas oe a a 2 thy i Vas IPT Plahan Wailing l frame into smaller equal sized frames Select all frames then right mouse down on any one frame Select FRAME TO SHOW ENTIRE IMAGE The border will disappear automatically Use the INSET option in the Frame Editor to re space the frames to provide room for labels Select all frames then add text to image Click on the toolbox T key to add a text field then replace the sample text with a text tag of your choice This will insert information Drop Photo about the image such as file name PE Pere date etc Here Choose your font align the text change the color remove the shadow etc Reposition the text next to the frames as desired Extreme users click on the Pages hover button and right mouse down on the page Select AUTODUPLICATE If you would like to retain the template for future use click on FILE gt gt Save as Template 2009 Pro Project Tutorials 257 e Bring your image set into the dropper via the Images hover or the Organizer Buckets feature or by clicking on the Browse for Images 7 s ls Lartiues F Hhaluaeny H i a ets ame i a button on the toolbar DO NOT drop the images onto the canvas Hit AutoPopulate on the toolbar a e FotoFusion will fill your template with th
189. e value to change Click on R to restore to the default value Flush lett Center Flush righi Character spacing 0 5 Align to top of frame Char spacing Align to Center of Tame r iF T pi nmg mi Fn ri d pE p AHON TO totom o iame Intenine spacing 0 Thisis the default setting INTENING Spacing is here is less space between the lines r 25 There is more space Delween the lines Extreme users can also control the Ligatures the text options if this feature is enabled in the font you have chosen An alternative method for positioning text is through the View gt gt Properties gt gt Text Location menu item Text amp Outline Appearance To adjust the appearance of a text select a text frame the text toolbox will appear 2009 The Create Tab 173 The Shadow part of the toolbox can be dragged directly to edit the text s shadow e Drag left right Shadow Offset e Drag up down Shadow Blur e Click Open Shadow Editor color angle amount etc Click here for more information on how to drag the controls The text s color and outline options can be changed by opening the Text Editor Click on the T icon to launch the Text Editor Bandy Cutina fw paciry 266 Opacity 264 R 255 R m i gt 266 a 0 H 265 B p Ah r i wre 0D Dash 5 Text Body To make the text body more translucent click on the Opacity control and change the value to a lower number B
190. ear on your layouts The number will respect double spreads and cameo single cover pages will be excluded Organization tools Use the organizer to view multiple folders simultaneously Triage your images into buckets to pre sort your album pages Assign keywords themes and ratings to your images then search for them for quick and easy retrieval into your projects Templates Search the LumaPix store to find layouts for all your needs such as pro wedding album templates and greeting cards Some materials are included for free with your license type Click on the BUNDLED CONTENT button on the Start Zone to see which layouts are yours to use at no additional cost More materials will become available over time Multipage album design Extreme users FotoFusion can help shave off hours and hours of work hours to produce top quality albums There are three ways you can use FotoFusion to create a multi page album 1 Design by template use the Marketplace templates or your own custom set of templates to quickly populate an album 2 The Autocollage Album create a sorted multi page album in seconds ready for 2009 252 YearbookFusion User s Manual customization 3 The From Scratch Approach Design original albums one page at a time METHOD 1 Design by template The dotScrap Marketplace provides an ever expanding resource of pro album designs Extreme users receive five albums with their license Click on
191. ect to the new page size all the existing frames on the canvas will resize to the new page specifications automatically Click on APPLY to resize your canvas Click on Apply to this Page set the new canvas settings to the current page Apply to All will allow you to specify which type of page should receive the new settings eg all two page spreads Project Settings Project Settings allow you to change the form factor project type as a whole for the entire project This is particularly useful if you are resizing an entire multipage album project Extreme Yearbook only The entire project will be resized simultaneously For instance a hard cover 12x12 album project can be resized to a soft cover 8x8 with all page types conforming to the new settings simultaneously Project Settings Fom Facto Proeet Type Alkan T Haniatue Gareic Le Product Whi we _ Manse Project Type Essentials and Enhanced users will only see Sheet available as defined by these license types Extreme and YearbookFusion users will be able to choose from among other option Album Specialty Digital Manufacturer Custom refers to your custom page size settings Other available album manufacturers will be available depending on your license type from this list Changing the manufacturer will change the range of available choices in Project Type and Product type 2009 The Create Tab 87 Product A list of available page
192. ected e The gallery of tutorials will grow over time Internet based tutorial allow users to have instant access to all new materials 2009 YearbookFusion User s Manual Online Tutorials Tutorials are embedded directly into the FotoFusion interface When you click on any item on the canvas that has video clips available to illustrate its use the La icon in the bottom right of the Create screen will be highlighted Click on it to see the available list of videos at any time Longer tutorial videos are also available via the Start Zone by clicking on the LEARN section These include videos and projects InfoTips As you work in FotoFusion you will frequently see InfoTip windows like this appear Slick this beafbon hn oor piraat fine Aline Parra ni ieri Mial Gre pee Gino tone take iia aceount a a ieee eon ar ee eh tla Click anywhere to close the tip and click the red no sign circled in red to never see the tip again You can turn all tips off by clicking on HELP and selecting LEARNING PREFERENCES If you change your mind and want to see the tips again select Reset all info tips in the Help menu under LEARNING PREFERENCES The Community Tab Click on the Community tab to connect directly to the LumaPix community umapi Galeries Upinad Forum store Fag mews coher E gt xy 1 Address hiipiijaman ketoetrapa eorylgabery fides php redireaa
193. ed Form Factors If you are starting a new project from scratch not from a template click FILE on the menu and select NEW Most YearbookFusion users will only see the form factors set up by their printing company This can be only one featured item or several products such as a soft or hard cover book 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 301 Select the product that corresponds to the yearbook or directory you will be producing For more information on canvas settings consult the general FotoFusion manual s section on Canvas Settings You can add and change properties related to your pages in several ways 1 The Add Pages toolbar icon Click on the ei button on the toolbar to access the following options Ei a E ra Existing Page Ponape Irewert wet Aub alaga Each item will allow you to do particular actions e Blank allows you to pick from the selected page types offered by the form factor you are using For example you may see Cover Sheet Album Side and Double Page Spread if your selected manufacturer offers these types of pages e Templates will open a window to allow you to choose among your custom built templates e Existing page will open a window to allow you to choose among projects you have previously saved e Duplicate will copy the current page e Insert using AutoCollage will open the auto collage window to create a new collage automatically 2009 302 YearbookFusio
194. ed March 11 2006 Version 3 7 build 28175 has three significant changes Features Color profiles can be set on processed output STUDIO only Free Trial functionality Emails can be sent without watermarks from trial version Compositions can be sent to participating labs for processing from trial version Released January 18 2006 Version 3 6 build 27059 responds to user feedback e Features o Polaroid matte added o Improved text rendering quality e Fixed Bugs o Instability caused by Matrox PowerDesk fixed Released December 2 2005 2009 294 YearbookFusion User s Manual Version 3 6 build 26688 fixes a few minor issues e Features o Segmented rendering of double page spreads e Fixed Bugs o Certain text fonts were not properly sized o Default file type when importing images was incorrect o Minor issue when printing certain sized projects released November 17 2005 Version 3 6 build 26468 responds to frequent user feedback e Features o Images used in current project now highlighted in organizer o Added new 2006 Calendar mattes o Text frames can be hyperlinks o Info bar displayed while dropping images e Fixed Bugs o Quality of canvas image during editing improved o Sepiatone color improved to match customer feedback o EMF WMF added to list of file types shown while browsing o Acting on images in organizer switches to Images tab released November 8 2005 Version 3
195. ed in external editor simultaneously 8222 e User Preference can be set to always or never copy images when sent to an external editor e File name can be typed in File gt Open Form Factors e New form factors added to manufacturer s list for ACI Classic Photography ClickOnPrinting CPQ Professional Color Excel Photography Herff Jones Holyfield Kenneth Brown Photography Marathon Olan Mills Stones Studio Proven Direct 19952 20560 20553 20689 20939 20855 20691 20414 20348 e Update to manufacturer form factor automatically applies to projects using that same form factor 20177 e File gt New contains User Presets tab for quick access to custom settings 20060 e New project opens to last used form factor 20159 e Custom form factors are encoded into project file ensures transportability of projects 20365 20421 e Updated form factor information updates immediately without reinstallation 20605 Framework e Initial Windows 7 64 Bit Compatibility testing completed e Memory optimization increases maximum project size e Error Manager provides more accurate details when problem encountered e Start Zone detects internet availability Customization e DPI warning customizable on user presets editor 2671 4811 e Image will display warnings if dpi is below preset limits full size zoomed 2671 4811 e New and updated form factors are instantly live 20605 e Fixed page count can be defined
196. eet 13x19 page 3900x5700 pixels size limit of that license type e Extreme users will see all available options including album two page spreads with bleed amp safe values e YearbookFusion users may see a full range of options but most likely will see only their manufacturer s preset sizes This will eliminate the possibility of YearbookFusion users from creating projects that do not conform to their printer s recommended sizes The image below shows the options for an Extreme user Enhanced amp Essentials users will not see album options W iiin tata E Iag TEE MA bw ee ee es a fee ia mal riai Ghai a frre i 3 Featured Items displayed under the tab allow you to quickly select from among commonly selected presets Extreme and Yearbook users will see items displaying a atthe top of the diagram This indicates an album project type meaning that several page types are included under the one project descriptor Click on the arrow to choose a cover sheet album side or double page spread to choose what page type you would like to begin with The other page options will be available to you immediately through the Pages hover when adding or resizing new pages For a full range of presets browse the options under the Generic and Manufacturer s tabs 2009 66 YearbookFusion User s Manual 4 6 2 The Generic tab allows you to quickly browse among commonly used page sizes organized
197. efore AutoDistribute nia after AutoDistribute Pa Lele To SORT your images before AutoDistributing Hover on the AutoCollage button and select the sort features you would like to use Aubeoo Mage Atd rai i ee Cog Mirm E iC eres oF aareroe Ag teri colsoe open sleedty Creative Eltecir fee Stade Bordare mes Space T Backdrop Preserve frame settings When you click on AutoDistribute the sort criteria will be applied to assign the images into frames in the appropriate order AutoDuplicate Extreme and Yearbook only FotoFusion allows you to use a template page and replicate it repeatedly across a set of images This is particularly useful for making contact sheets or proofing documents 2009 AutoTools 77 95 9 Create a template or open an existing blank framed template The Marketplace contains several contact sheet layout templates which are preset to AutoDuplicate You can also make your own custom layout very easy e Create a new blank single page e then draw empty frames on the canvas e and or use the splitter tool to create a grid e and or add text tags to add the file name or other EXIF information for the image file If you wish to keep this layout to reuse for future projects click on FILE on the menu and select SAVE AS TEMPLATE Set the page to AutoDuplicate When you have created your layout open the Pages hover and right mouse down on the page thumb
198. emainder of the image set will flow over To turn a frame back on click on the empty frame again To remove all Knockouts setting it back to a full grid click on the Remove Knockouts button on the Panel Settings editor 2009 330 YearbookFusion User s Manual ia Die Schaal E i of Riineas Chass af J ia E M of frames turned A populated panel with frames turned off and off in an unpopulated additional graphics added 18 2 1 2 2 Panel text options Ton change the way the panel labels will appear click on the Panel text portion of the r TE E 1 Doi LOES La Label Settings allow you to specify where the text will appear on the edge or gutter of the page on the right or left side of the page or under each image frame Having the Snug box check on will make the label closer to the panel images L icon at the top of the Panel editor el Setting The Width and Height changes the amount of space that a a the label can occupy Increasing the width with the labels oa wd ie Seug aligned to the side of the panel will make the text larger wam w65 Height 75 and might possibly reduce the number of frames per row Space i Changing the height when the labels are aligned under the frames will reduce or increase the space between rows Changing the Space will move the label closer or further away from the panel image frames giving it more of a margin The Font drawer works in the sa
199. en printing precisely measured output and the fit option resizes the image to fit the page e Resize only if necessary o If your layout is bigger than the printed page it will be printed at a reduced size if it is too small it will be printed larger o Use this option if the precise dimensions of your printed output don t matter you just want to use paper as efficiently as you can e No Resizing even if it requires multiple pages to print This option will print your collage at exactly the dimensions that you selected when creating it o If your layout is 6x6 inches it will be printed at exactly 6x6 inches on an 8 5x11 2009 The Output Tab 219 Sheet of paper o If you layout is 36x24 inches it will not fit on a single 8 5x11 sheet of paper FotoFusion Extreme is capable of splitting printed output across multiple pages FotoFusion Enhanced and FotoFusion Scrapbook Essentials can only print to exactly one sheet at a time Note that the options for Full Bleed and Crop are only available when printing at 1 1 because these options are only relevant when printing precisely measured output and the fit option resizes the image to fit the page Full Bleed If you have created a canvas with a bleed area then turning on the Add Full Bleed Region option will print that region Crop Lines If you have created a canvas with a bleed area then turning on the Draw Crop Lines option will print crop marks whe
200. en select Show Printer Segments If no segments have been created FotoFusion will offer to create segments to cover the page This will create a set of printer page segments to cover the image with a grid of pages 2009 222 YearbookFusion User s Manual In this example there are 6 page segments all of which can be adjusted like a normal frame to assure that the printer segments will fall in the best possible place for reassembling the larger puzzle The red oval in the image above suggest a segment that Should be move slightly to the right along the border edge of the large image of the bride The layout can now be printed the portion of the collage covered by each printer page segment will be printed separately and the individual pieces will line up correctly Below is page one of the entire composition Note that the crop lines and full bleed for each segment of the image will be printed correctly if selected To manually add page segments click on the Insert Menu item and choose Insert Printing Segment or use the hotkey Ctrl Shift P Other suggested use poster mosaics SEGMENTS Partitioning your project for output Multi page templates that can be reassembled into a printable or exportable product The example to the right is one of the Z cards available as a dotScrap template from the LumaPix library This template consists of a cover page shown right a template layout page and tw
201. enter positioning 120 center vertical line 120 Centering 120 217 Change page sides 77 changing a frame ina group 123 Changing a panel 318 changing canvas size 84 Changing Computers 13 233 Changing pages 177 changing presets 62 Changing the angle of an image 115 changing the default settings 62 Changing the frame 127 Changing the page view 177 changing the panel width 322 changing the way your email looks 201 checkmarks 43 class composite 258 class photo 250 classroom 258 clean project database 237 Click 272 clipart 335 clipart 102 335 Cloning pages 177 closing hovers 38 Closing your current page project 32 Collage 100 collage options 69 color correcting images 141 Color editor 172 color management 211 Color profile 211 color profiles 211 Color space tagging 17 colour management 211 colour profile 211 column spacing 322 columns and rows in a panel 322 communicating with your clients 258 community 224 Community Tab 3 38 composite 258 composites 250 Compression 194 computer crash 13 computer died 13 Configure icon 305 Configuring an ISP 194 Configuring the printer 217 configuring your panel 322 contact sheet 74 98 117 167 250 255 contact sheet template 255 Contact Sheet theme 201 contact sheets 76 177 cont d 331 Contrast 141 converting from single sheet 79 Converting to album side 79 Copy 272 copy a page 76 copy a template 76 copyright 199 Corel Paint Shop Pro 134
202. ert menu s Reference Region gt Destination option 223 2009 224 YearbookFusion User s Manual 10 A drop down list of available segments will appear One segment can be added multiple times on a page to create a sheet of duplicate items to print Individual segments on a page can be rearrange to create a more efficient use of paper ie rotate segment to fit them better on a page If you edit the original layout the changes will be reflected on this printable exportable page Other suggested uses business card multi up on one page bifold greeting card to avoid designing upside down creating a printer efficient pattern for a larger composition of smaller elements The Community Tab W community l ae The tab is your gateway to exchanging ideas with other FotoFusion users FotoFusion is all about sharing with others sending collages of travel shots to workmates proof sheets to the newlyweds or postcards of your kids to the grandparents uma eaters pion Foran store Faq tows other lt i gt fa Address hipi para haaran zomigalery ades php Tradirecpabery throm clara reside Gat The Community Tab gives you quick access to e The FotoScraps Gallery to view what other FotoFusion users have been creating e Upload where you can send your work to the FotoScraps Gallery e The Forum where you can chat and ask questions to expert users e
203. es below the predefined thresholds of acceptable dpi Some publishers will set a default value to warn and to block the use of images that do not meet their predefined limits so if you are using a special build from a book publisher you will have these limits preset for you General FotoFusion user can change these warnings to suit their needs Click on the EDIT menu item and choose User Preferences You can change the DPI warning levels in this area if you would like to set them higher or lower Reference This section contains e a list keyboard shortcuts e terminology 2009 266 YearbookFusion User s Manual 16 1 Keyboard shortcuts A list of the most commonly used keyboard shortcuts w keer o oo loome e ke oS on selected image frame toggle aspect ratio on off Select all like items on your canvas or all items in a hover e Reset canvas view show all cure Copy the selected element a trum dropper on to add images to canvas cua Duplicate the currently selected frame s plus mouse wheel zoom canvas viewer plus left mouse down and drag draw a new frame Group selected frames cura Start a new project Pick up the selected images to move to the dropper 2009 Reference Save current project plus left mouse down and drag draw a new text frame cart poste eutveopiea tem ae pius tets mouse dowi move canoas wiew ciri fout sereeteaten o cimz fo o
204. es remain reconnected when project is reloaded 17950 18009 e Database modifications made in Trial mode persist after activation 17963 e Changes to student information mark the current project as dirty 17180 e No longer possible to create duplicate column headings when importing PSPA files 15250 e Turning off header at PSPA import now correctly affects number of records imported 15747 e Grades now sorted as numbers not strings grade 9 comes before grade 10 17376 17439 17466 e Default size of text under panel frames improved 17675 17646 e Application of two page spread to yearbook panel now handled more gracefully 17967 17968 17969 e Projects with no PSPA database can now be uploaded to Publisher as expected 1804 7 18049 e Legibility of text in Panel Wizard improved 16738 17542 Released April 3 2009 Version 4 4 build 54352 Bug fixes e Insufficient memory error messages resolved 17218 e Uninstallation issues resolved 17356 17020 e Installer checks if FotoFusion is running 17357 e Overlay info checkbox issue conflict resolved 17281 e Left Right Page type functions as expected 17359 e No crash when project opened with images on disconnected network drive 17360 Dropping a matte or tile onto the canvas does not apply it to the canvas frame 17377 e Missing image on the quick start resolved 17362 e JPG artifacts and bad quality render at 200dpi vs 300dpi 17366 e No crash on dragg
205. ese materials are treated as any other image you would import into the software For example a scrapbooking kit may be sold as such by a provider outside of FotoFusion but FotoFusion will not recognize the collection as a kit as defined by the software as 2009 250 YearbookFusion User s Manual 13 they have not been coded as such in FotoFusion and do not have the necessary thumbnail images to display in the Marketplace e Outside materials will not contain smart elements meaning there will be no resizable frames or multi layered elements e PSD templates cannot be imported into FotoFusion either as the file format is not compatible Only Photoshop can open psd files Scrapbooking graphics are most frequently saved as jpg and png file format types Clip art comes in a variety of formats most of which are supported by FotoFusion e JPG files will drop as a solid image as this format does not support transparency JPG are often used for backgrounds for this reason When dropped into FotoFusion a jpg file will be placed into a frame and will be resizable and rescalable meaning you can crop zoom pan e PNG files can display transparent regions so this format is used to save graphics that are cut out from the background When dropped into FotoFusion png files can be made larger or smaller but they cannot be stretched or shrunk out of their default proportion and cannot be rescaled ie no zoom
206. esktop or another folder as a catch all for all your files This can lead to confusion very quickly using folders will help you keep your files in easy to find named locations Another mistake is to reuse the same file names repeatedly If you are simply updating a project save it with the same file Do not use save as make a new copy with a new name This leads to version control problems meaning you will have problems finding the correct version of the file Also don t keep multiple versions of the same file in different locations Work off one main file and keep backups if needed that can be updated separately Note to Extreme users Multipage projects will save all pages under one project name 2009 File amp Project Management 231 Use the Pages hover to see your pages and add new ones but don t resave the project under a new file name after you add a page The following are two methods to ensure that your files are kept organized and easy to access Use Default folders Some users will choose to keep their files in the default location specified by FotoFusion e all photos are kept in C My Documents My Pictures You can sort the images by date to quickly find images all FotoFusion project files scrap and ONLY this type of file are kept in C My Documents My Collages You will Know exactly where all your projects are by following this practice all exported rendered projects eg rendered to
207. ets of paper and with perfect accuracy Consult the section entitled Printer Page Segments to learn how to compile a page layout guide Page Segments amp Region References Extreme Only FotoFusion EXTREME includes the ability to segment a composition into smaller sections allowing you to reassemble your composition in several ways V a A printer page segment is a resizable A segment is also a resizable translucent frame that floats over your translucent frame that floats over your canvas specifying how your larger canvas canvas It defines a smaller area of the 2009 The Output Tab 221 will be cut into separate printable areas canvas that can be transposed onto another area of your project Note how this type of segment specifies the pi page number of the segment It specifies a segment number This feature allows you to print layouts that This feature is useful for working with a are larger than your printer is able to output template page which can then be directly as pieces which fit precisely reassembled a printer friendly page together when assembled on a suitable copied multiple times or to assist background medium working with an awkward orientation PRINTER PAGE SEGMENTS Printing a large canvas on printer friendly paper Suppose that we want to print a 16x12 collage but have a printer that can print only print 8 5x11 paper To begin click on VIEW on the menu th
208. eye removal tool select the image frame in question which will expose the Image Toolbox Select the cn TOOL option then the Red Eye removal tool This will open your image in a new window Position the target over the iris you wish to correct Zoom in and out by either hitting the and keys on your keyboard or if you have a mouse with a wheel zoom in and out by turning the wheel When you have the iris within the target click on your left mouse In this example the button This will remove the red left eye has been and replace it with a more corrected and the appropriate color right eye has been targeted for correction pma When you are done click the button to close the editor You will be prompted to save your file do so if you are satisfied with the results of the correction Please keep in mind this action will overwrite your original image file FotoFusion will then ask you if you would like to refresh the image on your canvas select YES to view the changes on your canvas Cutting a matte The matte cutter tool available for Enhanced and Extreme users is an add on application that will open your selected photo and allow you to select a portion of the image to instantly create a matte This tool allows you to extract components of an image and eliminate the background images without affecting your original source image 2009 158 YearbookFusion User s Manual
209. ff any given page Right mouse select the page thumbnail from the Pages hover to exclude from page numbering Using AutoDuplicate to create a multi page project FotoFusion allows you to take a template and replicate it repeatedly across a set of images This is particularly useful for making contact sheets Full details can be found in the AutoDuplicate chapter of this User s Manual Saving as a template from a multi page project If you wish to save an entire album as a template to reuse at a later time with new images click on File on the menu bar then select SAVE AS TEMPLATE You will be prompted to save with or without image content If you choose to save without image content you will have a series of empty frames to work with the next time you open the project If you wish to save a single page within a multi page template open the Pages hover and right mouse select the thumbnail of the page Select SAVE AS TEMPLATE from the list You will be prompted to give the template a name before saving The new page will 2009 182 YearbookFusion User s Manual appear in the list of V4 templates Excluding pages from output When making templates you may want to include an instruction sheet or an example of the finished layout but not want this item to be available for output Right mouse select on any page thumbnail in the Pages hover to Exclude from Output The page will be ignored when you print or render to file
210. firmation of your purchase by email Once your payment has been successfully processed you will receive an email containing information needed to register the software 4 Launch FotoFusion while connected to the internet 5 Choose Activate FotoFusion in FotoFusion s Help menu Enter your user id which was provided in your confirmation email from support a lumapix com Create your own password which you will use should you need to reinstall the software again Submit this info to relaunch FotoFusion now activated Your software will now be registered to you and unlocked at the level of your license If you have a cd rom copy of FotoFusion in a cd jewel case with an alpha numeric code You have purchased a fully licensed copy of FotoFusion at the level indicated on the packaging Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced Extreme The box may have been packaged with a printable album kit or may have been sold as a stand alone item If you are reading this User s Manual then you have already successfully installed FotoFusion To activate the software enter your user id which is included in a sticker inside the cd case Create your own password which you will use again if you need reinstall the software and a name for your computer Your software will now be registered and unlocked at the level of your license If you have a cd rom copy of FotoFusion that came packaged with printable paper goods that does not con
211. frames display handles correctly 19166 e Image editor will restore brightness to factory defaults 19447 Installation Licensing Marketplace e Installer will only run if administrator account is in use activation will hold for all users 13145 e Uninstalling FotoFusion does not cause issues with previously downloaded Marketplace content 14485 e One font warning for all fonts in a projects 16011 e Projects moved between machines will display missing font message 16609 e Font license warning message will never show again if disabled on a project 19365 e Missing font warning appears when older archived project reopens 19440 e Download content from store will bring entire contents down 18838 File amp Project Management e Projects opened on network will save reopen on other machines on network as expected no caching 14609 19274 e Issues related to photo caching on network projects resolved 19172 e Various issues with reconnecting images stored on a network resolved 18930 18931 18932 18933 18936 e Missing images reported correctly 19321 e Archives includes fonts 14894 16425 e Images edited in external editor will make image copy in same folder as original and canvas is refreshed as expected 18963 18972 19152 19423 e Previously saved projects will no longer unpack when reloaded 19086 19002 e Changing shadow options will prompt save at close 19226 Output e Output fo
212. from the canvas your project will reopen with blank frames FotoFusion will remove ALL image content including background images and decorative graphics e If you choose not to remove the images the template will retain all images on the canvas This is useful if you would like to save a project with decorative images and backgrounds remove any photos manually before saving FotoFusion allows you to password protect your files so they cannot be opened or edited by an unauthorized user To enable password protection open your project and click on the FILE menu items then choose Project Management gt Password protect Type in a password and password reminder of your choice to turn this feature on then save the project When you try to open the project FotoFusion will prompt for the password NOTE TO VERSION 3 USERS Version 4 allows you to save your files any subdirectory of your choice and does not use the collage file extension Version 3 collage files will open in Version 4 but Version 4 will not save to this file format type NOTE TO VERSION 4 USERS Files saved as scrap are now self contained If you move the scrap file without archiving it from one machine to another where both machines share a common image database on a network drive and are activated with the same user id the files will reopen as expected Similarly if you need to maintain or replace your computer the scrap files can be moved to an external storage
213. g amp Moving Frames Images Swapping Images Between Frames Cropping and Panning Images Rotating flipping tilting and spinning Frame Tools gt gt The Frame Editor Borders Options Frame Status 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 15 2 3 3 e Image Tools Fine tuning Images e Text Tools Users of FotoFusion Lite do not need to purchase a license to print out the templates that are included in the bundled package You can however try the full version of FotoFusion Available as an option from the Start up screen this demo mode will allow you to try a full range of creative tools but any output print outs web uploads exports will be watermarked If you enjoy using FotoFusion to create original compositions or access other store content you can buy a full license to activate the software What is YearbookFusion YearbookFusion is an end to end yearbook software solution that provides integrated yearbook layout uploading and output facilities all built on FotoFusion digital layout platform The solution is designed to be purchased by publishers and distributed to schools yearbook administrators students or publisher staff can create layouts and submit yearbook layouts directly to the publisher The features and business considerations were designed with the yearbook market in mind Schools designing yearbooks in YearbookFusion will find e Ready made templates e Powerful free form tools
214. ge of your panel Another option is to use a pre made yearbook template E Bob k i bei The Yearbook template sets available from the Bundled Content section of the Start Zone contain page reserved specifically for panel pages Remember to launch the template before starting to work on the panel you cannot apply the template to a panel that you ve already configured or populated Note If you are designing your own page style and wish to have a particular image or graphic appear on every panel page eg a logo be sure to assign the frame to the canvas background layer Select the frame s you wish to have repeated on each page then right mouse down on the selection From the resulting menu select Move to layer then assign the frame s to the background layer This will result in the duplication of these frames on all pages of the panel set Customizing the panel s overall look To add an empty panel click on the Panel Task hover button on the Yearbook toolbar area over the canvas A blank grid will appear on your page with empty text fields running down the side You can then customize the panel or wait until you have populated it with images to make the changes 2009 320 YearbookFusion User s Manual l LE E j SS 4 p mue l g T a Note If you drop an empty image frame on a panel before or after it has been populated the panel images wi
215. ges no limits e Fit will cause the panel to snap exactly to the selected number of columns and rows regardless of the specified frame width or page size ie use this exact number of columns and rows e Max will not allow the panel to grow beyond the specified number of columns and rows ie no more than x columns or rows 2009 326 YearbookFusion User s Manual itches fe Lebets Frame lienockouts Remove rnodows The Column and Row spacing allows you to increase the inset distance between the panel frames Increase the column width to space the panel frames further apart deh the row spacing to create more room between the rows of frames wa Ue nO Coo Onn J EE ERED oO TERE 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 327 I i E LL TT i Haan ae ie Default panel spacing Lott Lf tt i SS ai a e o Ea d Ta J ie TT EE E F I qE TT oo tl l a Increased row amp column spacing Changing the position of the panel image frames The Layout section of the panel editor allows you to specify where your panel will fall on your page with respect to the margins and sides of the page To understand how this works first a little terminology The gutter is the side of the page that runs into the book s binding The edge is the side 200
216. ges by email and website Professional photographers use FotoFusion to produce multi page albums in minutes not hours use templates for a wide variety of pro projects create large format and grand format output make class composites and yearbooks with fantastic ease catalogue their images by project or theme After creating your project you can output in a variety of ways local printing email your web gallery or several file format types so that any friend family member client or printing facility will be to receive your creation Any time you need to use multiple images into a single layout FotoFusion is your tool of choice How Does FotoFusion Work FotoFusion works on a principle of what you see is what you get It is fast to learn because you do not need to learn complicated menu listings or a myriad of shortcut keys Selecting items directly on your canvas will activate a toolbox which will give you instant access to the majority of the controls you can apply to your selected item Other less used options are available by right mouse selecting items on or outside your canvas Unlike image editing software FotoFusion does not load up the entire full resolution image on your screen FotoFusion works with reference images somewhat like enhanced thumbnail versions which allows you to add dozens and dozens of images to your project without overtaxing your computer s memory resources When you print or pr
217. ges of the same template populated with a series of images AutoCollage The core design element of FotoFusion is a patent pending layout mechanism called AutoCollage This tool takes a set of images and arranges them to fit gracefully within the canvas respecting the aspect ratios of the original images and doing the minimum cropping required to have the images fill the space cleanly Any set of images on the canvas can be AutoCollaged repeatedly until you are satisfied with the layout Click on the AutoCollage button on the Toolbar to obtain a new layout every time a dl i Fb FHE E Click AutoCollage for a new layout 2009 70 YearbookFusion User s Manual There are two ways to work with AutoCollage e aS a command from within an existing project as described above e as a Wizard takes you step by step through the process to start a new project The AutoCollage Wizard 2009 AutoTools 71 From the START ZONE click on the AUTO icon This will open the AutoCollage Wizard From the CHOOSE IMAGES tab select images to include in the collage see lge ae le n Reed goer eae ce pe oie ee ee be eee oe ee Bd leia han i arr aru ph bE Fobi be bee Boy j l l aa a l j al E j ee ee T E E E i N To navigate to a different directory click on the V next to the folder name i i ae Fs eye gt i amp amna a ki wot e AN ram Za Kay SS s
218. he C to page inclivich sly stack or up te each other down one frame ee a ee at atime oe Cl E3 fe 7 ee beouta oer mare Or for Extreme and YearbookFusion use the ME hover The Tree hover will show how your project is organized and the order in which frames are stacked You can manually drag a frame to a new location or use the arrows at the top of the hover to move items up and down the stack Learn more in the Tree hover section of this manual Grouping frames Enhanced Extreme only Grouping allows you to link individual elements so they move and resize as a single unit In this example four separate frames have been dropped on the canvas 2009 124 YearbookFusion User s Manual Image by Kent Smith then arranged in a postcard style with a text element added 30 r mpr m riaal ereina ilf int itr ay iaid ilf These frames can be grouped together so they can be treated as one single unit 2009 The Create Tab 125 Select all images you wish to include in the group Either mouse down and drag a marquee to cover the entire group or use Ctrl click to multiple select the images one at a time Right mouse down on any one of the selected images a pop up dialogue of available selections will appear Select GROUP SELECTION from the list of options Alternatively you can hit G on your keyboard to apply the group attribute to the selection You will no
219. heir work to a layered psd file will find each element on a Separate layer Please read the section entitled What Is a Frame before exploring this section The following section explains all aspects of frames in detail Learn how to e add and move frames amp images on the canvas including how to make a grid or mosaic e how to use the Frame Editor to change border options add mattes and position the frame e how to use the Image Editor to fine tune your images add colors and background textures view original images e how to use the red eye removal tool or cut a matte e how to control the Shadow options e and about other frame functions grouping hotlinks Adding amp Moving Frames Images This section explains all aspects of frame and image movement Learn how to e Add duplicate copy or delete frames e Move and resize frames e Crop and pan inside a frame e Rotate flip tilt and spin frames and images inside of frames e Swapping images between frames e Create a grid or a mosaic Adding duplicating amp deleting frames Adding an Empty Frame to the Canvas There are five ways to add an empty frame to the collage e Interactively in the Collage To set a size and location for a new blank frame hold the F key on your keyboard then drag your mouse while clicking down to draw a marquee rectangular shape Let go of the mouse button your new frame will appear You will now have and empty frame on the canva
220. hes To open an image while working in FotoFusion Right mouse down on one or more images and choose Edit from the resulting pop up menu You can also multi select several frames on a page and choose Edit as well FotoFusion will ask you if you would like to make a copy of the image If you choose yes a new copy of the image will appear in the same folder as the original eg D03043 jpg D03043 copy jpg If you choose no you will be directly editing the Original image Note you can set a user preference for this option so FotoFusion will not prompt you again Click on Edit on the menu and open the User Preferences option Under the Image Editing area make your choice in the Copy images area always prompt always copy or never copy FotoFusion will now follow your new rule every time you edit an image in an external editor If no editors have been previously selected select Manage Click on the Add button which will open your Windows Program File folder Navigate to the folder of your software of choice and find the exe file which launches the software eg C Program Files Adobe PhotoShop PhotoShop exe Once an editor has been specified select it so that it is highlighted then choose OK The specified software will launch and your image will open Note You can set a user preference for this option so FotoFusion will always go to your editor of preference Click on Edit on the menu and open the User Preferences op
221. hich is the next picture to be dropped the baby in the turquoise shirt in this case e file information name size and options before dropping This ability to see which image is next in line gives you enormous power over how images are selected In particular you can re order the pictures before they are dropped remove pictures that you do not want to drop stop dropping and then start up again later if you choose change the size of the image before dropping drop more than one copy of the same image and create a new frame to hold an image without leaving the dropping mode Dropping images To drop an image that is attached to the cursor click your left mouse button e If you drop the image on top of an existing image the existing image and the first 2009 54 YearbookFusion User s Manual image in the dropper will be swapped The target frame will be outlined in red e If you drop the image into an empty frame the frame will be filled with the new image e If you drop the image over empty canvas the image will appear in a new frame Skipping images During dropping you can scroll through the list of pictures that are waiting to be dropped e Roll the mouse wheel up or down e Press the left or right arrow keys This allows you to skip a picture that you do not want to drop and move to the next or previous image in the drop order Removing images from the dropper To remove the image that is
222. his manual to learn more 2009 The Create Tab 167 6 4 1 Text Content incl tags exif To edit text click on any text frame The Text Toolbox will appear click on the T icon launch the Text Editor Replace the Double Click to Change with any text you want It can be a few words or entire paragraphs Font eves There is no spell checker in FotoFusion If you are concerned about the spelling in your text you should compose it first in a word processing software eg MS Word Word Perfect etc to check your work You can cut and paste it into FotoFusion s text editor after you have ensured it is correct Tags EXIF information The Enhanced Extreme and Yearbook versions of FotoFusion allow you to extract information about an image and to use that to label the image in various ways EXIF information refers to data stored within the image itself typically written by the camera when a digital photograph is taken It includes information about when and how the picture was taken and is therefore useful as identifying information for pictures Sample uses of EXIF information include e Adding file names beneath pictures to build contact sheets e Superimposing frame numbers on image to make it easier for a customer to describe them to you 2009 168 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Noting the shutter speed of an image to help determine the best settings for future photographs
223. hoose Edit Custom Tags from the list of EXIF information you will see the contents of that file open in a text editor 1 Go to C Program files LUmaPix FotoFusionv4 2 Open ExifTags xml in Windows Notepad for instance 3 Add a line for each custom tag exported by the importing CD For example here is an existing tag description lt bitspersample gt lt ui gt BitsPerSample lt ui gt lt property gt 0x0102 lt property gt lt bitspersampl e gt e lt bitspersample gt is the FotoFusion tag identifier e lt ui gt describes how that tag is displayed to the user e g in the tags gt button list in the text editor e lt property gt indicates the tag ID that FotoFusion will look for within the image file when asked to display this tag 4 When you have edited the file to add an entry per custom tag save it and restart FotoFusion 5 If it s working correctly you will see your new custom tag appearing in the list of available exif tags in the text editor and you will be able to create child text for an image frame that displays the information as text information on your FotoFusion project Font Attributes The appearance of text within text frames can be changed through the Text Editor Double click on existing text frames to launch the Text Editor or change the text at the time the frame is added to the canvas Note you can multiple select text frames hold Ctrl on your keyboard and all changes made in the Text Edi
224. i Ta a la j mal o LEE LEE If you have launched unpurchased dotScrap material on your canvas you will see purchasing information on the bottom right hand of the Create screen meea e oo ee a Create screen and a watermark will appear at the bottom of your canvas to ensure that you know that unpurchased material is active in your project Click on the shopping cart icon to purchase the material you will be redirected to the LumaPix store to confirm and complete the purchase You will use credits to unlock the content see below for details Once purchased your items will appear under the Purchased tab in search hovers You can launch a search hover containing all your purchased items by clicking on the FILE menu s Open My Purchased dotScrap item All purchased items are now part your permanent collection available for multiple reuse and will automatically be available if you reinstall FotoFusion on a new computer dotScrap Credits New FotoFusion Version 4 activations will have 20 free credits to use 1 credit is worth approximately 1 USD we chose credits to reflect FotoFusion s international user base After these are depleted you can choose to purchase additional credits by clicking on the 2009 The Marketplace 245 Shopping cart icon There is no obligation to purchase additional credits you can continue to use the free and purchased materials you already own or use graphics from other sou
225. id license limits 14213 e Images with auto rotate EXIF flag no longer slow FotoFusion down 2417 e Users with passwords containing non alphanumeric characters can now reactivate normally 17277 e Thumbnails containing high res png images no longer display artifacts 17373 e Various language translation issues resolved 17041 17525 17864 18051 18046 e Email support option now requires valid email address 17769 UI e Refresh issues with large thumbnail previews in Marketplace resolved 16709 e Toolbox no longer gets stuck in invisible state 17169 e Start Zone no longer gets stuck in blurred out mode 16932 17008 e Shopping cart button now showing unpurchased content notification only when 2009 280 YearbookFusion User s Manual necessary 17195 17240 e dotScrap items launched on canvas no longer creating ghost frames in the Tree view 16888 17160 Yearbook Features e Panels sometimes hang off safe area 17666 e Publisher s build now stores list of known schools enabling offline work 18136 18222 e Importing new PSPA data now clears previous imports 17108 17274 17352 17353 17355 17630 e Restoring yearbook archive now replaces current database 17076 17079 17096 e Modifications to student database now correctly reflected when project opened by different users 16954 e Project save is now forced prior to upload to publisher 16411 e Reconnected missing images for panel imag
226. id appears click on the Configure section of the Panel editor hke F T bm om Q MES Changes to the panel configuration are made in the Panel Settings editor which is composed of four sections 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 323 ABGOEF TEF Tr 4 E Da TEF Hamiti Widin 1 Columns 4 frase we Row S Fraa il o 0 125 Frames Gais v Last Row Gutte Top 215 Bottom 0 35 Guter QAS Edge 0 45 biks Labak Panel Postion Frae Iraga Checks Cimon Pamit Ercec hs Note At the top of the hover you will find a drop box that defines where you are making changes to the panel This requires that the PSPA has been imported and the panels are populated and sorted into groups You can then choose if the entire panel the groups or only one group will have the changed applied to it For instance in the example list to the right we may wish to configure the three panel groups differently eg larger frames per page than the rest of the panels Choose the target groups one by one and Frames to change the size and spacing of the panel frames Layout to define the alignment of the panel Locks to prevent or enable changes to components of the panel and the Remove Knockouts button Jory ating to Ar Panels 0 Apply settings to Us sel of Groups Group Admin Goun Darroch Toun Germir ET H bert Soups Lavelle Group Mondry rel
227. if you have your canvas set to double page spread the alignment tools will respect the center line For instance a group of images aligned to center will either align to the left page or right page but not the gutter Frame order The frames on the canvas have a depth think of them as cards stacked on a tabletop If two frames overlap one will appear in front of the other The back frame is deeper in the collage There are several ways to reorder frames on the canvas First select the frame s you wish to reorder Then with your mouse right mouse down on the selection then select any of the following options from the menu e Bring forward Send backwards the frame s are moved one step at a time e Bring to front Send to back the frame s are moved directly to the top or the bottom of the stack Or with keyboard shortcuts e Ctrl U Bring Forward 1 layer at a time e Ctrl Shift U Bring To Front top of all elements on the page e Alt U Send Backwards 1 layer at the time e Alt Shift U Send to Back at the bottom of all the elements on the page note this does not change the element or image to the Canvas Background Or select the frame s then click on the Image Toolbox and click on the ARRANGE icon 2009 The Create Tab 123 6 3 1 9 pClick on the ORDER options Arrange eles to move the selected frame ao s to the top or s to page as a group bottom of t
228. ill be able to find basic templates and contact sheet style layouts as well as decorative layouts for wedding albums portrait work and other common layout tasks Examples of downloadable templates y Cea Some templates are included with your FotoFusion license Click on the icon in the Start Zone to see what materials are included in your license Others will need to be purchased with dotScrap credits e Select album companies have included a special limited use edition of FotoFusion with their products to allow the album users to print out selected templates included with the software In this case the templates are included with the product via the Start Zone Bundled Content selection Other users will not be able to access these materials e Any page you have created can be saved as a template to allow you to reuse the layout with new images Resizing amp editing templates Some templates are locked by default A locked template will receive your custom images and text but cannot be altered in any other way These include e Ready Made Pages in the Scrapbooking section of the marketplace 2009 68 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Projects using page segments to transfer items from a design page to a final printer or render friendly section of the template e Multipage templates eg wedding albums opened with a Scrapbook Essentials or Enhanced licence If a template is not locked you w
229. ill be able to resize it as you would any other project move delete edit the frames around on the page and so on Opening your templates Open the Organizer tab and click on the SEARCH tab Under Types select SAVED WORK gt gt PROJECTS or PAGES or if you would like to use dotScrap store templates search using a keyword e g basic to get the basic templates Click on the template thumbnail to launch it Extreme users working on a multi page templates can append pages multiple templates simultaneously Select multiple templates then right mouse down on the selection Select DOWNLOAD AND OPEN or DOWNLOAD AND APPEND to add to an existing project You can also find your saved templates under FILE gt gt Open under the Templates subdirectory Saving your work as a template Single page projects can be saved by choosing FILE gt gt Save as Template from the Menu Single pages within a multipage project can be saved from the Pages hover right mouse select the page thumbnail of your choice then choose SAVE AS TEMPLATE You will be prompted to strip the image content from the page do so cautiously If you choose YES to remove the image content ALL image content including background papers will be removed This will create an empty framed template ready to be repopulated with new images Extreme users can save multi page templates saving them as a whole project or saving page by page and then append pages to a new multi p
230. image now defaults to white not transparent e Duplicate copies of smart frames no longer blurry e Image list go to page feature behaves as expected when page order size altered e Smart frames dropped on image will apply to image instead of creating a new frame e Frame size position defaults are 1 not O Png files set as image will not lose cropping when reloaded e Picking up canvas images now behaves as expected e Canvas refresh issues after turning grid on addressed e Page thumbnail refresh issues addressed Frame s show drop photo here checkbox no longer affects auto collage e Rotation handle now switches to yellow when Ctrl key is held e Canvas image pick up does not result in transparent background e Tab area now not part of scrolling hover area Undo The following undo errors have been fixed among others e matte application e refresh issues after undoing resize e image brightness blur following image swap e moving frame to new layer e canvas image drop e split image mosaic Output Printing e Email crop no longer includes overhang e PDF multi page export with doubles separate renders as expected e Warning now appears if an image file is locked by another software at render time e Never visited pages of Marketplace templates now render correctly General e False unpurchased material error message addressed e FotoFusion will run on Vista account without administrator status e Auto update seen by older
231. in the Image editor Free Premium and Purchased items Free dotScrap graphics and templates Your FotoFusion license entitles you to use a collection of dotScrap templates and graphics at no charge Essentials license holders have the basic collection Enhanced users have additional materials and Extreme users have the largest available collection YearbookFusion have a custom set of graphics suited to their particular needs No one license type has access to the entire collection To access these materials you will need to launch FotoFusion with an active high speed internet connection Learn how you can download dotScrap items for offline use The list of material will grow with time and will be updated automatically as new material is uploaded to the LumaPix server You can access this free material in two ways Free content via the Start Zone Under the Start Zone click on the Bundled Content icon button to open the list of available materials Hover on any thumbnail to see a larger view 2009 242 YearbookFusion User s Manual Leo ge Bo pede a By bl h eed IT a T 8 2 ies lio a p i o _ am nH ie gy aim Fc a ip bmm Sri E o 0 ee ee m am u T io oe E ee To add any item to your project click on it Individual embellishments frames mattes papers will open directly on to your canvas Templates and projects will prompt you to close existing projects Free conte
232. ing font files over an existing text frame 17369 Yearbook Fusion issues were also resolved in this build 17358 17330 17364 17365 17376 Released January 12 2009 Version 4 4 build 53729 New features Performance e Enormous speed improvements for search hovers e g frame paper e Project download now much faster 2009 Reference 281 e Organizer keyword entry optimized 15245 e Memory used even more efficiently 14192 e Font size marked as resize to fit do not exceed optimized for performance 15091 New Thumbnail Tile Details mode added to e Organizer 15324 e Images hover 14577 e File gt Open dialog 7774 Text Editor e Dragging the T icon in the text toolbox interactively adjusts text size Ctrl dragging adjusts text border size 14365 14608 e Frame alignment option added 13676 13951 e Dashed outline option added 13991 Canvas settings editor e Cover Sheet option added configurable width for front flap back flap spine 7306 e Set gutter edge top bottom bleed and safe with a single action 11605 Grid e Snapping and display now separate options 12957 e Grid color now customizable 14002 e Presets supported 14050 14051 14052 Editing e Image on background can be reassigned to canvas layer via right mouse menu 6263 e Frames can now be grouped with an existing group 4080 e Alpha based hit testing on elements 13348 e Behaviour of Ctr
233. ing shown Ru dhol echriba ube and how they can be selected AuluPopulate Frame allows you to change the order and orientation of your Pre Redeye frames Phatibe Cutie Image allows you to change the attributes of your images Text allows you to change the attributes of your text frames Dropper allows you to pick up and drop images from the canvas Editing includes controls over the way snaps work magnetic frames snap to grid turn the grid lines on or off Locate Missing Images allows you to reconnect images dropped on the canvas to the original images This is necessary if you have moved the files from their original location and FotoFusion cannot Paye canvas background the frame Lavers properties and text items erate hee F Project shows project settings l Text form factor insertion of a new project Dropper Editing b 2009 The Basics 37 render or print them at a good quality AutoCollage Sparse AutoCollage AutoJumble AutoDistribute and AutoPopulate will perform automated actions on your canvas layout Fix Red Eye Enhanced Extreme Yearbook only will open an application to desaturate red eye problems Matte Cutter Enhanced Extreme Yearbook only will open an application to extract a portion of your image into a custom made Shape HELP Licensing activation and learning tools Help will launch this user s manual LumaPix Support will allow you
234. interruptions of network connectivity or a USB drive which can be unplugged At the end of the import YearbookFusion may show an error message The message relates to incomplete data related to certain images YearbookFusion will prompt you to check the Organizer tab in the buckets to see which files have missing information Here is an example of a message received after importing FotoFusion has found a few problems in the import and organized the affected photos in the Organizer to allow you to manually fix the data Dit Linge Fae i T euch pce ml F phai wore nma ce lant rere a FURSA HFA Babee Pl os ele Poe Sate a J EN Poe Thee ising fare Deer Gace i Each 3 Misia ey we ae acinar ane ae Fiend ir Pec dl enced aed ee eth Coe es een eect thee eed i ch Coke i ihe Ogee the fl ae egy F see Peer Lil or Peet fee Fede Proceed to the next section to learn how to use special yearbook features in the Organizer and learn how to import your images into a panel page 18 2 1 1 1 Editing data in the Organizer After importing your PSPA CD images and data FotoFusion will display the results in the Organize tab If the PSPA data was well formatted with all required information completed there will be no problems to report You may however wish to verify the data to ensure that there are no spelling mistakes in names or that individuals were properly assigned to their groups Be sure for instance that names have not bee
235. ion O Version 1 1 Version 1 1 provided significant upgrades to the output options in version 1 0 including e Comprehensive support for sharing collages by e mail o Collages embedded directly inside the e mail message rather than as an attachment o Original photos can be attached automatically resized and compressed e Completely new tool sets o Ability to publish collages as HTML web pages o Integrated FTP client to upload collages directly to a web server can also save collages as a set of local HTML files for further editing using FrontPage or Dreamweaver o Descriptive text for each photo which appears in e mail or web page output o Hyperlinks from each collage photo enabling viewers of e mail or web based collages to click on photos and follow links e Improved printing support o Unique print pre visualization tool shows exactly what each page of a multi page poster size printout will look like re Credits and Dedication This software is dedicated to our spouses for their unfailing support and enthusiasm Thank you for making this possible We hope you enjoy using this application as much as we enjoyed building it Images in the user s manual kindly provided by David Ziser Kent Smith Stephen Eastwood and the LumaPix Staff The LumaPix Team YearbookFusion Special Features Building on FotoFusion s digital image layout technology YearbookFusion offers a revolutionary new method for yearbook creation Designed to work
236. ion Version 3 is no longer available for purchase Version 3 users who purchased on or after Sept 1 2006 are covered by LumaPix 90 day purchase protection policy You can upgrade for free to Version 4 Simply install and activate FotoFusion Version 4 on your machine with your existing user id Version 3 users who purchased before Sept 1 2006 can purchase an upgrade at a discount Visit www LumaPix com to purchase a Version 4 upgrade license Reinstalling and multiple installations Reinstalling FotoFusion If your computer has ceased to function or you are moving to a new computer you can reinstall FotoFusion at no cost If you are replacing your existing computer and will be giving your old machine to another person please uninstall FotoFusion from the first machine after reinstalling Users who initially purchased a licensed copy of the software that was bundled with a custom graphics package eg the SEI QVC bundle should install directly from the cd All other users can install from our website NB Before performing major system maintenance or transferring the software to a new machine archive any projects you wish to transfer to your new machine If you do not archive your projects into the scrappackage format your original images will not move with the project and will be only available in a low resolution format To download and reinstall FotoFusion Version 4 from our website visit www LumaPix com click on the
237. ion of this product and this community Thank you for your interest and your involvement in the FotoFusion story Enjoy The LumaPix Team Covered by U S Patents 7 403 211 7 573 486 7 565 618 Other patents pending Learning Materials This User s Manual is the most complete resource available to teach you every feature in FotoFusion We do our very best to keep it updated with every new release of the software Even minor changes will be documented and a new version will be posted for automatic download on your system The User s Manual can be transferred to offline computers The download is located on the LumaPix website http www lumapix com web_downloads downloads_helpfiles shtml in both html format to save to C Documents and Settings YOUR USER NAM Application Data and as a pdf version A web based version is also available on the LumaPix website http www lumapix com web_onlinehelp online_help html There are many other sources you can consult to learn to use FotoFusion most of which require an online connection Why are these materials dependent on an internet connection e The download would be very very large Users on slower internet connections or with limited memory space on their computers would find the file size unacceptable e Like the User s Manual we update our teaching materials when we release new features If the user interface changes even a small amount many of the tutorials may be aff
238. ion will warn you if this may occur when you drop the images and will offer to make a local cached version of your images to prevent this from happening in the first instance e If your original images have been renamed or deleted you will need to redrop new copies of the images Renamed images cannot be recognized as the equivalents to the thumbnails Deleted images obviously cannot be found at all 2009 The Basics 53 4 3 e If you have moved the scrap project file to a new computer without archiving it you should return to the original computer and archive the project Archiving bundles the project instructions with the original images into a scrappackage format When restored on a second machine FotoFusion will save the images into new directory and maintain the links required to output the project What is the Dropper The Dropper Images Always at Hand When images are dragged into the collage they are attached to the cursor like this A imp me oT ss mm a ot l foo Po fis aie Eug HE fis This is the Dropper It indicates e which image is about to be dropped the baby in the chair in this case e where the picture will be dropped directly above the point of the tan cursor e whether that picture will appear as a new frame or replace the contents of an existing frame a new frame in this case e how many and which pictures remain to be dropped 8 pictures in this case e w
239. is important that the data be corrected for the images appearing in the buckets In some cases the student may be placed in the correct class but not have their name listed on the page Even worse the student may not appear in the yearbook at all if for example they are missing information about their grade and or teacher Since the panel pages are most commonly created by sorting student photos by grade and teacher YearbookFusion ensures that images missing this very important data are brought to your attention before the panel pages are created mm cr ma FA R m Pa A oy Tri f ipara Grate fun tet L egermpes oh imagen ju mageri 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 313 Properties To add or correct data click on any bucket to view the images it contains Grade 10 amp When the images in the bucket appear in the preview area Tarhan Bares i select an image to see the data associated 4 This information will be displayed in the Properties area at the right of the screen ie You can select multiple images at once by holding the control key on your keyboard and selecting the images or by Wicie Hane drawing a marquee over a selection of images or by clicking vaki Yearbook fy on Ctrl A to select all images in a set This will allow you to amp correct common missing information such as the teacher s Period name Track hol Cenarti
240. ites Once these steps are understood you can become more creative in your presentation and style For example here are a few basic interpretations of the collage just made Image editing with other applications Editing a rendered canvas All users can export flattened files directly to an image editing software such as Photoshop Choosing to render to an external editor This will allow you to make global changes to an entire composition or work on spot editing Note FotoFusion Extreme allows you to export your files into a layered psd format which you can open in PhotoShop All elements on your FotoFusion collage will be rendered to separate layers in the psd allow for individual image color correction Editing images while working in FotoFusion When you drop an image onto the canvas FotoFusion does not open the image up in full resolution 2009 Image editing with other applications 263 It creates a low resolution copy of the original Because of this FotoFusion allows you to to add dozens and dozens of images at one time to your canvas If you need edit an image you have dropped on the canvas you can open it directly in a graphic editing software make changes then auto update your copy in FotoFusion without having to rebuild a collage from scratch This is useful if you need to affect the image in some way that FotoFusion does not Support for example paint out some dust or remove blemis
241. its Bary Cracks Hury Nena SS Saree te SS ae Click on the BUY CREDITS button to launch the Store interface and select the Subscription option 2009 246 YearbookFusion User s Manual 12 2 et sij EJE F pir HUN rh at E bai si rh ied i Se ed ogee npon f prp 11509 ucun gebagan After purchase your credit card will be charged on a recurring monthly basis If you do not use all 20 credits in a given month the balance will remain on your account If you decide to unsubscribe write to support a lumapix com to request cancellation You will keep all remaining credits but your license will revert to its original status and free graphic content associated with the upgraded license will be watermarked once again What are Smart Elements Smart elements are features enabled by dotScrap technology These elements can be used either on all digital layouts or as printed elements combined on paper scrapbook projects Smart Frames FotoFusion s border option allow you to place a variable width solid colored border around your frame Smart Frames take this one step further allowing you to drop images into specialty decorative frames which can be dynamically resized to fit your image Resize smart frames in the same manner as you change the FotoFusion default border You can increases the border width as well as the length and the width of the frame The frame s patters and textures will change appropri
242. jpg files to the C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion V4 Tiles folder then tag them in the Categories option of the Organizer to make them accessible when Searching and in the Image Editor 1 As above select an image frame to reveal the frame toolbox 2 Click on the Image control to open the Image Editor 3 Pick a tile from the list of tiles al Dath Pwiri jpg 4 Adjust the size opacity and Opacity blur of the tile by dragging the controls in the Tile section of the image editor Tiles can be used to create texture in empty image free frames such as in the example below Be sure to uncheck the Show Drop Photo Here when Empty box Here is an example two frames with background textures have been used to showcase an image You can also apply a background texture to an image reducing its opacity to allow both the image and the texture to be seen simultaneously In this example the two background textures from the previous example have been applied to images at a reduced opacity 2009 148 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 3 3 Use Canvas as frame background In the Image editor you ll find a checkbox item for Use canvas as frame background If you have tried to use this feature on a frame that contains an image you will not see any change or effect This feature will ONLY work with an empty frame It transforms the frame into a lens that mirror exactly what is underneath it
243. k 315 tranferring images 117 Transfering images 117 Transfering Project Files 233 Transfering your work 207 Transferring Projects to another FotoFusion user 233 translucent border 150 tree 17 101 Trim 272 Trim lines 89 True Type fonts 172 turn off guides 111 turn off snaps 111 Turning layers on and off 100 Tutorials 3 26 two page spread 89 two page spreads 17 typical work flow 20 U unconnected images 51 Undoing a group 123 ungrouping frames 123 unlocking 6 9 unlocking a panel 305 unlocking panel text 305 unlocking text 305 unregistered 9 upgrades 6 uploading to alab 207 uploading to an album maker 207 Uploading to your publisher 338 Use printer color profile 217 used images 43 used images list 236 UserID 9 User preferences 53 79 262 User preset 84 users 224 using categories 191 using credits 241 Using custom HTML themes 194 Using Frames 106 Using other graphic resources 249 using templates 66 Using the mouse 107 Using the tree 101 _ version 12 Version3 17 Version 3 projects 226 2009 354 YearbookFusion User s Manual Version 3 7 17 Version4 17 Vertical orientation 115 videos 3 viewing images 184 Viewing originalimages 160 Viewing the Canvas 97 vignettes 131 W wallet size 43 walmart 14 Watermarking 176 Watermarking at export 176 Watermarking with text 176 watermarks 9 194 199 Watermarks email 194 Watermarks web publishing
244. k on it An example use of a banner would be to have recipients of your emails click on the banner to visit your site The Link field allows you to specify the address that the banner should link to e g http www WEBADDRESS com The Text field contains the text that will be shown in a tooltip when the recipient rolls their mouse over the banner The Place Banner Outside Collage checkbox allows you to control whether the banner will lie inside or outside of the embedded collage Themes Email amp Publishing Themes FotoFusion allows you to modify the templates used by Email and HTML publishing to get a look that matches your web site or personal preferences FotoFusion is bundled with several themes which can be changed on the Watermark Banner Theme tab e Standard displays your collage with a plain border on white e Black with Grey Frames displays your collage with a black background in a grey border e Minimalist displays your collage on a white background with no borders or other information Contact Sheet see referring article e Album Preview see referring article Changing the theme via the Watermark Banner Theme tab will change the way your output is displayed adding background color and borders around your images To change the theme click on the combo box in the Watermark Banners Theme tab under the Email or Publishing tabs Atum Preview Fileck sath Guna FraAs Contact wl Three
245. k on the gt button to the right of the upload button and choose Login Now Enter your User ID and Password Step 4 Upload your layout Click the button You ll be asked to describe your layout 2009 226 YearbookFusion User s Manual 11 hl sk bid Eee of re Laer Pe tua a The Category choice allows you to pick a location for the layout to be placed into The Title will be shown under your image in the final gallery along with the Description Keywords make it easy for people to find your image based on words that you think describe your layout s contents When done press the Process Files button Your image will be uploaded into the gallery you chose File amp Project Management This section will teach you how to e Save your collages so you can work on them later load them back into FotoFusion and remove unwanted projects from your system e To archive your projects to transfer them to other computers and users e To search for materials you have created e Learn about important folders related to FotoFusion on your system including the Project Database Saving loading and deleting projects Saving your work in FotoFusion To save a project either to preserve or to work on at a later date e Select Save ey from the Tool Bar or e Press Ctrl S on your keyboard or e Go to the top menu under FILE and select SAVE If you have not already na
246. kesale gen 4 10 m 2009 304 YearbookFusion User s Manual ways e If your team is working in a computer lab you may find that working off a shared network drive works best All users will save their project to a common shared directory and find folders containing candid photos and other graphic sources in this same location e If your team is working from various locations home school library internet cafe etc without a network projects will be saved to your local drive then transferred to the project manager by archiving them An archive creates a scrappackage file which contains all the source images and project recipe that can be sent to another user to be restored in tact on a dvd or memory stick The project manager can restore the archives and insert the resulting projects into a master project e If your publisher has provided your school with Remote Storage you will be provided with the option to save projects to a LumaPix network server All users with a high speed internet connection regardless of where they are physically located can save their projects to this shared server storage space Remote storage will allow you to make and delete folders and rename and delete projects iaermenoreuna 5 T ST ce q Please select where to lock for projects Toucan bek For prapta hom your AA hard Grieve cr bor propects from thet remote shorage sereer Locally Look for projects saved on
247. kground 93 background canvas 43 Background color 144 Background fill 144 background image 43 Background opacity 144 Background texture 93 Background tile 144 backgrounds 102 Banner 176 Banner layer 176 banners 194 199 basic guide 23 Batch processing 207 Black amp White 141 Black amp White and Sepiatone 141 Blank frame 106 blank page 64 Bleed 272 Bleed area 89 Blue exterior handles 47 Blur 126 141 162 bmp 207 Border 126 127 272 Border attributes 127 Border color 126 Border Options 127 Border width 126 Borders 41 126 Brightness 141 Bring forward 122 Bring to front 122 bringing content offline 102 bringing in images from the web 43 browse 43 69 browsing 69 browsing to a different folder 69 Buckets 184 188 Building custom mattes 134 bundled 14 Bundled Content 25 26 241 business enhancers 199 Buy Now 9 buying 9 buying credits 241 buying dotScrap 248 buying Fotofusion 6 12 buying kits 248 buying templates 248 C C My Documents My Collages 229 C My Documents My Pictures 229 cameo 17 Canvas 100 272 Canvas border 93 Canvas color 93 Canvas Grid 89 Canvas guides 89 Canvas image 93 Canvas matte 93 canvas settings 82 84 canvas size 69 79 82 84 Canvas Size Limitations 79 Canvas text 164 Canvas texture 93 Canvas toolbox 58 93 Canvas tools 79 categories 191 2009 Index 343 category 191 center 120 Center guide 89 center horizontal line 120 c
248. l A Select all has been modified if item is selected like items are selected it all like items selected then remaining items are added to selection 13614 e Autopopulate sort options exposed in toolbar 3325 e Editor preset options renamed for clarity and now include apply settings to this page all pages e Keyboard accelerators added for Go To First Page ctrithome and Go To Last Page Ctri End 6215 e Search results automatically swap tabs to those that contain results 12816 e Frames can be interactively reordered by dragging the Arrange icon in the Frame toolbox 3808 Output e ICC profile support available for PSD output Extreme only 12291 Start Zone e UI unified to common interface tabbed options e Support email form automatically adds FotoFusion installation information e Marketplace retooled to better reflect store content e Learn and Support options added Bug fixes Many minor issues addressed including e Naming a file type jpg and choosing file type psd in output tab no longer produces problems 4839 e PSD export will not be reported incompatible by some versions of Photoshop 12774 e Hovers now reliably stay open when you roll over them for the first time 14945 2009 282 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Autocollage now only affects currently selected images not entire dropper contents e Crash when accessing folder with many auto rotated images fixed 15063 Marke
249. layer editor 100 order of frames 120 ordering frames 122 Ordering options 120 ordering the panels 333 organize 188 Organizer 17 184 272 310 organizer tab 38 43 Organizer 191 193 Organizing my computer 229 organizing the panels 333 organizing your work 226 Orientation 217 Outline 172 Outline color 172 Output 206 Output tab 38 Overlay 100 overlay file names 236 overlay image info 236 Overriding snapping 107 P page down 180 page hover 177 page layout guides 220 page number 167 page numbering 167 180 page segments 220 page size 17 82 84 page sizes 64 page up 180 Pages hover 177 Pan handle 112 panel frames 322 panel header 331 panel labels 330 panel locks 322 panel object 305 Panel Page 305 panel population 333 panel set grouping 333 Panel Settings editor 322 panel spacing 322 panel text 330 panel title bar 331 panel width 322 panel s image grid 322 Panning 112 panning an image 41 Panning the Canvas 97 Paper Digital Templates 17 paper management 220 paper scrapbooking 17 papers 102 241 Parameter 272 parameter values 59 Parameters 59 password protection 226 Paste 272 PDF 17 207 213 Photoshop 93 134 262 Picking Up Images 43 53 pie 26 pie shaped dialogue 26 pinned hover 38 Pinning a frame 113 pinning editors 59 png 134 207 Populate Panel 305 populating 333 populating a panels 333 Populating your panel with images 305 Position text 171 predefined size 79 Pre
250. ld on the web site If this is your first activation create a password If you have previously activated FotoFusion you will need to include the password you created at the time of your first activation Finally give a name to your computer and submit After completing the steps you will then get back another very long code Copy Ctrl C and paste CtrlI V it back into the text document Save the document and return the file to your offline machine Click on HELP gt gt Activate FotoFusion Offline again In Section 2 type in your user id and copy Ctrl C and paste Ctrl V the very long code Click ACTIVATE NOW This will unlock your copy of FotoFusion Be sure to periodically update your software by visiting our website and transferring the lumapixsetup exe file to your offline machine Reinstalling will not affect your activation or your saved projects You will also need to download the Help file separately from http www lumapix com web_downloads downloads_helpfiles shtml 2009 12 YearbookFusion User s Manual 2 3 1 1 Save the Version 4 html file and transfer it to your offline computer to C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion V4 You will be able to access it in the Start Zone gt gt Learn area or by clicking on HELP on the menu and selecting Help In case of problems feel free to contact us We will be happy to help Which version is right for me FotoFusion is available i
251. lder is remembered between sessions really resolved this time 17386 e Rotated group of images will render to psd correctly 19021 e Split cover pages render with front cover back cover in file name 19022 e Preview rendering of a file does not require valid folder path to be specified 19279 e jpg files cannot be rendered without file name specified 19461 General e No crashes on single core machines 18886 Print preview displays panel pages correctly 19227 e File gt New will display only 10 page thumbnails per page 19490 e Hover layouts persist between tab switching 14649 e Hover behaviour corrected when pinned or docked 19325 e Color management settings appear as button on toolbar 19159 e Color management settings persist between sessions 12645 e Page thumbnails refresh as expected 19107 e Form factor will persist between saves while running as trial 19125 e Memory leak fixed 19398 Yearbook e School combo box is sorted 19003 e Accented uppercase characters do not break database 19465 e Add student to PSPA import will copy image to PSPA folder 19087 e Yearbook publishers can designate master archive password for all clients archived 2009 Reference 277 projects 19079 e Yearbook Publishers have all tabs available regardless of user preferences 19214 e Yearbook panel pages will resave project correctly after missing images reconnected 19133
252. le athe Set Click on New Attribute to add a field to the column then type in the attribute you wish to add To remove an existing field highlight it to remove it then click on Remove Attribute The changes will be reflected in the Organizer after your data is imported When you are finished adding the required information click on DONE You can now use the Organizer to add or edit data associated with your image set using these data fields Customizing the look of your panel Panel pages can be customized before or after the pspa cd has been imported There is no predefined order for applying attributes to your panel you can add 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 319 backgrounds before or after adding an empty panel and you can change the look of the panel frames and text position before or after populating the panels with images However if you are using a template ie one of the Yearbook sets you will need to open the template page first and then configure your panel on the template itself Background options Use a solid color or add a textured paper from the Paper hover on the background of your panel page Add a background color or texture before populating your panels sot the design element will carry across every page of the panel set If you want to make each page of the panel set different first populate the panel and then custom tint or apply a different background paper to every pa
253. lertihremectierkte reside Gal This will bring you to e The LumaPix website e The FotoScraps Forum a place for FotoFusion users to gather to discuss techniques answer challenges and learn together e The FotoScraps Gallery a gallery of FotoFusion imagery for you to contribute to e The LumaPix Support Site Frequently Asked Questions database and Support Ticket System News recent updates from LumaPix Other sites a list of friendly sites that we tip our hat to click here to request membership in this list 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 5 2 2 Introduction to FotoFusion V4 FotoFusion Version 4 represents a major development in the FotoFusion story Conceived initially as simple image layout software to make collages from a set of images FotoFusion has now evolved into a sophisticated tool for professional photographers digital photo enthusiasts yearbook publishers paper and digital scrapbookers and crafters of all kinds Version 4 0 marked the launch of an innovative concept the dotScrap format dotScrap allows users to download templates and decorative elements from top designers leading album manufacturers and paper scrapbooking companies Digital scrapbookers and pro photographers are able to enjoy creating completely original works of art or use elegant templates Custom yearbooks can be created from templates and thematic embellishments Paper scrapbookers and crafters can benefit
254. lient choose to flatten the projects The quality slider determines the size quality of the pdf document When sending to a commercial pro printer choose Layers and Vectors if requested by the lab Publishing to your web site FotoFusion includes an integrated FTP client and allows you to publish your collage directly to a web site as an online photo gallery If you wish to publish the files without ftp ing them to your server directly click on PUBLISH TO LOCAL FILE tab which will render your files locally To Publish directly to your website First you need to have e The name of a server to which you will publish e A login ID and password Go to the Publish tab Publish to Web Ste publish to Local File Drees Cruelty O Wiater Becerra T P Publis ty Lene albu Sor er Licogerh Ii Pairing Fildes College Hane Enter your login information for the web site and choose a folder and name to store the remote file under Once you have published a collage to the web it will appear in the list of Published Web Collages allowing you to quickly review work you have already done The important decision of whether or not to include original images should be made at this time In addition to the file name published original images will contain the FotoFusion frame number for easy reference purposes 2009 The Output Tab 215 You can choose to publish now or choose additional options on the Image Quality
255. ll scatter to avoid the frame 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features AAAA MAANA The first section allows you to configure the way your panel is populated more details on this in the section on populating and sorting your panel The second section allows you to change the way the panel looks overall The third section allows you to change the way the image frames look in the panel This is the same as the same set of controls as the Frame editor for any image dropped on your canvas except that the attributes you choose will be applied to all images frames eg all will have round mattes all will have thin blue borders etc Read up on the frame editor s features in the main section of this manual 321 2009 322 YearbookFusion User s Manual Focusing on the panel s attribute options you can reconfigure the way the grid of image frames appears by choosing the Configure section a aie Cel F pa E _ _ Sm ar Piz S of the icon change the panel label text by choosing the Panel text portion of the icon m him E EEE Ee im m a Secs an or change the panel title bar options by choosing the Header text options E iiai F ii Urz Be ol 1 j AF E i i a A new set of drawers will open on the Panel hover for each of these selections 18 2 1 2 1 Panel configuration options To change the way the panel s image gr
256. ll show all page sizes available with your current form factor This may include only one option for Essentials amp Enhanced users or several such as cover sheets album two page spreads sheets etc for Extreme and Yearbook users depending on your license type Dimensions If enabled you can add custom dimensions and choose your units of measure Click on the Get From gt gt button to choose from four settings desktop wallpaper email printable area and printable area centered which will size your canvas based on your computer s particular settings Resizable If checked the canvas will display blue bars next to the ruler top left side f J These can be dragged to resize the canvas dynamically If unchecked your page will be unresizable from the canvas itself ideal to prevent accidental enlargements Orientation is currently disabled this feature will be unlocked shortly 2009 86 YearbookFusion User s Manual Form Factor Change the form factor in use for the project or click Manage to create new or edit existing form factors see below Choose Remove to type in your own custom sizes Printing Zones If not predefined you can choose a safe and bleed value which can be applied to all four sides or individually to separate sides of your page Fit Frames If you are using a template or have begun to design your page you can choose to Fit Frame When FotoFusion resizes your current proj
257. locate an item This can include colors themes object types or file names The TYPE section allows you to further refine what you are searching for for instance mattes kits or templates papers or smart frames The PUBLISHER section shows who has made the content Rating will allow you to find items of a particular quality For instance Enhanced and Extreme users may choose to rate their images in the FotoFusion Organizer to find the better quality images more quickly You can also look for items only on your local system My DATABASE on the LumaPix server and or in an active kit Use these options in combination to broaden or restrict your search accordingly for instance e Keyword purple will generate a list of all content that has been keyworded with this as a primary color so you will see a lot of papers and embellishments and some templates e Keyword wedding and Type Embellishments Decorations will generate much smaller list of graphics only e Type templates will show all the templates available e Type templates and keyword wedding will show only the wedding templates Here is an example of a particular search Whereas a search for ALL CONTENT Type Embellishment Papers tagged tagged with green yields many more with keyword green yields several results results 2009 The Create Tab 105 han am it ne ae fa until reas E Henn hui T Pe pits LE ere Pui
258. m There is no predefined use to your FotoFusion creations a registered copy of FotoFusion allows you to send your artwork by email to your web gallery to your local desktop printer or high end studio printer or to any lab be it an online photo developer or book publisher your local copy shop or professional printing facility The choice is yours original composition or template your graphics or dotScrap Marketplace items output format s 2009 YearbookFusion User s Manual 2 3 FotoFusion helps you get the job done with elegance speed and creativity Licensing Installation and Purchasing FotoFusion Version 4 runs on Windows XP Vista and 7 including Intel Macs running Parallels BootCamp or VMWare and a copy of Windows There is no native Mac installation at the present time Windows 2000 installations may require an update to Service Pack 4 To resolve problems with gdiplus visit http www umapix com web_downloads downloads_win2000gdiplus shtml for more info Trial Mode FotoFusion will be in TRIAL MODE if you have just installed it from a cd rom or by downloading it from the internet Until the software is activated all output prints exports published layouts will be watermarked Exception FotoFusion Lite a version of the software bundled with some printable paper albums This version of the software will allow you to print templates on your local printer unwatermarked If y
259. m Attributes selection reflects the Attribute Set chosen at the time of import Additional data fields can be added at the time of import through the Manage Custom Fields option on the import 2009 314 YearbookFusion User s Manual window The attributes can also be changed after import by clicking on pen next to Custom Attributes cre which will allow you to choose a new Attribute Set or Manage Custom Fields 18 2 1 1 1 1 Adding and removing students after import Adding new images to the imported pspa set If you have received a second PSPA CD with retakes or portraits of students missing from the original import you can import the second CD in the same manner as the first CD but choose to append the records to the current database Portraits that are not on a PSPA cd can also be added Open the Organize tab and click on the Source tab top left Locate the image s that you wish to include in the database Select the image s then click on the Add student button at the top of the Organizer The image s will be moved into Bucket 1 click on this bucket at the top of the Organizer Select the image s either one at a time or as a group then use the Custom Attributes area to the left to add the necessary data linked to these image s the student s name grade teacher grade etc Some fields will have drop box selections e g teachers grades while other information will be typed in manually
260. me way as the standard FotoFusion text editor feature Read on these options in the Text Editor portion of the manual Some features may be disabled as they do not apply to panel text 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 331 Advantied Features Lavoni Acgicmemenie Munthe sre ea Ls IL DOG Be OO The panel label shadow can be turned on by selecting the text shadow option in the Panel hover a E T Most of the time the shadow should be kept off to keep the text clear 18 2 1 2 3 Panel header text options To change the panel header title bar choose the Header text options ae ii e f Fra T Ee s m l fa ee The header will only be visible if you choose to GROUP your panels after they are populated Learn more about grouping in the Population amp Sorting section The Header is a title bar that appears over each section of your panel The Header Settings editor allows you to specify how and where the title will appear The Type drop box gives you the choice to turn off the header none only use the group s name or if the page runs over more than one page specify a continued text item Alignment specifies the header s alignment to the Cont Text Cored gutter or the edge to the center or always on the right or left side of the page The Con t Text allows you to decide what text will appear on the panel s over run pages You can leave it as is
261. meaning it is taller than it is wide on to a canvas with a landscape aspect ratio meaning it is wider than it is tall the image may be cropped strangely with important parts of the picture cut off or out completely To fix this you will have to reposition the image using the frame handles The image will only move to its maximum height or width so you may not be able to achieve the effect you want Transfer the image to a large frame on the canvas in this case and resize the entire frame to crop the image more appropriately Refreshing the canvas Occasionally while creating a collage you may need to edit one or more of the images with using a graphic design program such as Photoshop or Corel Draw If you edit the original image files in a program external to FotoFusion and save them you should refresh your canvas to update the images to their new versions 2009 The Create Tab 97 6 1 4 1 To do this press the F5 key or select REFRESH PHOTOS under the VIEW menu item All images in your collage will be re read from disk and reprocessed to reflect any changes Please note that if you saved your photos under a different name after editing them you will have to replace the existing copy on your canvas as FotoFusion will not be able to recognize the new file name If you do not swap images then your output will be a Significantly lower quality Also if you have moved a file from one folder to another on your co
262. measure of the size of final output If you create a 10x10 collage and go to the output tab you can do this e Set the DPI to 300 and geta 3000x3000 image e Set the output resolution to 5000x5000 and have the DPI field update to 500 A number from O to 100 indicating the quality of image desired when saving to the JPEG or jpg format As the quality increases the file size grows you need to find a balancing point between acceptable image quality and the size of the image in an email or web page 2009 274 YearbookFusion User s Manual 16 3 Copy A standard computer technique for precisely duplicating information 1 Select the object e g highlight text with the mouse 2 Press Ctrl C This will copy the selected information to a clipboard for subsequent pasting In FotoFusion you cannot use Ctrl C to duplicate images The shortcut is Ctrl D duplicate Paramete A value that can be edited such as the r blurriness of a shadow or the color of a frame border Typically you set parameter values using an editor Paste A standard computer technique for precisely duplicating information 1 Select and copy an object e g text to the clipboard 2 Place the cursor where you want a copy of the object to appear 3 Press Ctrl V This will paste the selected information from the clipboard to the location specified in step 2 In FotoFusion you cannot use Ctrl C to duplicate images The sho
263. med your collage you will be asked to name it You can save your file to any directory on your system It will be saved as a Scrap file format which can only be reopened by FotoFusion Version 4 on a machine activated with your user id Choose Save As to save the project under a new name if for instance you were editing a previously saved project and wish to keep both the original and the new version Do not use Save As if you are simply overwriting the current file you are working on you just need to SAVE Ctrl S it 2009 File amp Project Management 227 Inexperienced computer users may wish to read the following chapter to learn about basic Windows file management to understand files folders and other organization matters Keep in mind that a saved collage is a composition and not a regular image file it is a recipe without original images used to recreate your layout If you want to fully back up your files or transfer them to another machine with source images you should archive your files If you want to share your work with others you should export to a flat file such as a JPEG image or archive your file for another FotoFusion user Extreme users can save multiple pages in a single scrap file You can also choose to Save As Template this will prompt FotoFusion to ask if you would like to retain image content in your project or discard it e If you choose to remove the photos
264. mium 241 preset size 64 presets 59 62 Previous version updates 17 Print preview 217 printable albums 6 2009 350 YearbookFusion User s Manual Printer 217 purchasing credits 241 Printer Page Segment 272 purge store content 237 Printer Page Segments 220 printer friendly 216 E Q 7 printer page segments 216 onang AN quick start 25 Printing a large canvas on printer sized paper 220 printing ata lab 207 printing over sized projects 216 R Printing the canvas at 1 1 217 Printing to fit on a single page 217 ranking 315 priority 315 Ranking individuals within a panel 315 pro 250 Rating 193 pro labs 206 Ratings 184 193 pro photo 250 ready made pages 66 Process 207 reassemble multi sided projects 216 Processing pages 177 Reassembling a project on a new page 220 Product 82 84 rebuild project database 237 production 251 Recently used file list 32 professional photographers 20 reconnect missing images 51 profiles 211 reconnecting images 51 project 250 Red Frame Number 51 project database 237 Red Number 51 project folders 229 Red Green and Blue Values 141 project settings 79 82 84 Red Green Blue 144 project size 79 82 84 Red Eye 156 Project Type 79 82 84 Red Eye Removal 17 projects disappeared 237 Red Eye Removal Tool 156 proof book 76 Reference 265 proofing 236 250 258 reference copies 160 proofs 236 258 reference frame 120 protect files with a password 226 Reference images 160 262 Protecting layers 100 Refe
265. move all the images in the bucket click on Remove All button to empty the bucket Cy Bket w TRemove Dropptd i Tmages e Drop images on the canvas click on the Begin Dropping button C lket t w Remove Dropped i 2 Images e To pick up images on the canvas click on Pick Up button on the canvas 2009 The Organize Tab 191 7 3 Buckets tad Fa On 5 fieket v Remove Dropped Tages 0 e Click on Puchet to change the bucket currently in use not available in Scrapbook Essentials e Check Removed Drop to eliminate the image thumbnail from the bucket once it has been added to the canvas Turn this feature off to maintain images in the bucket even after they have been used If used once a checkmark will appear next to the thumbnail If used more than once the thumbnail will display the number of times the image has been dropped into the project e Click on the Rotate icons to reorient image so they will drop in the correct orientation on the canvas Buckets fot ee GRT Bokt Remove Dropocd GO cm You can also click on the AutoCollage button to place the contents of your bucket onto the canvas at once ensure that the Include Items in Bucket 1 option is selected A uniig A i Aererele n ima CLAE lr a bei cil ara gma ur arene ae iunii baige 4 ogen hendy Leese E tacki Seh fer Siha Sat bar Borden Dioni So s Jumble O Maintain Aspect Sparse Rever
266. mputer you will have to reconnect the effected images To do so go to TOOLS on the menu select LOCATE MISSING IMAGES and specify which folder the image s are located You can also edit images in an external utility while directly working in FotoFusion Selection navigation and layers Zooming and Panning the Canvas will teach you how to view your canvas more effectively Selection Tools will teach you how to select items on your canvas Working with Layers will explain how to use the layer editor and features in FotoFusion Zooming amp panning the canvas There will often be times when you want to zoom in on the canvas to see areas in more detail For instance if you are working with very small frames you will need to get closer to them to effectively use the handles and other features If you have a three button mouse you can do the following e Zoom Roll the mouse wheel e Pan Press the middle mouse button or wheel and drag the mouse If you prefer to work with the keyboard you can do the following e Zoom Tap the and keys on the numeric keypad e Zoom Hold down the Z key press the left mouse button and drag the mouse e Pan Hold down the Space bar press the left mouse button and drag the mouse e Reset Press Alt A to frame the entire canvas You can also click on the Canvas Tools button which will open a series of viewing options Canai Toi Toi th Bdul ihe Gadi bak GO Gseom Scale U4
267. n or all like type pages Choose Project Settings to change the size of entire project this allows you to pick a new form factor that will define how all pages in your project will be set eg all album sides two page spreads and covers within an album project will conform to an album printing company s preselect sizes The Manage Form Factors option will allow you to create new form factors page sizes presets or edit existing ones Canvas Settings ARFA AHE Hasat Zen Canter iw Renze Canvas to Fit Colage Mike Canes Troaanerit iake Camas vill whe Make Canvas Black Lana Fil Properiess Dainas Setlirae Project Settings Manage Harm Pto ihl Selir arlo Image Lins Rau Franses Page humber bry Laskote Pages Auto Pea Ate PADA Canvas settings allow you to make changes to the specific page size and guidelines of the current page or all like typed pages eg all 2 page spreads Note you can also open this window by double clicking on the blue bar over the ruler s edge 2009 The Create Tab 85 a 7 7 Canvas Settings Paga Aum Sade l2 s 12 tush sf widhi Heng e Resmable Oneristior T orm Facto leran 10x10 Pimleg Zoet se G bP pP b E ae ae he ae j T e i 1 a F m oi bpe F ae The Page information displays the currently selected page size and type and dimensions Page Type This drop down list wi
268. n User s Manual 2 The Pages hover Click on the Pages button to open the Pages hover Dock it by clicking on the pin icon Ba F Fit E F eat en i n E an E B Be ae Ex z i Gm ra E r 8 ran N ma A a n Pe a ae ram You can aoe z Add new pages Prais DF s or append pages from previously saved work A z piiak or duplicate pages iE s k a i e Es fi E D Bo E or move pages up and down the stack BA i 4 or delete pages g 8 Note deleting one page from a panel group will delete the entire series of the group Changing the page type 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 303 To change the page type right mouse select the page thumbnail The available page types allowed by the form factor will display and allow you to select the type Single page Double Page Spread Cover etc Keep in mind that panel pages can only be made on Album sides 18 2 Managing your yearbook project YearbookFusion can be installed on up to 40 computers activated with the same user id and password which will allow all team members to open each others projects There is no one right work flow for creating a yearbook project Some yearbooks are created by a single individual on one computer others are created by a group of people working in a shared computer lab and others are created by a group of people working in vario
269. n added in all caps An import with critical missing data have been placed into buckets in the Organizer which will allow you to easy identify which images require more data to be associated with them If all data is present you will not receive any error messages 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 311 T euch iar et F badita ere mange Frat cw last rare That Feet hue eee placed or sachet 1 EDaJenD Sale elie oF ee i Thee isin haere beer Glace os Beach 1 React ay i ec ae ee Peed ii Fecal tected eel ee pa Coem be paded Seat tf eee ie eich Each a ee Seer Chee PB ee eens gece bhia liegt or hiet rine Hands Ca In this example FotoFusion reported that 7 students were missing names first last and 1 student had no grade In order for the panel pages to be generated correctly it is important that this information be completed This is done in the Organizer 1S Ee SESS eer ee ee pcg Spe here gt s a ot ol m u Lre i ome LS So Em rm eT te i PER ee am Hili 1 T a ay a The Organizer is divided into several sections 1 On the left hand side you will find SOURCE and SEARCH tabs These work in the Same manner as a standard version of FotoFusion An additional tab SCHOOL allows you to sort your school images and data so only the information you wish to see is displayed in the preview area In the School tab click on the
270. n either a drag your selection to the Windows task bar at the bottom of your screen This will pop up with a list of open applications Drag the selection to the LumaPix FotoFusion button on the task bar the FotoFusion application will appear b while continuing to hold the left mouse button down press and hold the alt key and tap the tab key on your keyboard This will pop up a window listing the open applications on your system Keep tapping the tab key without releasing the alt key until you see the FotoFusion application highlighted when you release the keyboard keys the FotoFusion application will appear 2009 The Basics 47 4 2 2 Bringing in images from the Web Enhanced and Extreme versions only Images used in some websites can be dragged into FotoFusion Currently this feature is only available in Windows Internet Explorer This is useful for for example building websites that point to other websites To accomplish this simply drag the image from the web page into FotoFusion Be sure that the IMAGE tab is selected not PAGES or SETTINGS or the image will not be dropped You will probably want to set the default DPI for the canvas to 96 Some images will not work as they are embedded directly into the webpage and cannot be selected Non Internet Explorer browsers eg Firefox Chrome may also prevent this feature from working Now what Now that you have pulled images into the coll
271. n on any hover dock and then choose Layouts 2009 The Basics 41 4 2 Pint cf Lean Save fe Fananie CAGE Ds Pisani hari You can add the current layout Save As Rename or Remove the current layout or select a saved layout What is a Frame On the FotoFusion canvas each image and text item lives within a frame When you pick up and move an image on the canvas you are really moving the frame The frame pulls the picture or text along with it like an object nested inside a box Frames can blend together colors images and tiles background textures with varying opacities Image frames can have borders drawn around them and use with mattes and gradients to produce different edge effects Image by Stephen Eastwood Frames can have text attached to them Enhanced and Extreme versions only 2009 42 YearbookFusion User s Manual Image by Kent Smith Smart Frames can be downloaded and applied via the Search hover These frames have dynamically resizable borders which can be manipulated in size and thickness to suit your image Some contain layers to make your image appear old wrinkled or distressed in a variety of ways Image by Kent Smith Text Text attached to the frame 2009 The Basics 43 4 2 1 Image The photo held within the frame Border A rectangular border around the outside of the frame A border that cuts away the im
272. n three basic licensed versions Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced and Extreme FotoFusion is also available in a Lite version unregistered and as YearbookFusion for yearbook publishers amp schools The Scrapbook Essentials Edition includes all the basic features useful to scrapbookers and digital photo enthusiasts Essential users can render canvases up to 2000x2000 pixels and print to 12x12 on their local printers Text on canvas is supported Multi page compositions are only supported if the user has downloaded a pre made locked template or paper guide Essential users are able to use the organizer to categorize images and projects but not assign keywords and ratings The growing list of free graphic content available to Essentials users is available on the LumaPix website click here to view The Enhanced Edition includes several features that are not available in the Essentials version which are useful to very serious hobbyists and pro photographers Enhanced users can render canvases up to 3900x5700 pixels and print to 13x19 on their studio or home printers Text on canvas and text on frames is supported but multi page compositions are only Supported for downloaded pre made locked templates or paper guides Enhanced users are able to assign categories keywords and ratings to their images and projects using the Organizer The growing list of free graphic content available to Essentials users is available on the LumaPix website cli
273. nail Check off AUTODUPLICATE PAGE Alternatively you can right mouse down outside of the main Canvas area and checkmark this option Next retrieve a group of images You can do so via the Images hover the Toolbar s browse for images icon or images you have pre organized into Buckets in the Organizer Multiple select the images Ctrl A to select all and drag them onto the canvas so the image thumbnails appear in the dropper Click on the AUTOPOPULATE gt button which will start the AutoDuplication process Your images will be inserted into the empty frames on the template then the same layout will be replicated over and over until all images in the set are used The last page will most likely contain an empty frame or two so you may choose to manually delete these empty frames AutoFlip Extreme and Yearbook only The Pages hover enables you to flip layouts automatically or per page This feature is useful to create mirror image pages or repurpose template pages in different arrangements To access flipping options right mouse select any page thumbnail You will see a list of menu items including flipping options 2009 78 YearbookFusion User s Manual Turn on AUTOFLIP LAYOUT to automatically flip your composition left right when the page is duplicated or moved down the stack Albin Sede Ahum Taste Piet eead Jesel Lover Sa y Ahi Sede 11 7 ST eat Left Sije af Fight Side
274. nd other image options When you click on the Image Quality tab you will be presented with several options ee Ereg bes u ki pimmee l O ee Page ede erraia treir page Page mben eee eet pee Ep eee gee arn Lite aly Cone Lik y Fire ey PT ery Lee oe ee oo Co ce cee op ea e rs ce wi bipi gimir Lap oS Cot oe Pee ee el Fin Saber Man Saar lpn am b fe ETJ an om Chad ae ii iy a aik Estima cdl fir hire ot beig amni a Ti E Bere Dar Bae rr i g m lear uae mak I a E E r lem Fi E M l Ma aN e a oc are Des ed Lee im Cale ar oan Aad Elir ee rags an Shii Eee eae Pd Ciemi ae ie bis You can set the image quality used for both the collage and the attached originals or manually enter the pixel size for the image We suggest leaving the Default settings If you have set background to canvas color enabled the color of your canvas will be used to set the email background color We recommend keeping the Sharpen Reduced Images options on at all times to ensure your recipient will receive the best possible quality of image For your cropping options change the drop box option You can RENDER CANVAS ONLY will cut away anything outside of the edges of your canvas leaving only the portion directly on the canvas This is useful to keep on in case you have dropped an image outside the canvas However leaving it off can create an interesting effect if you have elements hanging over the e
275. nent _ If one images is selected it will appear in preview and the information associated with the file will appear in the Custom Mii amp Attributes area Multiple selected images will display no Priceity preview but show common attributes assigned to the group Fir ceaprs In the example shown to the right the student does not have any information under the Last Name and First Name fields If this information is not added the student will not have a first name appear next to their photo in the panel pages Notas Pincha rich To add the missing information simply type in the appropriate empty box You do not need to hit Enter or Apply the information is added immediately and will save in YearbookFusion s database The information will still be present the next time you launch FotoFusion When all the missing information has been entered empty the bucket by right mouse selecting it then choosing Empty Bucket The Properties tab works for any image or set of images selected be it in the buckets or the entire image set ora Sub selection of the image set as defined in the School tab to the left Please note the changes made in YearbookFusion s Organizer ONLY apply to the computer they were made on The information does not over write the PSPA CD and is not transferred to other computers using the same image set As such panel page creation is best done on one computer The attributes listed in the Custo
276. nging the defaults in the frame and shadow editor p n Fi You can change any editor to your own custom choice temporarily or permanently To create a new default first change the editor settings on a selected item For example make a new border default in the Frame editor or change the Shadow editor settings 2009 The Basics 63 When you have changed the editor parameters to your liking click on the Preset button at the top the editor This will open a list of choices Se os Pret Opan Prasak Save Setong As Def auk For Hew Frames Update befaat hor Mew Frames Automa ah Resture To Fachory Setilu Restore Al Frames On This Page To Factory Setting Hestore Al Hames On Al Pages To Fattar Setings Fopy Selling To Al Frames Oi The Page Copy Settings To full Frames On Al Pages elect Al Frames PRESETS e Save as Preset Current values are saved under a name of your choice This option allows you to create a gallery of editor presets e Open Preset Allows you to select a previously saved presets The presets are saved in your C My Documents My Collages folder as a scrap file You can delete presets from Windows Explorer from this location NEW DEFAULTS e Save settings as default for new frames The current settings are reset to the new default permanently All newly drawn frames on the current project and new projects will have these settings e Update default for new frames autom
277. nhanced and Essentials users working with multipage templates from the dotScrap marketplace This is the main Printing Options window displaying a multipage project Extreme only Click on the More gt gt button to view all available printing options if you do not see the options to the right side of the window Frimiinpg i plies To Port Reuse ong F rey Bidas Mi ard Genie on parted pense 2 ALCS Dea Ag p Bea Tiapierg Co Praia Ulss pme paio igor Haped Petr L Hira Paga Pae i a h Coe a i Ba bee uera bo afl ort Deia imapa irie Printing Single Multiple Pages Multi page projects will display in column of thumbnails to left The thumbnails that will be printed will display a checkmark Turn the checkmark off to remove the item from the print job You can choose to print the All Pages or print like size layouts eg 10x10s then 20x10s within a single layout Clicking the All button will select every page in the list Current will select the page currently loaded on your Create screen 2009 218 YearbookFusion User s Manual Previewing Output To preview your printed output choose meien This will result in an onscreen preview of your printed output While previewing several new buttons appear at the top of the page which allow you to e Print what is being previewed e Go to the next previous page if your license enables you to make a multi page project
278. ns and in Canvas and Project Settings areas You can choose anything you like a name of a new album company eg ABC Album Co or your own personal group eg JSmith s Custom After entering this information you will see that the Product drop box will now display your newly entered product name and the Manufacturer will be set to User Presets e Enter the Page Descriptor Information set the page type the dimensions and the printing zones bleed and safe zones 2009 The Create Tab 89 6 1 1 3 e Save the new preset e If you would like to enter additional page types under the same form factor click on Create New Page Descriptor e You can also rename or delete form factors and page descriptors from this editor Resizing the canvas to fit the collage If your page is resizable you can resize it to exactly fit the images on the page This can be done directly on the canvas Right mouse click outside of the canvas and choose Resize Canvas to Fit Collage This will crop or expand the canvas to hold all frames currently on the canvas without rearranging them LumaPix welcomes the addition of new album manufacturer presets to this list Manufacturers of albums are invited to visit our website to learn how to submit specs for inclusion in FotoFusion s presets at no charge Inclusion of manufacturer presets does not constitute explicit endorsement or a stated preference on the part of LumaPix to its user
279. ns now available Redesigned Data Management e Saved projects now have no dependencies on the central database renaming copying and deleting projects now handled as regular Windows files e Create All in one archives including source images e A list of all images used in a project can be exported to a text file Delivering Content To You e The promise of the dotScrap library is being fulfilled with more top notch content including contact sheets albums and basic templates e Content is easier to find and use than ever before Business Development e FotoFusion Lite is now available for bundling with your albums cameras printers 2009 288 YearbookFusion User s Manual and software Fixed Bugs e Fonts existing in Windows font folder as shortcuts now supported e Bold and italic text simulated when no font file is available Exif tag editing information updated High res download of content on server Memory leaks for V3 projects resolved Memory leaks for V4 export resolved e Single database in charge of library queues e Project database now resaved after rebuild e AutoJumble does not resize frames e V3 project with locked text will open correctly in V4 e Undo image applied to canvas frame now works e Windows 2000 now supported e Save As will not allow same name as existing file e Left side windows can no longer be reduced to 1 pixel in width e V3 pixpacs will now open in V4 e V3 templat
280. nt via the the Search hovers On the Create screen open any of the Search hovers eg Search o hframes Pagers Click on the he button then type in any keyword of your choice or to display all You can also type directly in the text bar which shows the currently defined search Use keywords such as color or theme eg baby wedding birthday soccer Change the TYPE option to refine the type of content you wish to see for instance Type Parts mattes to generate a list of mattes or Type Embellishments Decorations to see decorative clip art or Type Templates to only show templates not embellishments Click on the FREE tab to view all items available at no additional cost 2009 The Marketplace 243 prem Free content in the Marketplace Free templates can be found in the dotScrap Marketplace which you can access via the Start Zone Any template that is free to use with your license will display a free with banner on the large thumbnail preview of the item s Fi dagiti chit yuda y 2009 Premium purchasable dotScrap materials Other templates and graphics are available as Premium add ons requiring you to use dotScrap Credits to unlock them for watermark free output Premium items can be found in the dotScrap Marketplace in the Start Zone or in Search hovers under the Premium tab 2009 244 YearbookFusion User s Manual Eiq ee jE o Bi ET i
281. o export friendly pages and 1 printer friendly page Ea a ah 2009 The Output Tab The designer in this case has created a template containing empty frames so that it can be reused with new images repeatedly The page to the right shows the design page this will not be printed or exported so it can contain instruction or variations of a single template In this case both sides of the card are being designed at the same time though they will do not need to be printed or exported at the same time The canvas size of this page is not important but the size of the actual card on the page very important as this is the element that is going to be transferred to the final pages to be printed or exported To create printer page segments draw a frame drag with your mouse on the canvas while holding the S key to cover one of the regions to be transferred to a new page You can also choose the Insert menu item Reference Region gt Source to add the adjustable frame over your canvas Adjust the printer page segment to cover the region precisely Once the areas have been defined you can copy the segments to another printer or export friendly page in the following manner If required add a new page to the project at the dimensions required On this new page right mouse down on the canvas and select NEW RENDER SEGMENT from the top of the drop down list Alternatively use the Ins
282. o move the image to the canvas as a normal frame right mouse select an empty Space on the background image and select Set as Regular Frame After you have brought the images into FotoFusion the next step is to e drop the images onto the canvas OR e drop the images into existing frames OR e add blank frames on the canvas to hold the new images and use AutoTools to automatically place the images on your canvas The Images Hover Whether you are building a new collage from scratch or adding pictures to an existing collage you will need to select pictures on your computer and bring them into FotoFusion 2009 44 YearbookFusion User s Manual You can open a file browser window by clicking on the 19 hover Specify the location of the files you wish to view by clicking on the arrow next to the file path name atirei and meingi Me Documents Hy Pi St Wanay P PAMAT Be oa Pa Acree Turina a ee _ Brg Dl eG a Select the images you wish to use images in the browser hold down the Ctrl key to click on more than one The selected images will attach themselves to your cursor ready to be dropped this is called the Dropper 2009 The Basics 45 TH DT Di ppa Ami Fer i T rpn SAA prep Wati eet Hih iy a tan i a D Sh SS i in Once you have ad
283. o start a custom job From the Start Zone click on the AutoCollage button 2009 Pro Project Tutorials 253 Run through the AutoCollage Wizard see related article here Select as many or all images in your event and add them to the dropper On the Creative Options tab be sure to specify the following e Multi page Set the IMAGES PER PAGE option to the total number of pages you will require in your album minus the front and back pages The first and last pages are album sides or singles not doubles and usually will feature portrait shots that do not follow the sequence of the album So if you want to make a 40 page album create 19 pages 40 minus 1 cover minus 1 back page then divide by 2 for double page layouts Timeline Sorting Sort by EXIF Date Time Providing that the date amp time on your cameras are set correctly this will order the wedding to the flow of the event On the Canvas Size Options tab set your page size eg a 10x10 album will be 10x20 and set the page to ALBUM TWO PAGE SPREAD You may wish to RESPECT CENTER LINE so no image straddles the gutter and add Safe or Bleeds You can also use the Album Manufacturer Presets click on the arrow next to the page dimensions Hit OK to generate your fully populated 38 page album in seconds with the images flowing across the pages in order of the event Edit your album page by page adding any creative embellishments eg backg
284. oard Hit Control Home on your keyboard to go to the first page or Control End to go directly to the last page of the project The Pages Hover To create or edit a multi page project other than creating a multi page AutoCollage click on the _ hover Extreme and YearbookFusion users should see by default the Pages hover in the bottom hover dock If you do not see it click the icon next to any of the three hover docks to turn on your Pages Hover You can move the Pages hover anywhere on your canvas and change the shape of the hover window Dock the Pages hover by clicking on the pin icon top right of the hover to keep it open permanently Punic Se Coat Pan owerlay Caritas it Dari Cre Pret caret At The Pages hover will display a thumbnail view of all your project s component pages and give you the ability to manage these pages Ea Ema ES F EIE tes Prt n ran y Pen j Pag E re E a E Moving up and down pages To move from one page to another simply click on the page thumbnail in the list of available pages You can also press the page up and page down keys on your keyboard to move through the stack one at a time or you can hold the Control key on your keyboard and use the mouse wheel to move up 2009 The Create Tab 179 and down You can change pages by using shortcut keys in the pages hover hold Ctrl Shift N to go to page and type in a page number To change
285. ocess your collage FotoFusion returns to the original images to collect additional information creating the highest quality for your output FotoFusion can only output your project by maintaining a link from the reference image on your collage to the original images If you move or rename the original files on your computer you will break the link between the reference image and the original image and FotoFusion will not be able to gather the full image information to create high quality output Click here to learn more 2009 22 YearbookFusion User s Manual A session with FotoFusion usually follows these steps 1 Start with images from your local disk downloaded from your digital camera or images you have scanned e No steps required you don t need to import your images into the software or pre process them into a new format They can be retrieved as is from your drive 2 Automatically create a starting point for a collage From the Start Zone either choose e AUTOCOLLAGE to automatically arrange images on your page 1 Choose your images 2 Select your Creative Options 3 Set your canvas size OR e Start from a Blank Canvas and bring images in from your computer OR e Use a template from your collection or from the Marketplace and drop your images into a pre arrange layout 3 Finalize your tmage selection Add and remove images and text to get the final collection of elements you want to dis
286. ocollage and background images o AutoCollages can now include gaps that reveal an image set as the canvas background e Color Shadows o Shadow colors can now be set to any value e EXIF enhancements o New EXIF tags were added including filenames without extension e g Anna instead of Anna jpg o Filenames now preserve their case when displayed as EXIF text e Common sense o When processing to a file the default file name now corresponds to the project name o The file name is not cleared after each preview when working in the process tab o Frames that hang off the canvas edge are drawn with a border to make them easy to find o Cropping is preserved when images are swapped between two frames or AutoCollage is pressed again o Double clicking on a text frame now opens the text editor e Minor issues o The canvas no longer allows the user to resize it inside out o The canvas tile can be set at all times o Bad refreshes when panning very large collages have been fixed o The color in email backgrounds now matches that in the create tab o The edges on images drawn without borders are now smooth instead of jagged o The color editor text edit fields behave predictably o Thumbnails for PNG frames now appear correctly when dragged to the canvas o Splitters are now below all other handle Version 3 0 Version 3 0 was a massive upgrade with two models STANDARD and PRO and the most radical changes to the user interface since the first version Th
287. of scrap elements NOTE These tips do not apply to the CANVAS BACKGROUND frame Unless your canvas is exactly the same aspect ratio as your image part of the image will be trimmed You can resize the frame to expose the image but you will have areas of the canvas that will be blank Respecting Aspect Ratio when AutoCollaging When using the AutoCollage feature you can choose to turn on the maintain aspect checkbox This will place all selected images on the canvas without cropping them Because FotoFusion cannot crop the images there will be empty canvas space around the images unlike an AutoCollage that does not have this feature selected Locking an Image s Position If you do not want your image to be moved from a particular location on your canvas select the Image frame and right mouse down to expose a list of options Select LOCK POSITION You will no longer be able to move the image but will be able to edit and resize it Reselect the right mouse option to uncheck this feature Note AutoCollage overrides Lock Position Locking an Image s Rotation If you do not want your image to be moved from a particular rotation select the Image frame and right mouse down to expose a list of options Select LOCK ROTATION You will no longer be able to rotate the image but will be able to edit and resize it Reselect the right mouse option to uncheck this feature Note AutoCollage overrides Lock Position Locking an Image s Size If
288. ojects to your publisher s server You do not need to configure anything to send the files the software provided to you by your publisher will have all the variables preset to send your projects directly to their server Under the File menu choose the UPLOAD TO PUBLISHER option YearbookFusion can send projects to be send as flattened files eg a jpg a tiff a pdf as per the publisher s preference or as a complete project images project recipe If you see only one option then your publisher has chosen this method as the exclusive upload method If you have two options ask your publisher which method they prefer Flattened files will take less time to upload but the publisher will not be able to make any corrections to the project Uploading can take quite a bit of time and is dependent on the speed of your internet connection your publisher s server and the size of your project Be sure to consult with your publisher first regarding file naming norms and other information you need to provide to them to ensure your yearbook is put together correctly Other output options Some publishers will allow YearbookFusion to output projects locally email direct upload to your own website printing on your local printer or outputting to a file eg jpg To learn how these features work please consult the relevant section in the main FotoFusion user s manual 2009 340 YearbookFusion User s Manual
289. on Example B shows the same effects with a color added to the border Example 2a 2009 The Create Tab 151 Example 2b Example 3 Frame is set inside a translucent border Same as Example 2 except Frame Editor Fit Image off Example B shows the same effects with a color added to the border Example 3a Example 3b 2009 152 YearbookFusion User s Manual Example 4 Empty frame used as design element Blank frame added to canvas hit INSERT on the keyboard OR draw a marquee with your mouse while holding the F key on the keyboard Frame selected right mouse down and SEND TO BACK Frame Editor Border is off Image Editor RGB sliders moved to Example 4 provide color Show Drop Photo Here box unchecked Example 5 Empty frame used with a matte Same as example 4 with addition of Frame Editor Ellipse matte added to background frame Shadow Editor Shadow turned off Example 5 2009 The Create Tab Example 6 Empty frame used as line Same as Example 4 with Frame Editor Border added Border tinted Image Editor Image Opacity 0 Shadow Editor Shadow turned off Example 6b shows the frame displaced off the canvas edge to give the appearance of a single line Example 6a Example 6b 153 2009 154 YearbookFusion User s Manual Example 7 Empty
290. once per computer First insert the CD into your computer then launch YearbookFusion After closing the Welcome screen or the Start Zone YearbookFusion will display the Create screen where project editing occurs A blank page will be featured do not open or start a project before importing the data To import the contents of the CD to YearbookFusion click on 4 icon This will open the Yearbook hover Click on the Yearbook PSPA import button to import the student database from a PSPA E ppr E cd This will open a standard browse window Navigate to your CD drive You will see something resembling this window 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features Look rv E YeaboskPSPAS amele s osem 307 ge em jon E into Txt z Decking oc 9017 003 oe 1004 oe yt os Ono igang Go 007 Gaw a 21008 oe eee feo Com 010 Cees mi awh iE Loca Dik igor a 013 ove ip cu 0 DA CVO RAM Cools CF oer Txt Dive Fis pama w Fides otiype SPA Ire Fler THT Find the file named INDEX TXT and open it This is the data file that contains the information required to associate the student portraits to data related to the student YearbookFusion will then display the following window 2009 308 YearbookFusion User s Manual Import Hah i School Hrass ard Midde StA0 I Gi Yea f E E Delite lignes header ine Dupes C Comme C integtate
291. ookFusion User s Manual Consult the section entitled Changing the Default Settings to learn how to reset your editors to your own specifications Multiple Selection FotoFusion does an excellent job of handling multiple selection you can select several frames add text to them all with a single click and then change the font for all text without breaking stride You can select all items on the canvas simultaneously by hitting Ctrl A on your keyboard or by clicking on the Selection icons on the tool bar peran e n pu H a The Select All Items Icon will select all like items on the canvas as the one selected item eg all image frames all text frames The Le Selected Item button will present a list of frame types to choose from You can manually multiple select items by holding the Ctrl key as you click on the items you wish included in the group Once you have finished selection items the appropriate dialogue box will appear e g frames text etc and you can begin editing the items or you can copy paste or duplicate the items 4 5 1 Creating new editor defaults and presets When you use FotoFusion for the first time each editor has a default setting For instance the default for a new frame will produce a frame that resembles the frame below thin white border small offset shadow with the default settings appearing in the frame editor Perhaps you would prefer the default to be no border and no shadow This can be done by cha
292. oose among them when importing PSPA database 16338 e Default form factors determined by publisher association 16893 e Publisher specific form factors displayed for their clients only 16107 e Publisher specific preset searches clip art papers frames now available 16961 e Yearbook Toolbar streamlined down to single button 17885 e Panel text can be protected from changes or unlocked for manual changes 16755 e Panel size position can be protected from changes or unlocked for manual resizing rotation repositioning 17574 e Students can now be excluded from panels e g witness protection programs 16224 e Images with empty data fields at import time are now collected into named buckets for correction 15827 e Custom attribute sets can now be created at import time in Organizer and when populating panels 17587 17586 17587 17642 e Custom text qualifiers now supported in PSPA import 17639 e Append option at import now prevents duplicate file names in database simplifying conflict free reimport 18660 e School and custom attributes now available from Text tag menu 17461 e Overlay image info now available for panel images 17594 e Publisher build includes Admin tab giving access to rep admin web page 18671 18645 e YearbookFusion trial now accessible from Run As dialog 17417 17685 FIXED BUGS Editing e Matte cutter once again available to Enhanced users 17382 18017 e Edge Gutter safe zones now sw
293. ops the image to the matte s default shape Crop controls whether the matte extends beyond the perimeter of the frame or is contained solely within the frame Photo by David Ziser Mattes versus Smart Frames A matte is a dumb graphic meaning it is a simple jpg png or emf file consisting of a black on white shape When FotoFusion identifies an object as a matte it knows that it can hold an image essentially using it as a cut out hole to display the image A smart frame is a smart graphic consisting of multiple layers and usually has a dynamically resizable border A matte is contained within the smart frame along with a Shadow and a border graphic It has been coded to behave in a particular way with multiple layers interacting together Only LumaPix can create these special types of graphics Enhanced amp Extreme can create custom mattes using external graphics tools and saving them in the C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion V4 Mattes folder You will need to use 2009 134 YearbookFusion User s Manual the Organizer to categorize them as mattes so FotoFusion will recognize them properly and apply them onto images and text ewe Forts l Framag Mattes C la Shads jse Ties Ef lya Saved Work 6 3 2 3 1 Building custom mattes Mattes are special shapes sometimes coupled with effects eg gradients or light flares which allow you to place an images within them Mattes can be defined in three
294. osen what images will appear in your panel choose APPLY If you have made a mistake you can simply RESET the panel or edit the information as required The panel will reflow and repopulate accordingly Panel Set Grouping 2009 334 YearbookFusion User s Manual Grouping is a very useful way to create chapters or sections for your panels If you do not specify a grouping criteria and choose to show ALL of the panel set you would get one giant panel including every person in the school in alphabetical order not a very useful way of organizing your book Grouping and sorting options allow you to tell the panel how it will organize itself Grouping and sorting are enabled after the panel is populated WF Pavel Set Greinping The Panel Set Grouping options use information that has ena Gee already been associated with the PSPA dataset Group by Ho Grouping By default no grouping will be set Click on the drop box to Sort by choose which field will be used to make the main groups of your panel It is important to consider that the Header text Ho Hane will display the information in this field Most of the time choosing the TEACHER GRADE or HOMEROOM field will sort your panel in a useful way You can choose to sort these groups by another field next so for instance group all the panels by the Teacher s name but sort them by grade This way all the Grade 4s will appear together organized by their teacher
295. otScrap materials Your user id gives you access to your purchased amp free content gt gt next CLEAN PROJECT DATABASE This will get rid of file fragments that are no longer in use gt gt last REBUILD PROJECT DATABASE This will locate all active project file components The length of time to run this maintenance will depend on the number of projects and the amount of dotScrap content you have used ranging from a minute to several minutes Important Files amp Folders By default FotoFusion is installed into the folder named C Program Files LumaPix FotoFusion V4 Within that folder are several sub folders that store useful things in a predictable place that are of interest to users Contains PNG format clickable Banners to append to emailed and panne published collages A collection of fonts that are included with your FotoFusion Fonts installation Any png file with a transparent background saved in this folder Frames can be dropped onto the canvas the transparent portion of the graphic will hold images and the graphic is resizable Contains the set of mattes that appear in the list of available Mattes mattes for an image See here for more details on creating your own custom mattes Contains pictures that ship with FotoFusion for learning Sample purposes Shadows Used to store jpg and png files which act as shadows Templates Contains the templates that are visible in the list of known templates when you
296. ou would like to use other creative features in FotoFusion a full license must be purchased The cd will most likely be packaged in a plain envelope and will not have a code to unlock it License Types FotoFusion is sold in three license types Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced amp Extreme If you are running a trial version and have not yet decided which version is right for you consult the Which Version section of this manual for more info Yearbook publishers are able to distribute a special version of the software called YearbookFusion This version is not sold directly to the public Buying a License To purchase a license for FotoFusion visit www LumaPix com and click on the BUY NOW link You will be offered a selection of three license types Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced and Extreme then presented with a link to redirect you to a secure online vending site Learn more about the differences in the following section Commonly Asked Purchasing Questions What is your upgrade policy 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion Your FotoFusion license entitles you to upgrade within your purchased version eg Version 4 3 to Version 4 4 at no charge These dot upgrades will fix bugs and add new minor improvements to the features available in the software When a new full version is released eg Version 4 to Version 5 upgrades can be purchased at 1 2 the full license cost A full version upgrade represents a major
297. ou drag any item from this list onto your canvas the Shopping cart will display the cost of the item You will need to purchase the item before it will be rendered or printed without watermarks i ti ie The PURCHASED tab will show any items that you have already purchased Once purchased you can reuse any item under this tab repeatedly at no additional cost A complete list of your purchased items can be generated under the Open My Purchased dotScrap items entry under the File menu list dana Fapa damai Papaj umati Papal HOE The MINE tab will show any items that you have keyworded or categorized in the Organizer that also match the search criteria Available in Enhanced amp Extreme licenses Narrowing your search criteria If the search hover has a predefined search settings such as Ame or Faoss you will see thumbnails of content under the predefined search criteria The generic a hover will show no results at first as there are no predefined searches This search hover allows you to type your own criteria to find specific content in the Marketplace 2009 104 YearbookFusion User s Manual eZ SE en Click on the search criteria itself in the hover Ms or click on the is button in the search to expand the search options Go Ary Type i Ary Pubiihi Che Frome Mu Daabare fe LomsPie Ko Type in any keyword if you wish to help you
298. ource tab 184 188 Space around the images 129 spacing all selected frames 120 spacing in a panel 322 sparse autocollage 69 spine 89 207 Spinning an image in a frame 115 split cover 207 Split dialog 117 split soine 207 Splitting frames 117 Splitting using the split dialog 117 Splitting using the toolbox 117 sRGB 211 stack 101 Standard tokens 201 Start 64 Start Wheel 26 64 Start Zone 26 64 Starting a New Project 64 Stopping restarting dropping 53 Studio 177 Style 172 subfolder 184 subscribing 241 subscription 241 support 3 Swap 117 swapped 53 Swapping images 51 117 Te tabs 17 38 Tags 102 167 target 14 2009 Index 353 Teacher first 315 teachers in class panels 315 teaching 3 Template 74 100 template sets 335 templates 66 241 248 251 335 Terminology 272 text 100 164 167 Text and Mattes 174 Text appearance 172 Textas matte 174 text descriptions 161 Text Editor 164 text labels 167 Text location 171 Text position 171 Textsize 172 texttags 16 7 text toolbox 58 Text Tools 164 The Interface 23 themes 194 thumbnail view in organizer 184 tif 207 Tile 93 272 Tiles 144 Tilting 115 tinted shadow 150 Tinting an image 141 title 315 title bar 331 to a printer 206 To delete Version 3 projects 226 to transparent 136 To view the unaltered original images 160 Toggling aspect ratio lock 113 tool tips 3 Toolbar 298 toolbox 58 toolboxes 58 trac
299. own arrows at the top of the display area to scroll through the kit The thumbnail images can be dragged onto the canvas area where they will download into full sized elements There is often a collection of templates at the final pages of the preview of scrapbook style kits launch the template pages by double clicking on them or right mouse down to see other options Once any element of an unpurchased kit is placed on the canvas a purchase notification will display in the shopping cart icon Click on the shopping cart to purchase the kit a purchased kit can be used repeatedly project after project Downloading dotScrap for offline use If you will be using FotoFusion while not connected to the internet you may want download a high resolution of your favourite dotScrap graphics amp templates This will make library content available for use offline and allow you to output high resolution content All dotScrap materials must be accessed and purchased if required while online and then downloaded for offline use There is no means to transfer dotScrap graphics from an online machine or cd to an offline machine If you are usually online you will not need to download the graphic content This will save disk space on your system FotoFusion will call up the high resolution information when required at the time of rendering your work To download 2009 The Marketplace 249 12 5 Click on the
300. own on any of the projects e Select Archive Project from the list of option to create a ScrapPackage file Archive files can be moved to another computer or external storage Open Windows Explorer navigate to the folder where the file is saved by default C My 2009 236 YearbookFusion User s Manual 11 3 Documents My Collages My Archived Collages then copy Ctrl C or cut Ctrl X your file to an external memory device Load the file to your second computer which is running FotoFusion Version 4 build 39300 or higher preferably in C My Documents My Collages My Archived Collages Restoring ScrapPackage files Click on FILE on the menu bar and select ARCHIVE RESTORE then select RESTORE PROJECT Direct FotoFusion to the directory where your file is located and restore it Your project will reopen on the Create screen Image info overlay amp Used image list FotoFusion offers two project management tools of great use to professional photographers The Overlay Image Info Feature The Overlay Image Info option allows Enhanced amp Extreme users to custom define what Exif tag properties can be displayed on their images This tool is very useful for creating catalogues or assisting communication during the proofing process for album work First define what tags you would like displayed and the attributes of the text e Click on TOOLS on the menu then select Overlay image Info
301. ows installed on your computer be it Windows XP Windows 2000 or Windows Vista Windows is an operating system it is the master program on your computer that tells the computer what to do with the other files installed on your computer Some files on your computer will launch software other files will help software perform particular tasks other files will store data such as your projects J Start To see your files click on the Windows g start button and choose My Computer or your computer s name 2009 230 YearbookFusion User s Manual This will launch an application called Windows Explorer Note Windows Explorer is different than Windows Internet Explorer which is a web browser Windows Explorer allows you to see how all the files on your computer are organized It also allows you to control to some extent where files and folders are stored on your computer The top level organization in Windows shows the different drives in your computer A drive is a storage device Your hard disk which is the main internal storage device in your computer is usually called the C drive CD drives and external drives will have their own drive letters assigned to them If you can unplug a storage device such as a USB key or an external hard drive it may not have the same letter assigned to it each time you plug it in Under each of the drives you will find folders If you can t see your folders click on
302. p credits Essentials has the basic collection Enhanced and Extreme build progressively on this content YearbookFusion users have a separate collection of items available No one license type has access to all content Enhanced Extreme and YearbookFusion users can categorize or keyword items in their personal collection in the Organizer Enhanced Extreme only to make these items searchable and appear under the Mine tabs in the search hovers A high speed internet connection is required to search for content Once located you can downloaded it for offline use learn more about bringing dotScrap content offline section of this manual However if you are connected to the internet all of the time there is no need to download the content as it is available on demand Search hover organization Click on any search hover to open it then pin or dock it to keep it open by clicking the button 2009 The Create Tab 103 You will find four tabs to sort the content The FREE tab will show all content that is included in your license type that is located on the LumaPix server Free content reflects the same materials found on the Bundled Content list in the Start Zone All content from this list can be dragged onto your canvas and rendered printed at no charge i The PREMIUM tab shows all additional content under the current search that is not included as a part of your license type If y
303. pan crop Enhanced amp Extreme users with large collections of graphic elements may wish to keyword and categorize their graphics to make them easier to use in FotoFusion to enable searching in the Create screen Search hovers and the Organizer For instance you can use the Organizer to find a collection of background papers you have collected on your computer Select the papers and then in the Keyword section of the Organizer change the Type option to Embellishments gt gt Papers These items will appear in the Create screen under the Paper hover s MINE tab You can also add custom keywords eg colors themes events or categories to allow you to use the generic Search hover to locate the materials more easily Pro Project Tutorials All pros know time is money Wouldn t you rather be shooting an extra job or shooting a round of golf than spending hours in front of a computer making layouts FotoFusion can help you streamline your studio s work flow but still provide your customers with beautiful output options FotoFusion lets you decide how much time and customization you want to put into your projects Multi page albums can be created with great efficiency using FotoFusion Extreme license holders can choose to create full albums from scratch or partially automate the design process or use templates The editing process is also rendered more efficient using FotoFusion allowing you to make multiple sizes and quick on
304. pe and border properties Mouse down and drag to change the border width click to open the Frame Editor 3 Shadow allows you to adjust the shadow properties Mouse down and drag to change blur offset etc click to open the Shadow Editor 4 Arrange and Distribute click to open the Arrange tool to position your frame on the canvas relative to the edges center point and other frames 5 Splitter Tool allows you to cut one frame into several equal sized frames Mouse down and grad to divide the frame into rows and columns click to open the Splitter tool 6 Add Text allow you to add text attached to the selected frame 7 Orient Spins and flips the frame 8 Tools Accesses the Red Eye Removal tool and the Matte Cutter Tool Extreme only 9 The Wheel Feature coming soon What is an Editor Clicking on most controls in a toolbox opens a floating editor These boxes can be moved by clicking and dragging them They allow you to easily make changes to your composition Alternatively you can access the same controls by clicking on the Settings hover which will allow you to dock the controls anywhere on your screen Here is an example of a floating editor It will display all available options for changing a selected component of your canvas 2009 60 YearbookFusion User s Manual 1 Angle O Cantrost i P C Lst Canvas a frame Bakir rid i show Trap Phata liara phar empty Things yo
305. pear You can then add images to your canvas in several different ways Having selected your images drag them to the canvas and arrange them wherever you like with the decorative features of your choice such as borders and mattes shadows text image retinting and correction and canvas backgrounds Extreme and YearbookFusion users can add pages and manage their projects through the Pages hover Starting from a Template FotoFusion allows you to use and create templates pre defined arrangements of frames that you can load and populate with your own images Users with an internet connection can download templates for both pro and craft type projects from the Marketplace A template can predefine e Canvas Size e Frame location but not necessarily the frame contents e Images effects for frames e g a template frame can make any image dropped into it 2009 The Basics 67 black amp white Background texture and color Shadow settings Text frames Graphic embellishments e g backgrounds decorations You can find additional templates from several sources e Search for high quality downloadable templates created by LumaPix designers as well as other designers and manufacturers dotScrap templates are useful for crafters and pro photographers alike and can be found using FotoFusion s Search feature on the Create Screen or in the Organizer or by clicking in the Start Zone s Marketplace area You w
306. pecific layers so that clicking on objects in that layer will be ignored For example if you have created a semi transparent text frame in the watermark layer you may wish to disable selection in that layer so that you can work on the collage beneath the watermark without accidentally selecting or moving that watermark In this example frames on the Canvas layer have been protected and thus cannot be selected by the user Layers 0080 Layer See Through Protect overlay L _ Termpdate C LI w Text C a e cots C C vicanvas C CI Click here for more detail on layers 2009 100 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 1 4 3 Working with layers A collage in FotoFusion is composed of five different layers Consult the next section on Using the Tree for an alternative way to navigate through your project Extreme version only The Layer Editor To open the Layer editor click on Tools on the menu bar and select Layers from the list of options The layer editor will appear Layers Layer Overlay _ Termplate L L l Text C jco C L Rel canvas C C C This editor helps you simplify working with dense collages You can move elements to particular layers then turn off the layer so you cannot accidentally select move or resize the element What the Layers Do Overlay empty by default Useful for holding semi transparent images which need to float over the rest your wo
307. play in the page e Click on the auto collage button located over the canvas area as often as you like to instantly rearrange your images e Add more images using the organizer or the Images button or by drag images in from local storage or web galleries 4 Arrange the images to get the composition right e Use AutoCollage AutoJumble and AutoDistribute to create an interesting composition e Swap images between frames e Crop the pictures to focus on regions of interest e Rotate and resize frames as desired 5 Adjust image quality e Color correct problems with brightness amp contrast e Apply sepia tone black and white or blur effects e Correct tilted images 6 Adjust Borders and Frames 2009 The Basics 23 4 1 e Adjust the border width color and transparency e Use mattes to produce interesting edges and effect around your images 7 Set the canvas properties e Add a texture e Set a color e Set an image as the background 8 Add Text Add text to the canvas Add text to individual frames ENHANCED and EXTREME only Size and position the text Add EXIF information ENHANCED and EXTREME only Adjust font colors sizes transparency blur shadow etc DONE Now that you have created your collage what do you want to do with it OUTPUT OPTION 1 EMAIL TO A FRIEND OR CLIENT e Choose whether or not to include thumbnails of the original images e Watermark and add
308. plication to send your projects to friends and clients OUTPUT Redirects you to the file rendering printing and web publishing screens These options allow you to create versions of your FotoFusion project which can be shared with other non FotoFusion users COMMUNITY Opens an internet browser window within FotoFusion giving you access to galleries support and other LumaPix related websites Hovers and Hover Docks Hovers are small buttons which when clicked open to a large view In general hovers allow you to preview graphic content Hover buttons can be nested in the hover docks three empty zones on the FotoFusion Create screen These buttons can be manually dragged from one hover nest to another or dropped on the area outside the canvas 2009 The Basics 39 irae Search Seling a a TL Pinning and docking hovers Hovers are designed by default to open briefly allowing you to perform a desired editing task then close immediately This maximizes the FotoFusion workspace and minimizes the clutter You can choose to keep the hover editors open for an extended period of time if you will be using them frequently eg dropping images from buckets or the image hover To keep the hover open permanently click on the pin icon at the top of the editor Poker LoWPeogiam Fikes LumaPe F ator usec af Sat Name bry pa 1 The icon indicates that the hover will automatically close when you
309. plus mouse wheel in hovers dropper preview organizer preview change thumbnail size plus button in editor all attributes applied across multi page project plus toolbox image control adjust gamma plus Alt plus resize handles ignore Snapping 271 2009 272 YearbookFusion User s Manual 16 2 Terminology Here are computer related terms that we use in this documentation Term Meanin OOOO Press and release a button on the mouse Click the left button if not specified as in right click Move the mouse while holding a button Drag down the left button if not specified as in right drag Double Press and release a mouse button twice click in a row usually the left button Move the mouse so that the pointer is Hover over an object without clicking If you have a thumb wheel on your Roll mouse roll it forwards or backwards not moving the mouse itself Here are some industry terms that you should know Term Meaning OOOO Trim The size of a canvas as it will be cut for presentation A typical business card has a trim size of 3 5x2 inches a 5x7 print has a trim area of 5 by 7 inches Bleed An optional extra space around the outside of a canvas used to overprint so that when the print is cut to the trim area colors go cleanly to the edge of the cut print The bleed size can be set to any size you like This feature is available in FotoFusion ENHANCE
310. r Zoom to Fit to display the entire page If you are satisfied you can RENDER the project to a file You have several rendering choices 1 Local Viewer versus External Viewer or External Editor When you have finished processing a composition to a flat file it is often useful to open that file in another application For example you may want to edit the file in Photoshop FotoFusion can be told to display processed output in any of the following e Local Viewer FotoFusion will display the processed image directly in Export window e External Viewer or External Editor FotoFusion will open the tool you have selected to load the rendered output and display the results there Why the split between viewing and editing Most graphics users have multiple applications installed that can be grouped into two basic categories lightweight viewers such as IrfanView which boot quickly and are designed to display images and editors such as Paint Shop Pro which boot more slowly and are designed to manipulate images with paint and other tools FotoFusion allows you to configure a set of programs in either category and pick from among those alternatives when you click Render Simply left click the button to be asked which editor you would like to send the output to if you have not configured an editor for use by FotoFusion choose manage from that pop up menu You will be asked to select an editor to use Ghuman Lilyar Pruyrae
311. r fingertips Starting points make it easier to begin projects with a particular project type or form factor in mind Red Eye Easily remove Red Eye from pictures without relying on external Removal tools Default handling Changes to frame borders text attributes etc can automatically update the default settings which are applied when new frames and text are created Improved AutoCollages can be ordered by file name file date exif date or Autocollage randomized Images can be made to fill a page or preserve their original aspect ratios even if this leaves gaps between images Organizer Find your images faster with a completely rewritten Image Organizer providing direct folder access with sorting Support for keywords categories and searching by any criteria Enhanced and Extreme version only Grouping Select several objects and group them to be manipulated as a unit with or without direct access to the group members Enhanced and Extreme only Enhanced and Extreme version only 2009 Reference 293 Tree View Your project can be viewed as a tree structure allowing you to access partially occluded objects and edit grouped objects with ease Extreme version only Page size Project pages can now be identified as cameo images two page improvements spreads or sides within an album Sides have asymmetrical gutter edge top bottom control over bleed and safe areas Album page counts take
312. r keyboard and use your mouse wheel or use the up down arrows on your keyboard to increase or decrease the size of the thumbnail view Adding Preset Hovers to the FotoFusion Workspace The hover docks contain a series of preset hover button options To add a preset hover to any of the three docks click on the button to reveal the options available Checkmark all hovers you wish to have appear in your hover docks Larig i Mije T an Phs keti Seah Tres ath Pages w Popers wf Frames Acre Templates wf Uema Chart Once added to the dock you can drag the hover anywhere onto the canvas As the name implies hovering your cursor over the button will cause it to open and reveal thumbnail images and options available within the hover Adding custom search hovers You can create your own custom search hovers in the following manner Click on the 28 _ hover and perform a search using your choice of keywords FotoFusion will display thumbnail versions of items that match your search criteria To save this search click on the button at the top of the editor to Create New Type any name of your choice for your new preset search hover The new search hover will appear among the list of the hovers that you can add to your hover docks as described above Adding custom hover layouts You may wish to create different layouts for your hover docks depending on the type of project you are working on Click on the butto
313. r photo development service will be able to print your projects Simply render them using the OUTPUT to a File feature in FotoFusion A jpg format is usually acceptable Consult your lab of choice to determine their size and output recommendations Pro photographers creating albums should ensure that the recommended bleed and safe zones and resolution requirements are met How do I find a lab or photo development service Hundreds of companies exist world wide to meet your printing needs with all variety of formats output qualities and price points Home hobbyists can choose e local photo developers or copy centers bring your rendered jpg files on a portable memory device to your local retailer e big box chains grocery stores or department stores photo finishing services often include photo books and novelty product services Bring your rendered jpg files to the photo counter in store on a portable memory device or check the retailer s website to 2009 The Output Tab 207 9 1 see if online upload services are available Online orders can often can be picked up in store or shipped to you directly online photo services and book publishers search the Web for these services Book publishing companies will most often provide a free book making software that will include some template To use your FotoFusion output in their software and bypass their predesigned templates select the template page style that allows
314. rames 102 241 Free content 26 241 FREE tab 241 Fullbeed 217 2009 346 YearbookFusion User s Manual a gallery 3 224 Gallery of Effects 150 Gamma 141 272 Generic tab 64 getting started 20 gif 207 G key 123 gradient 136 gradients 131 graphics 241 248 335 Green Frame Number 51 Green Number 51 Grid 75 89 grid lines 89 gridlines 47 89 group 258 315 331 group classmates 305 group layout 258 group memberships 315 grouped frames 123 grouping 17 331 333 Grouping frames 123 guidelines 89 gutter 305 H Handle 272 handles 41 Header in the first line 306 header text 331 hierarchy 101 Hole 126 Home Zone 26 hotlinks 161 Hover 272 hover presets 38 hovers 38 How to Frames Work 106 how to make a banner 199 how to make a watermark 199 How to save files 229 html 214 HTML custom themes 214 HTML themes 201 ICC Color profile options 211 Illustrator 134 Image 272 Image Angle 141 Image angle 115 Image as the background 93 Image Blur 141 Image Brightness 141 Image Contrast 141 Image Editor 141 image effects 141 IMAGE FRAME 47 Image Gamma 141 Image inside Text 174 Image opacity 141 Image palette 43 272 Image Size on the Canvas 53 Image Status 51 Image toolbox 58 126 141 162 Image Tools 140 images from disk 43 IMPORT 306 importing pspa data 306 Importing the PSPA cd 306 Including original images 194 index publish 214 INDEX TXT 306 Info Tip 272
315. ran Photo Hare whan open the oe Toolbox then select the Image Editor to add effects color or tiles for texture Consult the Image Editor section of this user s manual for complete details on the options available The canvas frame is simply a locked off frame like any other 2009 The Create Tab 95 on your canvas and will behave in the same Way Canvas Color To set the canvas as a solid color you can either e Drag the Red Green Blue controls directly R G B on the Image Editor or e Click on the Fill color chip the little box next to the RGB values which will open a color editor Set the color using the various controls in the color editor You can e Click on the color gradient to find a color you like e Select 100 or black via the color chips e Adjust the RGB or the HSV values manually e Use the eyedropper tool to pick any color on the screen e Adjust the lightness darkness of your selected shade using the slider bar If you intend to email this collage keep in mind that you can set the background color of the email you send to match the color of the canvas Canvas Texture To set a texture click on or outside the canvas background open the Image Editor and apply one of the preset tiles Tiles can be used in conjunction with a solid color an image or a paper Adjust the size and blur of the background tile by dragging appropriate 2009 96 Ye
316. rces When you click on the Shopping cart you will see a window that looks something like this hee Layout Tour Account 1 ites So Cres 7 00 Credits Par Crad Hury Nen Click on BUY CREDITS to be redirected to a secure purchasing site If you buy more credits the price per credit is reduced One Time Purchase The cost of the kit template or elements currently displayed on your screen will appear under This Layout BUY NOW will transfer your credits towards the purchase of the item s on your screen Once purchased this material will be unlocked for you for repeated use You will never need to purchase it again even if you change computers The purchases are tied to your user id and are purchases are recognized when you reactivate FotoFusion Note If you have purchased dotScrap material and want to find it quickly click on FILE on the menu bar select OPEN gt gt MY PURCHASED DOTSCRAP ITEMS The results will display in the Search Hover Subscriptions A dotScrap subscription adds 20 credits to your account each month and bumps your license type up by one level Essentials users will run as Enhanced and Enhanced users will run as Extreme Extreme and YearbookFusion licenses do not change Subscriptions can be purchased by clicking on the shopping cart icon bottom right of the Create Screen Current redit information will appear hee Layouts Tour Account lherncs 0 00 Crects 0 Cred
317. re the canvas ends and the bleed area starts How to Print You can choose to print centered on the printed page You can also choose to match the orientation of the page For example if you have a landscape layout say 20x10 inches and you want to print it scaled to fit an 8 5x11 inch page then you might want to print it with the 20 width along the 8 5 axis of the portrait orientation page or have the orientations match so that the 20 width has been rotated to print along the 11 axis of the page Cropping There are two options for cropping e Include frames outside the canvas If you have frames that extend past the edges of the canvas this option will expand the canvas to include those frames e A typical use is to correct for rotated frames in a jumbled collage with this option set those frames will not be cut off Note that this option will change the dimensions of your printed canvas slightly if you are printing 1 1 e Crop to canvas edges With this option set your canvas will be printed exactly to the edge of the canvas and any frames that hang over that edge will be cropped Color Profile The Use printer color profile option available in ENHANCED and EXTREME tells FotoFusion to respect the color profile currently configured for the selected printer Use the Windows printer configuration dialog Setup to select a profile If this option is not selected FotoFusion will ignore the printer s color
318. rences 262 272 protecting your work 199 Refresh 96 262 PSD 17 207 213 Refresh images 96 PSD and PDF Export 17 Refreshing the canvas 96 psd layers 213 registering 6 9 PSD templates 249 reinstallation 13 PSPA 306 reinstalling 6 9 13 pspa2 315 remove buckets 188 PSPAcd 306 removing an image from the panel 314 PSPA cds 298 removing images 314 Publish 214 Removing images from the dropper 43 53 Publishing 214 Removing pages 177 publishing to web 206 removing the background 157 purchase 9 renaming pages 177 purchased kit 247 renaming templates 66 Purchasing 6 render doubles separate 180 2009 Index 351 Rendering to a flat file 207 rendering to pdf 213 rendering to psd 213 renumber frames 51 renumbering frames 51 reorder 120 Re ordering frames 122 Reordering pages 177 Re ordering pages 177 reorienting an image within a gradient matte 141 Replacing images 53 117 replicate a pages 76 Repositioning a frame 139 Resize Handles 47 resizing a multi page project 84 Resizing frames 47 107 resizing from the ruler 84 resizing hovers 38 Resizing images while dropping 43 53 Resizing options 120 resizing selected frame to the full width or height of the canvas 120 Resizing text frames 169 Resizing the Border 127 Resizing the canvas to fit the collage resizing thumbnails in the hovers 38 resizing thumbnails in the organizer 184 resizing your canvas 79 84 Resizing your page 79 respect center line 69
319. rk or guidelines to be turned off before printing or rendering Template empty by default You can send empty frames to this layer to act as guidelines to be turned off before printing or rendering or lock off upper layer elements which you do not want to be moved while composing the rest of your images Text all text is added by default on this layer Collage all frames ie new images dropped on the canvas are added by default onto this layer Canvas the background image which is just a very large frame covering the area is placed by default on this layer Turning layers on and off Click the checkbox beside the layer name to toggle the layers on and off This will have the following effects 1 The layer will appear and disappear from the canvas 2 Images dropped into the canvas will not land on that layer if you just turned off the 2009 The Create Tab 101 6 1 4 4 top most visible layer Making layers semi transparent Making a layer see through is useful for e Seeing what is happening on lower layers e Adding a watermark to your canvas Protecting layers Protecting a layer turns off interaction with the mouse you cannot select move resize or otherwise edit frames on protected layers Moving frames to different layers To move a frame to a different layer right mouse down on that frame and choose Move to Layer from the resulting pop up menu The Tree hover Extreme
320. rounds mattes smart frames resizing the images etc Remember that you can cut Ctrl x copy Ctrl c and paste Ctrl v images from one page to another or duplicate them Ctrl D Preset border styles can be very useful to apply a common look across the album set one frame to the desired style for the album save it as a preset then apply it to all image frames on each page Last click on the Paget hover in the Create Screen to add the first and last pages to the project which should be set as ALBUM SIDES or SINGLE PAGES Bring images to these pages directly from the Images tab or remove a few particularly good portrait shots from the interior of the album to highlight on these pages METHOD 3 The From Scratch Approach 1 Organize your images Open the organizer and navigate to your images using the Source tab Select the images that you wish to use and assign them into buckets 2009 254 YearbookFusion User s Manual Assign categories and or keywords to your images This will allow you to easily find them again if you need to edit your album at a later time Example The Smith Brown wedding has been downloaded to C My Pictures June 2007 jobs SmithBrown e In the Organizer click on this folder to display all the images and display them according to Photo Date e Select ALL of the images and assign them a keyword of Smith Brown e Then select some of the images and drop them according to the even
321. rtcut is Ctrl D duplicate Previous version build history For your interest this section charts the progress of FotoFusion throughout the previous versions Version 4 5 build 60134 Bug Fixes e Matte cutter overwrites original image 20853 20133 Released September 10 2009 Version 4 5 build 59268 Bug Fixes e Bevelled frames drop correctly 20259 Released August 6 2009 Version 4 5 build 58767 Features 2009 Reference 275 e User preferences option for external editor added under Edit menu 20104 20108 e User preferences options for copying images when sent to external editor added under Edit menu 18983 e New form factors added to manufacturer s list AsukaBook Albums Unlimited Art Leather Blurb Color Portraits Entourage Georgia Printers Graphistudio US Le Cartonnage Picto Books Roshan Group Strawbridge Studios The Icon Experience Van Gogh School Portraits 18830 18893 19099 19952 19910 19864 19766 19790 20064 Bug Fixes e Output to file using same name as existing file now prompts with warning 18591 19621 e Output to file now correctly respects rendering preferences specified by manufacturer in Form Factor 19880 19879 e Bleed value for cover sheet gutters now correctly respected when rendering front back separately 19538 e Support for custom exif tags restored 19346 Matte Cutter is applied to all duplicate images 20133 e Images do not auto
322. s can help create smarter 2009 316 YearbookFusion User s Manual panels with very little effort Many yearbooks will include the teacher and assistant teachers at the front of the panel group To make the teachers and assistant teachers rise to the front of a panel in the correct order you can assign a Priority ranking to them e Open the Organizer and click on to the School tab e Find the Staff at the school Give the principal a priority of 1 the vice principal s a priority of 2 then select all the teachers and rank them as 3 Find the student teachers and or assistant teachers and give them a rank of 4 You can choose to label the students as 5 or just leave these priorities as blank blanks are automatically assumed to be the lowest rank gt Ensure that the teachers are assigned to their own class under the Teacher field When you populate your panels set the panel to populate sorting by rank then last name then first name If you have chosen to do all panels at once and group by grade you will see the images appear in the following order Principal Vice Principal s Class panels gt gt Teacher at the top of the panel followed by student assistant teachers and then students Multiple group memberships Individuals can be assigned to multiple categories at once Use a semicolon to separate the attributes For example if a student teacher works for both Mr Smith s Grade 4
323. s ready to accept an image from the dropper Note that if you are dragging images and want to create a new frame on the fly you can do so even though you have images attached to the cursor e Using the Toolbar Icon Choose the frame type you wish to create choose Image frame to create a blank frame that is ready to accept an image from the dropper 2009 The Create Tab 107 6 3 1 2 e Using the Insert button on your keyboard This activates the Toolbar Icon e Using the Menus To add a new frame from the menus choose Tools Canvas Add Frame e Using the Keyboard To add a new frame on the canvas using the keyboard press Ctrl Shift F A new empty frame will appear on the canvas Adding an Image to the Canvas To drop an image onto your canvas you can e drag an image file from the Images hover e drag an image that you have sorted in the Organizer into a bucket from the Bucket hover vl e open a window from the button in the Toolbar to select an image file e use the File menu s Add Images option e drag images directly from Windows Explorer Images will appear in a new frame unles you drop an image directly on top of an empty frame it will appear inside the frame in this case Click here to learn how to swap images from one existing frame to another Duplicating a Frame To make a copy of an existing frame be it empty or with an image contained within it then select the frame then
324. sample templates to see how these are best used FF_EMAIL_ SUBJECT Email subject FF_EMAIL_MESSAGE Email message FF_EMAIL_BANNER LumaPix email banner required in email htm for trial and Essential users FF_PROJECT_MAX_WIDTH The value of the widest element in the project FF_PAGE_NO Page number FF_NB_PAGES Total page count FF_TO_PREVIOUS_PAGE Link to previous page FF_TO_FIRST_PAGE Link to index page FF_TO_NEXT_PAGE Link to next page FF_PAGE_ DIRECTORY Directory of the image representing the page FF_PAGE_FILENAME Filename of the image representing the page FF_PAGE_THUMBNAIL Filename of the thumbnail image representing the page FF_PAGE_THUMBNAIL_INFO Textual information about a page thumbnail FF_LINK_TO_PAGE_ FF_PAGE_NO Link to current page FF_LINK_TO_INDEX Link to index FF_PHOTO_MAP_FOR_PAGE FF_PAGE_NO Unique photo map name per page FF_PHOTO_MAP The actual photo map per page FF_TO_PREVIOUS_ PHOTO Link to previous photo FF_TO_PARENT_PAGE Link to parent page FF_TO_NEXT_PHOTO Link to next photo FF PHOTO _NO Photo number 2009 The Share Tab 205 FF_LINK_TO_PHOTO_ FF_PHOTO_NO Link to current photo FF_PHOTO_DIRECTORY Directory of the image representing the photo FF_PHOTO_FILENAME Filename of the image representing the photo FF_PHOTO_DOTSCRAP_LINK Link to a dotScrap element if an element is not a local photo FF_PHOTO_WIDTH Photo width FF_PHOTO_HEIGHT
325. se Backdrop YR Poe eee e Inchade images in Buckel 1 Peery fama stings Renit Corset Line Hint you can move an image from the Images hover into a bucket too Open the Images hover select one or more images then type on your keyboard s number keys eg 1 or 2 or 3 The image s will move into the designated bucket Organizing by category Enhanced and Extreme users can use the Categories feature in the Organizer By default these options are turned off To turn on the Categories option on click on EDIT on the menu and choose User Preferences Turn on the Show Advanced Search option 2009 192 YearbookFusion User s Manual Categories can be used search for images and projects more efficiently lt a ie Crqanize Click on the tab to open the Organizer From the Source tab select the en 8 3 directory or directories containing oe e the images you wish to catalogue a TM a Fa Please note that you will need ai ee check mark each subdirectory you SRE etd wish to include Check marking an hd ene upper level directory will NOT yt Sperry display the images contained within Lhd eaten the subdirectories contained within it Next select the image s you wish to categorize By default FotoFusion contains several pre made categories for you to use You can also make your own categories Click on the buttons to view the subcategories Right mouse down on a category to
326. sers working on both machines at the same time for extended periods Activation on a second machine is intended to allow one user to work more flexibly not to enable two users If FotoFusion is run on the two machines at the same time for extended periods then in LumaPix opinion production use is being made of both by two people and a second license should be bought YearbookFusion licenses can install on multiple computers What is FotoFusion Lite FotoFusion Lite Edition is a limited use version software offered directly by some album and scrapbook manufacturers FotoFusion lite is usually packaged in a plain envelope not a cd case and does not contain a serial number or user id The purpose of FotoFusion Lite is to allow you to add your images and text to pre assembled templates and print these finished pages on your local printers The software s interface has been simplified to allow access to only the features required to complete the included templates The information contained in this user s manual is primarily targeted to fully licensed versions of FotoFusion Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced Extreme There are some sections of interest to Lite users What is a Frame Adding and Arranging Images Frame Numbers Adding and arranging images What is a Toolbox What is an Editor e Canvas Tools gt gt Selection navigation and layers Zooming amp panning the canvas Selection Tools Frame Tools gt gt Addin
327. spine back File Type The following file types are supported by FotoFusion BMP GIF JPEG PNG and TIF Extreme users have the option of PSD and PDF formats JPG is a compressed format which means that image quality can be traded off against disk space lower compression will produce sharper images and a big file higher compression will produce noisier images and smaller files Increasing the quality ona JPG export usually results in good looking images without producing a too large file Only the PNG format can write out transparency if you want to have a canvas with a transparent background do this e 1 Set up the canvas with a transparent background by dialing its opacity to zero e 2 Choose PNG as a file format e 3 Export the image as described here BMP files tend to be very large they are lossless you won t lose any quality working with this format Images in this format are typically used for work in Windows environments TIF images are more portable than BMP images but remain large compared to JPG files PDF format will create a document that is viewable in Adobe Acrobat Reader This feature available in Extreme version only PSD format Extreme version only will allow you to open your work in Photoshop and edit each element on the page on separate layers This is useful for precise color correction after you have completed your composition Please note that you cannot export any file to psd which contains do
328. ss and hold the left mouse button then drag the mouse Release the left mouse button when you are satisfied with the new location for the frame You can press the esc key to abort the drag if necessary Multiple selection of frames Note that you can move multiple selected frames at the same time Hitting Ctrl A on your keyboard will select all like items on your canvas eg all image frames on the canvas all text images on the canvas Hit Ctrl A again to select every item on your canvas You can also click on the ne Select All button on the Tool bar Holding the Ctrl key while you click on individual frames will allow you to select images or elements one at a time to create a group on which you can perform the same actions Overriding Snapping You will notice that the image snaps to the edges of other images as you drag the mouse This helps you align the frame other frames on the canvas If you want to override this effect hold the ALT key down as you drag the resize handle This will turn snapping off To learn more about the snap guides click here Resizing Frames Frames can be resized in several ways e Resizing them interactively with or without snapping and fine grained control e Setting a size numerically e Snapping a frame to fit the image it contains Note that frames can be in element or image modes which affects the resize handles available on the frame Interactive Resizing 2009 The Create
329. stic embellishments or decorative materials You can add your own text in any font or color and resize them to your liking then print with perfect result to add to your scrapbook background textures to coordinate with your theme and images To find dotScrap materials From the Start Zone click the Marketplace icon Browse the categories of available materials rm E i Di my or from the Start Zone click on the ws button Scroll the list of materials that are available for free according to your license type or Click on the _ button in the Create screen Type in a keyword eg green wedding masculine flower to find individual elements or click on TYPE gt gt Embellishments to look for a particular type of graphic Fimi Papers Embellishments or click on any of the preset hovers to find 2009 The Marketplace 241 12 1 materials instantly NEXT e Kits will open in the Kit Preview area allowing you to drag and drop elements onto your canvas e Search items will appear in the Search window Drag the thumbnails of individual graphic items onto the canvas to display them or double click on templates to launch them Templates can be appended to your existing project by selecting them with your right mouse button Individual graphic elements are resizable and can be moved anywhere on the canvas Certain items such as papers are suitable for retinting which can be done
330. t and font size e Center the text and or align it to the top middle or bottomof the text frame e Change the frame inset Change the text color and outline properties e Turn the text shadow Off if desired Resize the text frame as desired using the frame handles to change the size of the text frame 2009 Pro Project Tutorials 261 6 Import your images e from the Images hover e from the buckets hover e from Windows Explorer aot eens ae e from the Toolbar Browse hes Icon Select the images and drag them into the FotoFusion workspace So they are loaded into the dropper 7 Click the AUTOPOPULATE button to fill the empty frames axe Your images will automatically drop into the frames on the canvas 8 Edit the composition as required Multi select frames to change the border color and width the frame inset or add a new matte f Multi select text frames to change the color font and size o the text Add a background color or tile to the canvas or use a textured paper Add text on canvas to create a title for the composition 9a Save your project e as a project to edit later 2009 262 YearbookFusion User s Manual 14 e and or as a template with no image content to reuse with a new image set 9b or Print it 9a or Export it to a file This work flow represents the very basic operation for designing a compos
331. t ratio of the frame or by right mouse down on an item to select IMAGE FRAME or SCRAP ELEMENT FRAME Also note that certain types of embellishments eg png files with transparency have their aspect ratio permanently locked so the element cannot be cropped or stretched 4 handled frame aspect ratio locked 2009 The Basics 49 Rotate Handle Dragging the rotate handle rotates the entire frame ROTATE a Important Notes e Hold down the ALT key to snap rotation to increments of 45 degrees e Hold down the CONTROL key to rotate the image within the frame itself This will allow you to straighten a crooked image to an upright position Crop Handles Dragging the yellow crop handles interior corners determines which part of the image is visible within a frame mi CROP a 2009 50 YearbookFusion User s Manual I E l PI n ee 1 wl i ee ee DET ee k 2 a Duplicate Images first has been cropped Important Notes e These handles do not appear in element type frames meaning the element cannot be moved or resized in the frame Pan Dragging the pan handle moves the image within the frame Important Notes e If you do not see this handle on a frame it means that the frame is holding an element elements cannot be panned Elements vs Images 2009 The Basics 51 4 2 3 When you drop graphics onto your canvas
332. t theme into the buckets Bucket 1 bridal party preparation Bucket 2 the groom s men at the church greeting guests Bucket 3 the bride s arrival and entry into the church Bucket 4 wedding ceremony Bucket 5 the bride amp groom s departure from the church Bucket 6 the formal shots of the wedding party outside the country club Bucket 7 the dinner including candid shots of the guests and the cake cutting Bucket 8 the dance and bouquet toss To the left of the buckets is the Categories section Find the Weddings section and look at the subcategories Add any you need by performing a right mouse down on any of the existing Subcategories Then drag your buckets on top of the categories to assign them to that category 2 Create your album Create new pages and change the background be it a texture or change the background color You can also use images from the wedding as a background image Click on the Buckets hover button to access your pre sorted images and add them to your canvas Add text downloaded graphic embellishments 3 Save your work 4 Create a proof for the client You may wish to consider overlaying image info to the project to show the file name or frame number You may also wish to watermark your project 5 Edit your project When the client returns feedback reopen your album and make the requested changes Swap images quickly from one frame to another Replace images entirely by searching through
333. tScrap elements and trial users cannot choose to export to psd Each image object in FotoFusion appears as three layers in Photoshop the frame the contained image and the shadow For example if you have three images in FotoFusion you ll get 3 3 1 canvas 10 layers in Photoshop Each layer is just pixels e g a Shadow layer is an RGBA image not a Photoshop layer style There are no layer masks applied If you put an image into a 1x1 frame at the top left of a 10x10 canvas and export at 300 DPI the layer holding that image will contain a 300x300 image Color Management Extreme only FotoFusion Extreme users can decide how their export output will be managed with respect to color profiles in terms of monitor and file export To manage your settings click on FILE gt gt COLOR MANAGEMENT This feature is in Beta stage 2009 212 YearbookFusion User s Manual w Enable Color Management al Bape color managemen Soecty how color apoen on your montor and pnnter O Proofing See calan on your monitor andor porter aa they would apptar on another devica ihare se Rendeng Mieri Printer Prolia PrmoP DF iHome El To manage your output file profiles click on the tab and select the TO A FILE option Under the Resolution and Quality area a drop box selection will provide three choices Conwert bo AAI and tap eth Gl Pats throwgh profiles unchanged anc tag with common ofie
334. tain a code If there is no code provided you are running a copy of FotoFusion Lite FotoFusion Lite will allow you to print the templates included on the cd rom There is no license code included in the package Learn more here If you need to install FotoFusion on a computer that is not connected to the Internet If your computer is NEVER connected to the Internet you can still activate the software You will need access to a computer that is connected to the Internet to do so 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 11 To install the software on an offline machine On an online machine visit www LumaPix com and select DOWNLOAD NOW SAVE the file lumapixsetup exe to the desktop then transfer it to your offline machine After transferring it double click on it to install the software To Activate Click on HELP on the menu bar and select Activate FotoFusion offline You will see an alphanumeric request code Copy select Ctrl C this text Paste the request code into a word processing document e g Windows Notepad to avoid extra coding and save this file to an external memory device such as a memory stick or memory card On an online machine visit http www lumapix com wsv3 activatev4 aspx Type in your user id your email at the time of purchase Open the text file you have transferred to from your offline machine Copy select Ctrl C and paste Ctrl V the request code into the 2nd fie
335. tate 90 degrees w 1 othe Let Si Rotate Fight Pip LattyRight vv Pips Togs Riattom E ii Snap to vertical To snap a rotated frame back to a vertical orientation select it then press Ctrl Page Up OR right click on it and choose snap upright in the resulting contextual menu Flipping Images can be flipped left right and top bottom via the Image toolbox Click on a frame to select it then from the toolbox select the rotate option to open the Orient tools to rotate or flip your images 2009 The Create Tab 117 6 3 1 5 6 3 1 6 Swapping images between frames FotoFusion makes it simple to swap two images from one frame to another 1 Move the mouse over the frame number for one image eg 2 Press the left mouse button 3 Drag the mouse over the frame you would like to swap with 4 Release the left mouse button The two images will be swapped Grid options splitting amp merging frames Splitting Frames Frames can be split into two or more smaller frames Any new or existing frame on your canvas into a grid by selecting an existing frame or by drawing an empty frame With the splitter you can create an evenly space grid In this example we ve split a frame into eight parts You can also several split operations one after the other to get an interesting arrangement of different size frames 2009 118 YearbookFusion User s Manual Splitting
336. ted Resolution and Quality Dats Per inchi z0 See aosa bylaws Besl quality Wery large size Pass thneuigh protes unchanged and tag with sak selected proti a J PDF and PSD Extreme Yearbook only Activated Extreme licenses and YearbookFusion licenses with output enabled output their projects psd format and as multipage pdf PSD files can be opened in Adobe Photoshop and will produced a multi layered document suitable for editing Each element in the FotoFusion canvas will be rendered to a separate layer including shadows and image mattes This allows you to target only the specific layer you will need to correct EE LTE Oper rae Text is rendered as a graphic object and is not editable Note rendering to PSD will create very large format files If you are rendering a multipage project do not render to external editor this will automatically open the projects in Photoshop which may cause problems with your computer s available memory allocation 2009 214 YearbookFusion User s Manual 9 2 PDF files can be opened in Adobe Acrobat Reader and related products Multipage projects will render to a multipage pdf Additional options will appear under the Output to a File resolution area You can choose to Render as flattened pages no item is selectable or to Render as Layers and Vectors layered document vector base text For proofing documents eg sending to c
337. the BUNDLED CONTENT button in the Start Zone to launch these 40 page albums Extreme users can customize these albums change the canvas size reorder the pages add or remove frames change border options retint the background delete clone or add new pages One album can produce many looks suited to the needs of your client Cle aes ie Ti BEE Bi Premium albums are available by clicking on the MARKETPLACE button in the Start Zone New albums are added on a regular basis and can be purchased by launching them on the Create screen then clicking on the Shopping Cart Once purchased the albums will be added to your permanent collection for repeated use When a wedding album is launched on the Create screen the first page displayed is a cover sheet This page is not editable it is the wrapper for the album to show you the component pages Delete this page from the pages hover if you wish it will not render with your final output Similarly sample images will appear the first time you open the album These will vanish when you add your own images and will never render Please note Essentials or Enhanced users can purchase wedding the album templates but they will act as ready made pages Empty frames will accept your images and text can be edited but no changes to the canvas size page order or other major edits can be done METHOD 2 The AutoCollage Album The AutoCollage Album method provides a very quick way t
338. the Marketplace The Marketplace is not a closed book template delivery system it continues to grow with time with new materials added by LumaPix and other designers 2009 Introduction to FotoFusion 9 2 3 1 Some software companies offer a collection of templates with their software if some of the material is not to your taste or you require more material the only way you can get other alternatives is by buying another collection Many collections require you to purchase software as well such as psd templates that can only be used in PhotoShop This can get expensive Packaged collections most likely result in you purchasing content you will never use and requires you to store large quantities of graphics on your computer The dotScrap Marketplace allows you to pick and choose exactly what you would like to use and allows FotoFusion to respond to new trends in photography and crafting immediately New content can be added to the Marketplace quickly and you will see the results immediately Once purchased the content is yours to reuse over and over even if you change computers You do not need to store volumes of unwanted graphics on your system either Activating FotoFusion Online Lite CD Offline Note YearbookFusion users will receive special download and activation instructions from their publishers Disregard the following section If you have downloaded FotoFusion from the Internet www
339. the Start Zone Click on NEW to launch a brand new project with no image content or AUTO to launch the AutoCollage Wizard to create a page with your images automatically arranged on it or LOAD to find a previously saved project or template to use with your images or MARKETPLACE to find a downloadable template to use with your images New projects can also be started directly from the CREATE screen Click on FILE and select NEW PROJECT or on the Start Wheel tt to return to the Start Zone Extreme users who wish to make a multi page album from scratch with autotools or by adding pages from existing and projects and templates should consult the User Manual sections on Multipage project management and Multipage album design Starting from Scratch New projects can be started either from a blank page or from an AutoCollage which will randomly arrange a selection of images on your page which you can then edit and rearrange at will To start a new blank project from Start Zone and select NEW or choose FILE gt gt New on the menu You will see a variety of frequently selected page sizes available for your particular license type e Scrapbook Essential users will only see options available for pages that do not exceed the single sheet 12x12 page 2000x2000 pixels size limit of that license type e Enhanced users will only see options available for pages that do not exceed the single 2009 The Basics 65 Sh
340. the basic steps to create a composite using FotoFusion Enhanced or Extreme 1 Organize your images e Use the Organizer to sort your images into buckets e g by class if required e If you need to add the name of the photo s subject beneath their image then open Windows Explorer and rename your images to the names of the subjects of the photos 2 Open a new project Set your canvas dimensions as required Insert a single large frame on the canvas to cover the whole canvas 3 Change the frame properties as required e Reduce the overall size of the frame to expose a border around the edge of the frame Re center the frame by clicking on the Toolbox Arrange icon e Change the border thickness or color or add a matte if you wish You can also wait until after you have added your images to make these changes 4 Divide the one large frame into a grid Select the large frame causing the Toolbox to appear Mouse down and drag up aE E down and side to side on the k 5 splitter icon to divide the one a large frame into as many smaller frames as you require 2009 260 YearbookFusion User s Manual 5a If your image files contain the names of the portrait subjects add text tags Multi select all empty frames Click on the Toolbox to add text Click on the TAGS gt button and select File Name from the list of options 5b Change the text attributes as required e Change the fon
341. the customer can decide if the pictures are right for them but not be tempted to save them locally To create a watermark If you are using graphic content that requires re editing 1 Use an image editing application such as Adobe PhotoShop to create an image with a transparent background 2 Save this image in the PNG file format with transparency enabled into the Watermark 3 Place the PNG file into the Watermarks folder where FotoFusion was installed If you are only using text or pre extracted graphics 1 Open a new canvas in FotoFusion 2 Turn the canvas frame image opacity to 0 or delete the canvas frame 3 Add text and graphics as required 4 Render the file to png format sending it to the Watermarks folder where FotoFusion is installed To apply a watermark 1 Browse for the file you wish to use as your watermark 2 Turn on the checkbox next to Collage to watermark the page and or Originals to 2009 The Share Tab 201 8 3 watermark attached original images 3 Select where you would like to place your watermark using the grid top side bottom etc 4 Select the opacity of your watermark using the slider bar Adding Banners Just as with Watermarks custom Banners can be created in FotoFusion or Photoshop or Similar programs and overlaid over email or web output A banner is an image with an embedded hyperlink it is typically opaque as you WANT the user to see and clic
342. the size of the thumbnail views hold the Control key on your keyboard and use your mouse wheel Adding pages To add a new page open the Pages Hover and click the add page button Alternatively use Ctrl Insert from the Pages Hover to add a new page Pages All pages in a project do not need to be identical in size FS Each can have its own dimensions rn To change a page s dimensions within a project create the new page then either e edit it through the Canvas Settings Editor e right mouse select the thumbnail to choose a new page type If you have a form factor selected that includes the desired page type among its options the page will autoresize Adding pages from existing projects or templates TO append projects from an existing project or previously saved template or create a new page based on auto collage click the add pages from AutoCollage template or existing project button This s will open a browser allowing you to bring in a new page from these sources Pages Insert Project el insert Page x Insert Template reer t ing Aust Olle Pages from within previously saved multi page projects can also be imported into the active project Either e Click on the hover OR e Click on the __ tab and then the Search tab Next specify a search for Type SAVED WORK gt gt Pages All pages from within multi page projects will be displayed Right mouse down on the thumbn
343. these features available Most important we don t charge for downloads cds and printed manual have significant production and shipping costs to get them to you This is not a cost we wish to pass on to you If you still would like a cd you can create your own Visit www LumaPix com and click on the DOWNLOAD NOW link SAVE this file lumapixsetup exe to your C drive then burn a cd in the normal manner A pdf version of the User s Manual is available on the website as well http www lumapix com web_downloads downloads_helpfiles shtml You can download this and print it if you prefer a hard copy though this is not recommended 2009 YearbookFusion User s Manual Can I install on more than one computer FotoFusion s End User Agreement stipulates one license one user one installation However individual users can install the software on a second computer provided that the installation is for their primary use AND that both copies are not run simultaneously So if you own a laptop and a desktop and will be running FotoFusion on one OR the other machine then no problem Reinstall the software If however you would like to have the software on two computers within a household or a lab for simultaneous use by two operators then a second license should be purchased Simultaneous usage of FotoFusion on one license may result in the automatic shut down of that license YearbookFusion licenses
344. thumb in photography and other visual arts such as painting The rule states that an image can be divided into nine equal parts by two equally spaced horizontal lines and two equally spaced vertical lines The four points formed by the intersections of these lines can be used to align features in the photograph Proponents of this technique claim that aligning a photograph with these points creates more tension energy and interest in the photo than simply centering the feature would Use the gridlines appearing on selected image frames to help you position your image within the frame Click here to learn more about this helpful design rule http en wikipedia org wiki Rule_of_ thirds 6 3 1 3 1 Locking aspect ratio position and size Extreme users can lock frames in four manners aspect ratio position rotation and size Locking Aspect Ratio 2009 114 YearbookFusion User s Manual Images have an aspect ratio a measure of their width compared to their height Frames in FotoFusion contain images 4 amp and can be resized By default the frames can be resized fto have any aspect ratio This allows you to crop an image by changing the aspect ratio of the Most of the time this behaviour is _ desirable you can crop an image by changing the frame size and shape to only show an interesting part of a larger picture You can also make frames of identical
345. ting companies will suggest using a safe zone to guarantee that any content placed inside the safe area will not be cropped out while being printing Safe zones can also be use to create a margin around your composition to give the images more impact If you perform an AutoCollage on a page with a safe zone the resulting arrangement of images will be contained within the interior portion of the safe zone You can manually position images over the safe zone Images will snap to the guidelines for your convenience but they can be exceeded 2009 The Create Tab 91 The 25 bleed has inflated this project past the zero line on the ruler The overall project size is 5 wider and taller as a result Canvas Gridlines Adding a bleed zone will increase the size of your canvas to give your printed documents room to be trimmed For example a sheet of business cards or a wedding album page laminated onto a card stock will be produced by physically trimming the edges of the project away so adding a bleed will pad the canvas size to allow for any cutting imprecision It is not recommended to add a bleed unless your professional printing lab has specified it you Should not add a bleed if you are printing at home or at a consumer level printing facility It will inflate your overall canvas size Proven z ones E FEE sef el a peed 25 Gis bs hs ha am A iin I
346. tion Under the Image Editing area you can pick the default editor Click on the drop box to choose from always prompt or manage which behaves in the same manner as above After choosing an editor you will be able to select if from the drop box so FotoFusion will always launch your images in your designated software Save the file once your editing is complete and go back to FotoFusion If the image does not refresh immediately hit F5 on your keyboard to redraw your canvas Setting a default editor preferences If you want to set preference for editing with an external tool open the User Preferences section under the EDIT menu Under the image editing options you can choose to pick options for your default editor Click on the drop box option to access these choices 2009 264 YearbookFusion User s Manual 19 Drree Edting Copy images Fvays Prompt ba Defaut adikor Abeays Prompt oy Copy Images FotoFusion can either prompt you each time you choose to make a duplicate copy of your image each time you edit it in an external tool or you can set a general rule to always copy or never copy You would choose to copy your images if you did not want the Original to be overwritten Default editor You can be prompted every time to choose to edit your images in an external tool if for instance you have more than one editor you use or choose Manage to point FotoFusion to the exe file used to launch yo
347. tion on click on EDIT on the menu and choose User Preferences Turn on the Show Advanced Search option Once FotoFusion has produced Search results you can click on the Sort button over the thumbnail viewer to arrange your items according to file name or date option Learn how to DELETE projects using the organizer and how to insert individual pages into a multi page project in other sections of the Help file Using buckets to move between tasks Buckets allow you to easily transport images from the Organizer browser to the Create screen Scrapbook Essentials users have access to one bucket Enhanced and Extreme users have four buckets displayed by default with the ability to create up to nine in total To add buckets right mouse down in the buckets area and select Add Bucket You can also remove buckets and empty them in this fashion Note you can also move your images from the Organizer display area to the Create screen by selecting them individually or as a multiple selection and dragging them from the Organizer onto the Create button The Create screen will toggle on and the images will be attached to the cursor ready to drop Note2 you can select images on the Create screen from the Images hover or selected into the dropper and drop them into the Bucket hover 2009 The Organize Tab 189 To use the buckets feature First click on the This will open the Organizer At the bottom of the
348. to columns change the delimiter from tab to comma That failing open the index txt file in Windows Notepad and see if there are any special characters between the data fields If so then type that character into the Other empty field and 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 309 select it E Text Quae Text Qualifier If your data is represented with single or double quotes around the text type this character into the Text Qualifier box The quotes will be stripped from the data table Ignore Header Line Check this ONLY if you see a hhi any headers titles above the columns in the table of data Duplicates Provides rules for subsequent PSPA upecates CD imports epilace School in Balabare If this is your first import or you are changing 7 Integiale wilh Feasting Daaba data sets leave it as replace school in database If you are merging a second PSPA CD to one Append to Exerting Databare already imported eg retakes or a 2nd set of images then select Integrate with existing database or append if the file numbers have been restarted 00001 in the 2nd CD Attribute Set Most users will only see School Athibuke Bat School F as the default choice An attribute refers to a category that can contain information associated with the image files on the CD For instance a school will have attributes such as grade teacher home room first name and last nam
349. to enable certain people in the set to rise to the top of the panel group By default the options are set to the following Priority is a field that will most likely not be filled out in your PSPA data It was added to YearbookFusion to allow Seema Se better sorting of your panels Pricer ity Dai Last Name Sorting allows you to create panels where the teacher will automatically be placed in front of the students or create a First Narre amp staff page where the principal will appear at the top followed by the vice principals teachers support staff etc This is dependant on values being assigned for the selected field either on the original PSPA data import or manually assigned in the Organizer To see the results of your work click on the Paget hover at the bottom of the Create screen Hit Page Down on your keyboard or Page Up to move through the pages on your Create screen to see the entire set of pages F yey Lit mimg amag ale g Cs i i a mjr aay ale teas rau ASZ abi LF eal aaa T yaa pE A TDA gaw 4 mag mapa 2s ANT FTI FE ss pe dui B chan ekoa Pet Fi Templates clipart and other embellishments YearbookFusion is packaged with a set of templates and graphic embellishments provided by LumaPix New content will be added over time so be sure to check often for additions Note A high speed internet connection is required to use this content If
350. to use information about the particular image as text 2009 166 YearbookFusion User s Manual Select the frame that will own the text frame The image toolbox will open Click the Text option just as above which will create a new text frame attached to the image frame The text frame will move and rotate with the parent frame although it can be independently sized and positioned This is useful for creating labels for individual pictures and contact sheets or other layouts Note that if you have multiple frames selected when you click the add text button all frames will receive text a text frame The Text Editor When a text frame on your canvas is selected the Text toolbox will appear Sel Ej oll The T icon allows you to launch the Text Editor to apply new attributes and edit your text If your text frame contains your own text ie it does not say Drag on the T icon to dynamically change the frame size if your text is set to resize to fit your font size will grow or shrink accordingly Hold Ctrl on your keyboard and drag on this icon to dynamically change the outline width To dynamically change the shadow of your text drag on the shadow portion of this icon To learn more about shadow options consult the Shadow Editor section of this manual The Arrange icon works in the same manner as the icon on the Frame toolbox Consult the Arrange and Distributing Frames section of t
351. tor will be applied to selected frames or use the Toolbar Selection Tool and select the Image Text or Canvas Text options to select all items of this type on the canvas The Text Editor displays any True Type PostScript or Open Type Font available in the C Windows Fonts folder on your system If you reinstall FotoFusion on a new computer which does not contain the same fonts as your original machine you will most likely find that your font list has changed FotoFusion s text engine supports scripts i e languages other than Latin style e g Hebrew Arabic Thai etc Text direction is also respected The only constraint is that all characters of the text must have the same script code and the same direction level Click on the down arrow to see all available fonts the select one to apply to your text 2009 170 YearbookFusion User s Manual te m Lape ere Me al re Anal bal Sure Pita 88 Resine to Fil ead EJOJ GJUJ 7 BOG BS Sow Note to all V3 amp V4 0 OpenType and Postscript Fonts are not supported by the old text engine will not show in the list and will not render If you open an existing project or template made in these versions in a later Version 4 build you will need to click on Puy areca Peat format z button under the font list to convert the text to the new text engine Setting the Font Size There are two ways to change the size of the text in a text frame
352. tplace content e Occasional issues with store content looking blurry now resolved 4162 e Smart frames dropped on existing frames now always apply correctly 10622 Licensing issues e Repeated reactivation should no longer occur 14243 e Numerous issues with licensing and available features have been repaired Vista weirdness e Stuff you simply don t want to know about like virtual stores and virtual registry entries cleaned up 15452 YearbookFusion Exclusive Features LumaPix is pleased to announce the release of YearbookFusion a new version of FotoFusion designed for schools and church groups and intended for distribution by yearbook publishers Features include e PSPA CD import with support for custom fields e Customizable class panels grids of images text tags e Free yearbook templates and clip art e Direct project upload to publisher with predefined output options e Publisher specific page sizes e Publisher specific branding Publishers interested in distributing YearbookFusion are invited to contact LumaPix for more detail Released December 17 2008 Version 4 3 build 51083 amp 51564 FEATURE e special release build for SEI paper digital bundle not web released Released August 29 amp Sept 18 2008 Version 4 3 build 50848 FIXED BUGS e 15063 Crash when accessing auto flipped images folder e 13672 UI tweaks for better display under Windows Vista Released August 19 2008 Version 4 3
353. tput Click here to learn more Printing To print your project click on FILE gt gt Print or select THE OUTPUT TAB gt gt To a Printer FotoFusion can print a single page at a time This is true for all license types including Extreme FotoFusion helps you print your projects with greater accuracy and with fantastic quality e Click here to learn more how FotoFusion takes the guess work out of configuring your prints e Album work is facilitated by a diagram to help you determine the direction of your pages right and left Downloadable paper guide projects are available in the store e Extreme users can enjoy using printer page seqments a feature that will assist printing over sized projects in smaller sections or to reassemble multi sided projects or multi element layouts on printer friendly and export friendly canvas sizes Why printing collages from FotoFusion is preferable to printing flat files through other applications FotoFusion works with references to your original images When it is time to output a collage to a web page a jpg file or the printer FotoFusion re reads your original images and renders all the effects in your layout such as text and drop shadows at the final resolution you are asking to export FotoFusion does NOT produce a single fixed size bitmap image that you resize up or down for the different output types your collage is completely and automatically rebuilt each time Printed output is
354. ts apply to all editors when user defines cm in canvas size options e Number of times used count displayed in Image lists 2009 286 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Color Management Select monitor and printer profiles plus rendering intent Extreme BETA Export Print Improvements e Exif page numbers respect double page spreads e Page number applied as text tag in double spreads respected on title bar output text tags e Overlay image information option overlays file name frame number and page number e Printer window revamped for clarity hinged page option added Streamlined Workflow e Faster Autocollage now includes add all image option Center on page in 2 page spread will center to left or right side page Last selected frame used as reference frame for Alignment tools Grouped dotScrap items can be copied pasted FIXED BUGS Network External Drives e Issues with used checkmarks on images from external hard drives resolved e Images on networked mapped drives are not copied locally Workflow Images edited in external editor now refresh correctly Image attributes can be changed in an empty frame Frame numbers remain constant between sessions Frame handle hit testing fixed Multi selected frames now stay selected as expected Matte cutter mattes file names displayed correctly EMF PNG mattes functionality repaired Edited PNG image files update as expected Page th
355. ty 255 and color applied added on top of a central image 2009 The Create Tab 139 Image by David Ziser Image by Kent Smith 6 3 2 5 Frame position amp size The Frame Editor allows exact resizing and positioning of frames on the canvas click on the GENERAL tab to see these controls Select any frame on the canvas or multiple frames and click on the border portion of the Toolbox to launch the Frame Editor The Position and Size options are located at the bottom of the editor 2009 140 YearbookFusion User s Manual The X amp Y parameters specify the position of the selected frames on the canvas Multiple select frames to line them up precisely along either of these axes The width and height options specify the frame size Multiple select frames to create identical widths and or heights The Angle control rotates the entire frame the same action as dragging on the Rotate handles on the frame To rotate the image within the frame use the Image Editor control or hold the Control key on your keyboard while dragging on the rotate handle on the frame 6 3 3 The Image Editor Images reside within frames To make changes to the way images look use the Image Editor Select one or more frames on the canvas and from the Toolbox click on the Image Editor 2009 The Create Tab 141 6 3 3 1 Any changes made to your image will not be sa
356. u are only allows to save locally or to remote storage then no options will appear You will be shown the available locations where you can save or open your projects If both local and remote storage are available in your account you will see the following options when you save or load a project PEL ee kD eem maae e Em am A d T ee a Fj Filaj bi Leria DF a T Ae a al Th eS ee re cen ee eed ether or pio or ree ee i cei eed cee pubes core Pee e Ha pre bce a a Ur oe oe at bt i B ria PF m te iy Cae ail Soom ditai To save to your C drive a local network or an external storage device choose Locally To save to a shared space on our network storage server choose Remote Storage The same options will be presented when you are opening a project Once on the remote storage server you will see thumbnail versions of your project To launch a project select it and choose OK 2009 File amp Project Management 233 11 2 Some project thumbnails may display a lock icon This indicates that another user is working on the project or that it has been locked for editing numpa PEREI aoa anew ETE ma E Archiving and Transfering Project Files FotoFusion enables you to back up your project files for maintenance purposes to transfer your work to another machine or to send projects to other registered FotoFusion users Why archive your work Archiving saves
357. u should know about editors include e Changing parameter values e Moving editors e Docking and pinning editors e Using the button e Presets e Dealing with Multiple Selection Changing parameter values Parameters that appear in bold can be changed by clicking on them which will cause a bar to appear Simply move the mouse over the label press the left mouse button and drag left and right the value of the parameter will be updated interactively Alternatively you can click on the label as opposed to dragging it This will open a pop up window that allows you to enter a value for the parameter directly or reset to the default value 1 Cheba Set Al ce Cancel Moving editors TO move an editor drag it by the title bar to anywhere on the canvas Docking and pinning editors You can specify how your editors will behave when not in active use Editors disappear when you no longer need them If you would like to have an editor remain up despite completing your changes press the pin button 2009 The Basics 61 This will pin the editor up Image OWOC In this state the editor will remain open until you press this button again to unpin it Using the button There will be many occasions where you want changes made to one frame to apply to all for example having all frames share a blue border color Click on the button which appears at the top right of the editor
358. u the image and the path to that image 2009 The Create Tab 161 6 3 8 so ee ey I Jaf wi ee se Mr p Hee ts Image by David Ziser From this window you can do the following tasks Task What it means O OOOO Spin Click the left and right circular arrow P controls to spin the image left and right Preview the next or previous image in the Prev selection if there was one or the current Next collage if not Turning this option on will produce a better High i looking view of the image you are Quality aon previewing Opens the Windows Explorer on the folder that contains the original image being previewed the path is listed below the image Explore Adding hotlinks to images Images in your collage can have text descriptions These appear as labels for the images when you export your collage to an HTML page or to email In addition you can turn the images in your collage into clickable regions which link to pages that you define You may have to click the three green arrow button to see the box into which you can enter the link To set these options on an image select the frame and press Alt D or right mouse down on the frame and choose Update Description from the contextual 2009 162 YearbookFusion User s Manual menu Image Description Ente a description for this image 1 000 characters mart his text wall be displayed as pop up
359. umbnail refresh issues resolved BMP files save reopen as expected Text size unaffected by copy paste canvas resize Pinned Toolbox bugs resolved AutoPopulate works with images selected in Image hover Ungrouped Child frames are selectable in tree Canvas grid cannot be set to 0x0 Apply to all pages now reset on reloading canvas dialog Font licensing information appears when required Check for updates returning correct build information Undo AutoCollage no longer removes background image e Hovers can now move to second monitor e Dual monitor to single monitor setup does not leave hovers orphaned e Tutorial video icon replaced with clapboard icon e 20x10 and 24x12 presets set to be double spreads e No double scroll bars in Embellishments hover e Images in Smart Frame will undo Render Output e Waiting for download at render error resolved e Render preview can be panned e Exported files only use lower case file names 2009 Reference 287 Archive Restore Project Management Locate missing images applies to duplicates of images Locate missing images cancel shuts down the search Locate missing images includes mattes Locate missing images updates every page simultaneously Marketplace based projects are moved to Backup Projects Recently opened projects list removed from file menu Un installation removes more info from system Marketplace e
360. unched dotScraa Then sae Cirles Save Ae Cait Project Os Tamales fuk Devas Jit F Per Setup PrE Previa Prt Archit Rair d Propet Fiata b 1CM Editing test acme factor Soap 2 test hanenvuit factor Scrap J tast Geminis ago tami Soap 4 best mo Aheachorbemplahe Soran S test mo ato Sorap Choe Pa Fata unan 2009 34 YearbookFusion User s Manual EDIT manages items on the canvas Cut Fale CUY Copy cut paste duplicate and Pesce alte niet delete selected items Delate Delate Undo or Redo actions recently Onde Create image frame Chi taken on the FotoFusion canvas User Preferences to set up the default size images are dropped ee oe at how multipage album projects will appended pages and interface preferences mouse wheel zoom for enlarging thumbnail previews advanced search display VIEW manages the display properties of FotoFusion on your screen Properties Full screen toggles to eliminate Mn Preperty Edto the windows bar at the top of the Dar WeOrieg Mous screen ioiii Toce E Drag Moure Tabs toggles between the Create coom En Pus Organize Share Output and a Mires Community tabs Zooan bo Selection Properties opens various editors Repet Zoe A A Frame Image Canvas Settings Corian wiy Alt i Shadows Text amp Font Text First Page Location and Group Seug Preuss Page Pin Properties Editor will cause the Mert Page selecte
361. update after red eye amp matte application 20136 20170 e Problem with bold italic attributes corrected 19954 e Deleting two instances of a frame text now problem free 20067 e Multiple images sent to external editor does not prompt to make a copy for each image 8222 e Large form factors lists no longer delay startup 19094 e Manufacturer s list sorts by product type in File gt New 18976 19098 Released July 15 2009 Version 4 5 build 57600 Bug Fixes e Upload to Publisher FTP error YearbookFusion only 19579 e Thumbnail resolution of image rendered instead of high resolution 19616 Released May 28 2009 Version 4 5 build 57466 Bug Fixes Editing e Matte cutter works on png files 11312 e PNG mattes set to the correct channel 19400 e Matte cutter respects crop and position of image 18981 19414 e Matte channel preference respected after reopening project 19401 Convert text to matte repaired 17034 e Red eye removal tool works on png files 12756 e Smart frames resize correctly 13197 18173 e gif transparency respected 13828 e Autojumble no longer inflates images 16286 e Symbol fonts will render after project is saved 18068 e Background image copied when auto duplicated 14003 16274 e Mattes fonts and tiles list will now respond to keystrokes to find item by name 18923 2009 276 YearbookFusion User s Manual e Multi selected small
362. ur editor eg C Program Files Adobe Photoshop DPI amp Resolution Warnings Resolution refers to the amount of information contained in an image or the number of pixels dots in a digital image The more dots per inch in a given image the more information it contains No image can be upsized from its native resolution meaning the size at which it was recorded since no application can create any more information than is already present in an image at the time it is taken or scanned So for instance if you take a photo on a cell phone camera with only 2 megapixels don t expect to be able to use that image on a large poster without noticing lots of dots Also zooming in on a small element within a larger image eg a single person in a classroom portrait will produce similarly bad results There simply isn t enough information in the image to make it clear when resized Your computer screen by design only shows low resolution versions of your image eg 72 100 dpi When you send a project via the Share tab in FotoFusion the project is by default displayed at a screen resolution This makes the file size much smaller which will guarantee that your recipient will receive your image successfully as it will not surpass the download or display limits of their email browser If you need your email recipient to print the project then render it at a jpg and forward them the file eg through www yousendit com if it is quite
363. us locations Regardless of the number of people working on the book one person should be appointed the project manager The project manager will usually assign particular tasks to members of the committee This person will also set deadlines so the project can be submitted for printing according to the schedule determined by the yearbook publisher If the yearbook is being created by a group each team member may have one or more sections assigned to them with an expected page count for each section This is particularly important if the yearbook is limited to a specific number of pages by the publisher Note if the publisher has set a target page count you will see it displayed in the bottom of the Create screen warning if you are over or under your page count limit Here is sample grid of how a yearbook project could be managed Design your own grid to suit your yearbook team and workflow Ap d 15 10 Admin principal vp Ee ee a Net Ybk Candids Staff ae etc 15 10 Sports 6 football Nicole D Lincoln Net Ybk Candids Sports jApr baseball track 4 10 heer other Lunch Cafeteria Ee ee Net Ybk Candids candids oe gen 4 10 Drama amp performance fall prod Katarina D Lincoln Net Ybk Candids show Apr inter glee 4 10 jazz band gen 15 10 1 10 logos 1 10 Saving and Sharing Projects Depending on the working environment of the team projects can be shared in several pa bookfair eb Net Ybk Candids candids oe ba
364. users may be limited to the sizes preselected by their album manufacturer 2 Your computer s memory resources Your computer s memory resources will limit the size of your ability to print and render very large sizes This will mostly affect Extreme users making poster size output Lower the dpi of your output at rendering this may allow you to export the project keeping in mind the larger the image the lower the dpi can be since large output will be viewed at a distance 3 Using a template from the Marketplace Some templates have a locked size canvas size usually these templates contain design pages which transfer all or part of the design onto printer or render friendly pages of a particular predefined size Other templates will be constrained based on your license type for instance Extreme and YearbookFusion users can resize multi page albums from the Marketplace whereas Essentials and Enhanced users cannot 4 Project Settings If you have chosen a predefined project setting also called form factor from a particular album manufacturer the canvas size will be predetermined by the manufacturer s settings Note YearbookFusion users may be limited by their publishing company to only use their manufacturer s preset sizes Page Types Extreme and YearbookFusion users will find several different page types available Depending on the type of page you select FotoFusion will behave in a different manner Essentials and Enhanced will
365. using the Toolbox To split a frame using the mouse 1 Select the frame or frames 2 Move the cursor over the split control on the image toolbox 3 Press down and hold the left mouse button 4 Without releasing the button drag the mouse to the right and down As you do this lines will appear on the frame showing you how the frame will be split a 5 EE a 5 Release the left mouse button The frame will be split into the selected number of frames 2009 The Create Tab 119 You can press the esc key to abort the split operation if necessary Splitting using the Split Dialog Select at least one frame then either press the T key or Click don t drag the Split button in the image toolbox or select Split Frame from the Tools Frame menu The following dialog will appear Select a number of horizontal and vertical splits then click Okay or press Enter You can uncheck the MOSAIC box to create a grid with the image appearing only in the first box 2009 120 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 1 7 Merging Frames To merge two or more frames into one single frame 1 Multi select all frames you wish to merge either draw a marquee over adjacent frames or hold the Control key on they keyboard while selecting the frames individually 2 Right mouse down on one of the selected frames 3 Choose Merge Frames from the
366. usly holding the Ctrl key Brightness Brightness is a measure of the overall level of intensity in an image Increasing image brightness shifts the intensity of all pixels higher black pixels eventually become white and white pixels are clamped at white Contrast Contrast is a measure of the range between black and white occupied by an image Increasing contrast stretches the gamut of the image making dark pixels darker and light pixels lighter Gamma Gamma provides a means to distort of the middle range of intensities in an image without affecting the darkest or lightest portions Increasing Gamma will bring out details in shadows while decreasing it will bring out details in washed out areas Blur Blurriness can be used to create a sensation of depth of field making a background image blurry will give the viewer the impression that a foreground image is floating in front of it Black amp White and Sepiatone Move the Black amp White and Sepiatone sliders to adjust the amount of these two effects your pictures will desaturate and look older as you bring these controls to the right Red Green and Blue Values The R G and B sliders give you direct control over the color of your image For the technically minded these controls are offsetting the red green and blue color curves for the image Background color and patterns Adding Color to a Frame The Image editor allows you to add color to the background of a frame This
367. ve covered When you are satisfied with the results click on FILE gt gt Exit to close the editor Your image will refresh to display the matted image on your canvas 2009 160 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 7 The frame can be resized note that the frame borders are those of the entire unmatted image and not cropped to the edge of the matte You cannot move the image with regards to the matte It is locked to prevent the image edges from moving outside the contour of the matte s edge If you accidentally resize the frame and cut the image off then right mouse down on the frame and select SNAP FRAME TO IMAGE Then entire image will be exposed After you have added your custom matte Image Editor attributes can be applied eg brightness tinting etc You can also soften the matte in the Frame Editor to soften the edges To turn off the matte click on the frame open the Frame Editor and uncheck the matte Viewing original images The images in your collage are reference copies This means that FotoFusion looks at the original images on your computer makes a sketch of them so you can work with it quickly and easily FotoFusion will never make changes to your original files because of this To view the unaltered original images from a collage in full definition right mouse down on any image in the collage and choose view original image s at full size This will open a window showing yo
368. ved to your original file In this section learn how to e Fine tune your images brightness contrast gamma and other color correction and effects e Add background colors and patterns Consult the Frame Tools section to learn how to add new frames and images to your canvas Changing the appearance of your images Images in frames cannot be edited at the pixel level but global effects can be applied to improve their quality This process is always non destructive your original files are never touched For example you cannot remove wrinkles or blemishes to a portrait in FotoFusion but you can increase the overall contrast of an image The exception the red eye removal tool will correct redness to the selected image but only within FotoFusion To adjust images you can work directly in the Image Toolbox or in the Image Editor Image Toolbox The Image control in the Image Toolbox can be dragged to edit the most important image effects for the selected frame s e Drag left right Brightness e Drag up down Contrast e Ctrl drag left right Gamma Image Editor Select one of more frames on the Canvas to reveal the Image Toolbox Click on the Image control to open the Image Editor 2009 142 YearbookFusion User s Manual Se E kh a i a es T ee Ei oeg eigau Sa a ssa eet eee Pra Pee z 1 a Bi b p e i fi A 4 a m 2009 The Create Tab
369. w notice that there is a demarcation box surrounding the group This defines the frames that are within the grouped section The handles will allow you to resize the group as a whole and you can rotate the group as well ED WIU V1 WY Piss Any ME i breetings ile Li miner ll 2009 126 YearbookFusion User s Manual 6 3 2 ra Ur Ghastites PONA eller af l Se Grouped elements have been resized and rotated To add additional elements to the group simply repeat the steps above with the original group and new frame s added to the selection If you wish to further edit elements within the group hit Ctrl G on your keyboard Your group will continue to be grouped however elements within the group can be selected and have new attributes applied to them To undo grouping select the group and hit G on the keyboard OR right mouse down and select ungroup selection To view which frame numbers are included in a group then select the group and choose VIEW gt gt Properties gt gt Group on the menu The Frame Editor When one or more image frames are selected the Image Toolbox will appear 2009 The Create Tab 127 Click on the BORDER portion of the toolbox diagram to launch the Frame fe Coren Grocer High liegt it Editor TV inset Width 0 06 Fra This editor will give access to e Border Options and Frame Inset e Gradient Options e Matte
370. ways e As EMF files Enhanced Meta Files vector drawings saved by Adobe Illustrator e As PNG files bitmaps with an alpha channel saved by Adobe Photoshop Corel Paint Shop Pro and other tools All trademarks of their respective companies e As JPG from the aforementioned applications To create a matte in a design tool such as Illustrator or Photoshop e Start with a blank canvas the higher the resolution of the canvas you create the more accurate the matte will be in FotoFusion The canvas can be transparent or 100 white e Draw a matte using a 100 black pen brush or shape the black represents the portion of the image that will be visible e Save or export that matte in the PNG or EMF format to the Mattes folder in the FotoFusion installation 2009 The Create Tab 135 Any EMF JPG or PNG files found in that folder when FotoFusion is started will appear in the list of available mattes In Illustrator any stroke which is 100 black will be rendered as transparent in FotoFusion anything else will be rendered at the native color Due to Illustrator s thin support for the EMF format transparency is NOT supported as of this writing you cannot export a 50 opaque stroke from Illustrator in the EMF format Installing New Mattes in FotoFusion Once your matte is completed you will need to tag it so that FotoFusion will recognize it as a matte e Launch FotoFusion and open the Organizer
371. will cause the image not the border to cast a shadow this is useful for attaining glassy borders on frames Draw Border Highlight Disabling this removes the 1 pixel contrast line on the outer edge of the border Inset The inset value provides an automatic spacer between adjacent frames If the inset is reduced to 0 then frames will touch at their edge Increasing the inset will provide more space between frames that are snapped together Learn more in the Frame inset section of this manual Image by Kent Smith Frame inset in detail Frames can be inset from the snap marks that surround them for example to reveal more space around the images and show more the background Common uses of this control include e shrinking images to reveal more of the background e expanding images and softening their edges to clear a seamless mass of different images There are two ways to set the inset e Using the Toolbox e Using the Border Editor 2009 130 YearbookFusion User s Manual Via the Toolbox 1 Select a frame the image toolbox will appear 2 Press and hold the Ctrl key on the keyboard 3 Drag the border control in the toolbox This will interactively inset the frame Via the Frame Editor Open the frame editor on the Border tab R75 GME D 755 Opacity 256 fee image _ Shadow Inade H Dram Geer High degli inset Width 0 06 and drag the Inset parameter to increase
372. with Existing Database C Other C Append In Eising Dalahasa Test Duair Cepaator Alinbute Sab Siehl E Volume Name Image Folder Image Fie Mart Grade Last Named Yearbook ei ONG pg 10 laspe i Tearbook on 00002 pa 10 Brown Yoarbook Ty oupa 10 Loiri i Teatbaah ont OOM py 10 Cirkas tEn m 00005 pg 10 Covamubis embak oot oiii joy 10 Garces Yearbook ool OCD jg 10 Hulchinir yea bck Oot 00i pg 10 Jobrior Vearbook Oo 0000S ing 10 Lane Breas Yearbook oot 0000 py 10 Michell YT Oarbonk ea 0001 fio i Michel featbock oo OO 2 py 10 OVes p es Py erick rarer i te ah Fi sisal a Your school organization name will appear automatically if your software is activated Yearbook Publishers will see a list of all their activated schools Most of the time no further action will be required to import your data If you see properly formatted columns and rows of data click IMPORT If your data does not appear as expected in the table of data or if you are merging or replacing an existing database you can change the following options Delimiter Refers to the way the index txt file is Deim e set up Tab Some index txt files will use tabs to separate the rye data fields others will use commas or a special om i character If your data appears correct in the Other table as in the example above do not change the currently selected delimiter If there is no information showing or it is not organized in
373. with PSPA CDs YearbookFusion is distributed exclusively by yearbook publishers to their subscribed clients School yearbook committees and directory makers can use FotoFusion to easily create panel pages edit data related to the panel images and make custom candid pages from templates or from scratch then send their projects directly to the publisher for printing 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 299 Each yearbook publisher provides its clients with a detailed procedure for submitting pages including file naming conventions deadlines and other important information Please ensure that these guidelines are followed as this will allow for the timely Submission of your pages and a quality finished product This section of the user s manual provides instructions to use your PSPA CD to alter the data associated with the PSPA CD to create panel pages to use templates and to upload the finished work to your publisher Please note The features described in the following section are not available with any license type other than YearbookFusion If you do not see the features listed in this chapter of the user s manual in your software you are running a standard FotoFusion license Scrapbook Essentials Enhanced Extreme or have not yet activated the software Check the banner in the top ee eee f TRAM right corner of the Create screen it must read in order for the special yearbook features to be avail
374. xpanded and organized into hierarchical menu in text editor output options 13151 15678 17383 e User Preferences dialog now available providing e Toggle for Organizer s advanced search 18183 e Control over size of dropped images 16979 e Mousewheel direction option for zoom in out 17912 e Overlay image info includes filename and filename file extension options 17994 e Copied objects now available in dropper after new project created 17372 e Respect center line added to Autocollage options 17838 e Thin contrast line around frame border can now be toggled 13206 18137 e Welcome screen tutorial shows now shows all videos on first run 18545 2009 278 YearbookFusion User s Manual Marketplace e Bundled content downloads faster 17341 e Already downloaded content now available in Marketplace even when offline 17440 e Clicking on content links on web pages e g LumaPix com now launches FotoFusion and loads content 17915 e Search hover now supports From Any Publisher option 9713 16365 e Diplomas category now available 18610 Yearbook Features available only in YearbookFusion license e Organizer now offers Add Student button to import additional images into student database 15569 17725 18732 17904 18727 e Teachers can be brought to top of yearbook panel by pre pending space to their last name 17189 17201 17246 17455 e Publishers see list of their associated schools can ch
375. y FotoFusion is the next standard for yearbook creation For more information please contact Bob Winkler at bwinkler a lumapix com or visit www LumaPix com yearbook Updating FotoFusion Periodically updates for FotoFusion are released These updates include minor new features and bug fixes the details of which are listed in manual under the What s New section When a new build is launched FotoFusion will display a notice to prompt you to update We recommend that you update your software when prompted as new builds will provide you with important improvements to the software FotoFusion allows you to customize your update preferences This is done by setting your channel preference in the User Preset area You can set your installation of FotoFusion to be tuned into a particular channel of update Most users will choose to follow the Mainstream channel which will only prompt you to update your software to a very well tested and proven build of the software the one currently being offered for download on the LumaPix website Other users will be more adventurous and choose a beta or alpha channel This will prompt the installation of software that will contain the most recent features and fixes but that has not been as thoroughly tested There may be bugs some serious if it s in alpha release and users should be cautious when updating to these builds Backwards compatibility meaning moving back to an older build may not
376. y have also provided custom templates or additional graphics which you will be able to find on custom hovers on your canvas and under separate Gallery folders Completing and uploading your project Before submitting the project to the publisher the yearbook project manager needs to compile all pages into one complete project Open any archive scrappackage files that have been submitted by users not on a Shared network space and save these projects locally If the pages sections have been saved to a shared network or remote storage then the yearbook project manager will append the pages from the pages hover Click on the 2009 YearbookFusion Special Features 339 18 5 Pages button to open the Pages hover and use the append pages option to find the component pages of the yearbook Reorder them accordingly up down arrows and ensure that any target page count specified by your publisher has been respected Pages l ben x oe Also check for resolution warnings when an image is of insufficient quality or over zoomed and for red frame numbers images that have become disconnected from the original files Files with red resolution warnings should be replaced to ensure that the project will print with sufficient quality Save this master yearbook project to your local network or hard drive or to remote storage Uploading to your publisher YearbookFusion will allow you to directly upload your pr
377. you do not see any graphic content as outlined below you may be on a network that prevents the content from being accessed If this is the case please contact your IT staff member and have them contact us at support lumapix com to request information on proxy settings reguired to allow the graphic content to pass Yearbook Sets 2009 336 YearbookFusion User s Manual i i re ea the These are multipage thematic page designs found in the BUNDLED CONTENT section of the Start Zone The templates contain pages for different types of activities a panel page autographs and other content You can customize the pages and from the Pages hover remove move or duplicate the pages as you like ai BF Templates are useful for quickly creating a unified look for your yearbook It is not mandatory to use the templates you can make your entire yearbook design from scratch or use portions of the templates or add your own custom pages to the template set These template sets are visible from the Welcome screen at launch or from the Start Zone s Marketplace and Bundled content sections From the Create screen click on the kei button on the top left of the Create screen to launch the Start Zone Click on MARKETPLACE or BUNDLED CONTENT to see the template sets in the Quickstart area Papers Click on the Papers hover over the canvas on the Create screen to view a list of over 200 textures be used as backgrounds or
378. you to drop your rendered jpg file into a full page layout Pro Photographers have dozens and dozens of choices of pro labs and finishing services In general these items are higher quality than the services provided to general consumers but are priced much higher as a result FotoFusion includes presets from several album manufactures under the Canvas Settings editor These manufacturers have supplies their settings to be included in FotoFusion Manufacturers can consult the LumaPix website to learn how to have their presets included in FotoFusion If you are looking for a general list of pro album manufacturers we recommend consulting the web site of professional photography associations who hold trade shows For instance in the US check out the Wedding and Portrait Photographers International website to look at the list of album manufacturers participating at their annual trade show as most major album companies will participate at this show Rendering to a file eg jpg Upon completion of your project all users can export to a flat file type of output jpg tiff ong pdf bmp gif formats The process of flattening your file is also referred to as processing or rendering This is a flat file because all the layers frames text backgrounds etc are all flattened into one image The resulting file is no longer editable in FotoFusion but can be transferred to other computers who do not have Foto
379. your project including source images This creates a larger file but allows to you e move your source images and your scrap files from your system but still have the ability to reopen edit and output your project on a second FotoFusion installation e send your project files to another computer registered under your user id e backup your projects in case of problems with your computer or your FotoFusion installation When should you archive e You are managing your original images and project files and want to move or copy files off your hard drive e You need to reformat your hard drive or install a new operating system and need to back up your files e You are installing FotoFusion on another computer and need to move your project files with the source images 2009 234 YearbookFusion User s Manual To archive a PEENE Creat single project devi Protect ctrlaty i Click on FILE on jeri g the menu bar Auto Collage Wizard Lisi a A and select Open Erhi ARCHIVE Open p RESTORE from the list ae Ctrlas See Ore Select ARCHIVE Save As Template FOR then select one of the three options Suche Dages Private use will tre P j SRA of alshinina A kaa pae use ysel ony ooro Project Management dE priate chaning one other user activated under Cakar Managment phan eed your user id to ia Te open the file l to Fyre Scrap th
380. zing Frames 47 Moving computers 13 233 moving editors 59 moving frame order 122 moving frame to the bottom 120 moving frame to the top 120 Moving frames 107 Moving frames to different layers 100 moving hovers 38 moving images 53 117 Moving Images inside a frame 112 Moving pages after population 305 Multi layered elements 246 multipage 9 177 180 194 250 multi page 69 250 multi page autocollage 180 multi page change 59 multipage email 177 multi page projects 180 multipage publish 214 multipage template 76 multipage template option 66 Multiple group memberships 315 multiple installations 13 Multiple selection 59 107 Multi step elements 246 My Collages 229 My Exported Collages 229 My Purchased Scraps 248 N Navigation 97 NEW 64 new attribute set 316 new blank project 64 new buckets 188 new category 191 new computer 13 new features 17 new installation 13 new keywords 193 new mattes 134 new page size 79 82 84 new preset 82 84 new presets 62 New Project 64 New project size 79 New projects 26 no scrap files 237 no projects 237 notes 315 number of frames in a panel 322 number of images in a panel 322 number of panel frames 322 2009 Index 349 number of panel rows andcolumns 322 Numbers on Images 51 O offline 248 Offset 162 Online photo gallery 214 Opacity 126 141 150 open 226 open pages 226 open your projects 226 opening editors 58 Opening the

YearbookFusion User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents